Меню

Mitsubishi mr j3 70b ошибки

9. TROUBLESHOOTING

If an alarm/warning has occurred, refer to this chapter and remove its cause.

9.1 Alarms and warning list

When a fault occurs during operation, the corresponding alarm or warning is displayed. If any alarm or warning

has occurred, refer to section 9.2 or 9.3 and take the appropriate action. When an alarm occurs, ALM turns off.

Set «

1″ in parameter No.PD24 to output the alarm code is outputted by ON/OFF of bit0 to bit2. Warnings

(AL.92 to AL.EA) have no alarm codes. Any alarm code is output at occurrence of the corresponding alarm. In

the normal status, the alarm code is not output.

After its cause has been removed, the alarm can be deactivated in any of the methods marked

deactivation column.

(Note 2)

Alarm code

Display CN1 CN1 CN1

22

23

(bit2) (bit1) (bit0)

AL.10

0

1

AL.12

0

0

AL.13

0

0

AL.15

0

0

AL.16

1

1

AL.17

0

0

AL.19

0

0

AL.1A

1

1

AL.20

1

1

AL.24

1

0

AL.25

1

1

AL.30

0

0

AL.31

1

0

AL.32

1

0

AL.33

0

0

AL.35

1

0

AL.37

0

0

AL.45

0

1

AL.46

0

1

AL.47

0

1

AL.50

0

1

AL.51

0

1

AL.52

1

0

AL.8A

0

0

AL.8E

0

0

88888

Note 1. Deactivate the alarm about 30 minutes of cooling time after removing the cause of occurrence.

2. 0: off

1: on

POINT

As soon as an alarm occurs, turn off Servo-on (SON) and power off.

Name

24

Undervoltage

0

Memory error1 (RAM)

0

Clock error

0

Memory error2 (EEP-ROM)

0

Encoder error1

0

(At power on)

Board error

0

Memory error3

0

(Flash-ROM)

Motor combination error

0

Encoder error2

0

Main circuit error

0

Absolute position erase

0

Regenerative error

1

Overspeed

1

0

Overcurrent

Overvoltage

1

Command pulse frequency

1

alarm

0

Parameter error

Main circuit device overheat

1

Servo motor overheat

1

Cooling fan alarm

1

Overload1

1

1

Overload2

Error excessive

1

Serial communication time-

0

out

Serial communication error

0

Watchdog

Alarm deactivation

Press

Power

«SET» on

Alarm

OFF ON current

reset

alarm

(RES)

screen.

(Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)

(Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)

(Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)

(Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)

(Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)

9 — 1

in the alarm

Display

Name

Open battery cable

AL.92

warning

Home position setting

AL.96

error

AL.99 Stoke limit warning

AL.9F Battery warning

Excessive regeneration

AL.E0

warning

AL.E1 Overload warning 1

Absolute position counter

AL.E3

warning

AL.E5 ABS time-out warning

Servo emergency stop

AL.E6

warning

Cooling fan speed

AL.E8

reduction warning

AL.E9 Main circuit off warning

AL.EA ABS servo on warning

AL.EC Overload warning 2

Output watt excess

AL.ED

warning

  • Ремонт сервоусилителя Mitsubishi
  • Особенности ремонта сервоусилителя Mitsubishi
  • Коды предупреждений и ошибок сервоусилителя Mitsubishi
  • Базовые схемы конфигурации сервоусилителей Mitsubishi
  • Схемы типовых подключений сервоусилителей Mitsubishi
  • Блок схема сервоусилителя Mitsubishi
  • Преимущество ремонта сервоусилителя Mitsubishi в нашем сервисном центре
  • Оставить заявку на ремонт сервоусилителя Mitsubishi

Ремонт сервоусилителя Mitsubishi

Ремонт сервоусилителя Mitsubishi MR-E-10AСервисный центр «Кернел» предлагает выполнить качественный ремонт сервоусилителя Mitsubishi в на компонентном уровне в максимально сжатые сроки. Сервоусилители относятся к сложной промышленной электронике именно поэтому ремонтом сервоусилителей Mitsubishi, впрочем, как и других производителей должны заниматься специалисты, имеющие не только высшее техническое образование, но и солидный опыт в ремонте подобной промышленной электроники.

Также для восстановления подобного промышленного оборудования понадобится хорошая материально-техническая база. При выполнении всех выше перечисленных условий, шансы на успешный ремонт сервоусилителя Mitsubishi возрастают в геометрической прогрессии.

Именно поэтому за ремонтом сервоусилителей, независимо от производителя лучше всего обращаться в специализированный сервисный центр, который отвечает всем техническим требованиям, такой как Кернел. Наш цент имеет отличную материально-техническую базу, а за время существования с 2002 года специалисты компании накопили бесценный опыт в том числе опыт в ремонте сервоусилителей Mitsubishi.

Особенности ремонта сервоусилителя Mitsubishi

Ремонт сервоусилителя Mitsubishi MR-E-20AРемонт сервоусилителей Mitsubishi имеет ряд индивидуальных особенностей, это связано с конструктивными особенностями данного промышленного оборудования. По аналогии с частотными преобразователями они состоят из двух взаимосвязанных частей, это:

  • Аппаратная часть;
  • Программная часть.

В первую очередь ремонтируется аппаратная часть промышленного сервоусилителя. После глубокой диагностики неисправного блока выявляются все неисправные компоненты, которые в последствии заменяются на оригинальные запасные части (по возможности), в случае если сервопривод уже давно снят с производства и найти оригинальные запчасти просто невозможно они заменяются на аналоги.

Данный вид ремонта называется компонентным. От других видов его отличает две немаловажные детали.

  • Значительное удешевление ремонта;
  • Существенное сокращение времени ремонта.

По завершении ремонта аппаратной части сервоусилителя наступает очередь программной. В зависимости от серии выбирается программный продукт и зашивается в блок.

Заключительный этап ремонта сервоусилителя Mitsubishi это проверка на специализированном стенде. Все блоки проверяются без нагрузки и с нагрузкой не менее двух часов.

Коды предупреждений и ошибок сервоусилителя Mitsubishi

При обнаружении неисправности при работе сервоусилителя будет активирована соответствующая защита и выведено предупреждающее сообщение на индикатор сервоусилителя или цифрового пульта.

Коды аварийной сигнализации выводятся при возникновении соответствующей сигнализации. При нормальной работе (отсутствие неполадок) через контакты CN1-10, CN1-11 и CN1-12 выводятся стандартные сигналы состояния (к примеру частота или направление вращения). При возникновении аварийной сигнализации, установите сигнал состояния «Серво выкл.» и прервите питание силового контура.

Коды неисправностей и предупреждений сервоусилителя Mitsubishi MR-E приведены в файле PDF который доступен по ссылке ниже. Дополнительно в файле указаны способы устранения неисправностей и их сброс.

Посмотреть все коды ошибок сервоусилителя Mitsubishi MR-E

Схемы

В некоторых случает может понадобится схема подключения сервоусилителей, ниже мы показаны схемы сервоусилителя Mitsubishi.

Базовые схемы конфигурации сервоусилителей Mitsubishi

Конфигурация системы MR-E-100AG-QW003

Конфигурация системы MR-E-200AG-QW003

Конфигурация системы MR-E-100AG-QW003

Конфигурация системы MR-E-200AG-QW003

Схемы типовых подключений сервоусилителей Mitsubishi

Сервопривод Mitsubishi

Схема регулировки частоты вращения

Сервопривод Mitsubishi

Схема регулировки крутящего момента

Схема регулировки частоты вращения Mitsubishi MR-E

Схема регулировки крутящего момента Mitsubishi MR-E

Блок схема сервоусилителя Mitsubishi

Mitsubishi MR-E-Super с аналоговым входом

Mitsubishi MR-E-Super с аналоговым входом, блок схема

Преимущество ремонта сервоусилителя Mitsubishi в нашем сервисном центре

Во время эксплуатации электроприводов Mitsubishi может возникнуть проблема, далеко не всегда возникшую проблему можно исправить на месте своими силами, наш сервисный центр готов вам в этом помочь, выполнив качественный ремонт сервоусилителей Mitsubishi в сжатые сроки с полугодовой гарантией.

Мы не только восстановим неисправный блок, но и подскажем как действовать в той или иной ситуации для максимально долгой и безаварийной работы сервоусилителя.

Работы, проводимые при ремонте сервоусилителя Mitsubishi в :

Логотип компании 'Кернел'

  • Предварительный осмотр на возможность восстановления бесплатный;
  • Мы производим ремонт сервоусилителя Mitsubishi на компонентном уровне (экономия бюджета и времени)
  • При ремонте сервоусилителей ни каких конструктивных изменений не вносим;
  • Ремонт блоков с применением оригинальных запасных частей (по возможности).
  • Вы платите исключительно за результат — работающий сервопривод;
  • Гарантия на ремонт сервоусилителя Mitsubishi и на запасные части замененные в процессе ремонта 6 месяцев;
  • Сроки ремонта варьируются от 5 до 15 рабочих дней;

За два десятилетия существования сервисного центра нашими специалистами были успешно проведены тысячи подобных ремонтов с каждым разом поднимая квалификацию наших инженеров. Ниже представлен далеко не полный список сервоусилителей Mitsubishi серии MR-E ремонтируемые в нашем сервисном центре.

MR-E Super Сервоусилитель 1(3) x 200-230В/50-60Гц (управление импульсной последовательностью)

MR-E-10A-QW003

Ремонт сервоусилителя MR-E-A для двигателей до 100 Вт

MR-E-20A-QW003

Ремонт сервоусилителя MR-E-A для двигателей до 200 Вт

MR-E-40A-QW003

Ремонт сервоусилителя MR-E-A для двигателей до 400 Вт

MR-E-70A-QW003

Ремонт сервоусилителя MR-E-A для двигателей до 750 Вт

MR-E Super Сервоусилитель 3 x 200-230В/50-60Гц (управление импульсной последовательностью)

MR-E-100A-QW003

Ремонт сервоусилителя MR-E-A для двигателей до 1кВт

MR-E-200A-QW003

Ремонт сервоусилителя MR-E-A для двигателей до 2кВт

MR-E Super Сервоусилитель 1(3) x 200-230В/50-60Гц (управление аналоговым сигналом)

MR-E-10AG-QW003

Ремонт сервоусилителя MR-E-AG для двигателей до 100 Вт

MR-E-20AG-QW003

Ремонт сервоусилителя MR-E-AG для двигателей до 200 Вт

MR-E-40AG-QW003

Ремонт сервоусилителя MR-E-AG для двигателей до 400 Вт

MR-E-70AG-QW003

Ремонт сервоусилителя MR-E-AG для двигателей до 750 Вт

MR-E Super Сервоусилитель 3 x 200-230В/50-60Гц (управление аналоговым сигналом)

MR-E-100AG-QW003

Ремонт сервоусилителя MR-E-AG для двигателей до 1кВт

MR-E-200AG-QW003

Ремонт сервоусилителя MR-E-AG для двигателей до 2кВт

В таблице представлены исключительно сервоусилители Mitsubishi серии MR-E ремонт которых мы вам предлагаем, также специалисты нашей компании ремонтируют сервоусилители не зависимо от серии и под каким брендом они были выпущены.

Оставить заявку на ремонт сервоусилителя Mitsubishi

У вас остались вопросы, связанные с ремонтом или сбросом ошибок, а также программированием и настройкой сервоусилителей Mitsubishi? Оставьте заявку на ремонт сервоусилителя Mitsubishi в нашим менеджерам. Связаться с ними можно несколькими способами:

Наши контакты

  • Заказав обратный звонок (кнопка в правом нижнем углу сайта)
  • Посредством чата (кнопка расположена с левой стороны сайта)
  • Позвонив по номеру телефона: +7(8482) 79-78-54; +7(917) 121-53-01
  • Написав на электронную почту: 89171215301@mail.ru

За время существования сервисного центра нашими специалистами были отремонтированы десятки и сотни тысяч единиц промышленной электроники. Вот далеко не полный список производителей промышленной электроники и оборудования, ремонтируемой в нашей компании.

Mitsubishi Electric Melservo-J3 Series MR-J3-B Instruction Manual

  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Troubleshooting

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

General-Purpose AC Servo

SSCNET

MODEL

MR-J3- B

SERVO AMPLIFIER

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

J3

Compatible

Series

C

loading

Related Manuals for Mitsubishi Electric Melservo-J3 Series MR-J3-B

Summary of Contents for Mitsubishi Electric Melservo-J3 Series MR-J3-B

  • Page 1
    General-Purpose AC Servo Series SSCNET Compatible MODEL MR-J3- B SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL…
  • Page 2: Safety Instructions

    Safety Instructions (Always read these instructions before using the equipment.) Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the servo amplifier and servo motor until you have read through this Instruction Manual, Installation guide, Servo motor Instruction Manual and appended documents carefully and can use the equipment correctly.

  • Page 3
    1. To prevent electric shock, note the following: WARNING Before wiring or inspection, turn off the power and wait for 15 minutes or more (20 minutes or for drive unit 30kW or more) until the charge lamp turns off. Then, confirm that the voltage between P( ) and N( ) (L and L for drive unit 30kW or more) is safe with a voltage tester and others.
  • Page 4
    4. Additional instructions The following instructions should also be fully noted. Incorrect handling may cause a fault, injury, electric shock, etc. (1) Transportation and installation CAUTION Transport the products correctly according to their weights. Stacking in excess of the specified number of products is not allowed. Do not carry the servo motor by the cables, shaft or encoder.
  • Page 5
    Never hit the servo motor or shaft, especially when coupling the servo motor to the machine. The encoder may become faulty. Do not subject the servo motor shaft to more than the permissible load. Otherwise, the shaft may break. When the equipment has been stored for an extended period of time, consult Mitsubishi. (2) Wiring CAUTION Wire the equipment correctly and securely.
  • Page 6
    (3) Test run adjustment CAUTION Before operation, check the parameter settings. Improper settings may cause some machines to perform unexpected operation. The parameter settings must not be changed excessively. Operation will be insatiable. (4) Usage CAUTION Provide an external emergency stop circuit to ensure that operation can be stopped and power switched off immediately.
  • Page 7
    (5) Corrective actions CAUTION When it is assumed that a hazardous condition may take place at the occur due to a power failure or a product fault, use a servo motor with electromagnetic brake or an external brake mechanism for the purpose of prevention.
  • Page 8
    Write to the EEP-ROM due to device changes Precautions for Choosing the Products Mitsubishi will not be held liable for damage caused by factors found not to be the cause of Mitsubishi; machine damage or lost profits caused by faults in the Mitsubishi products; damage, secondary damage, accident compensation caused by special factors unpredictable by Mitsubishi;…
  • Page 9
    COMPLIANCE WITH EC DIRECTIVES 1. WHAT ARE EC DIRECTIVES? The EC directives were issued to standardize the regulations of the EU countries and ensure smooth distribution of safety-guaranteed products. In the EU countries, the machinery directive (effective in January, 1995), EMC directive (effective in January, 1996) and low voltage directive (effective in January, 1997) of the EC directives require that products to be sold should meet their fundamental safety requirements and carry the CE marks (CE marking).
  • Page 10
    (2) Configuration The control circuit provide safe separation to the main circuit in the converter unit and servo amplifier (drive unit). (a) MR-J3-22KB(4) or less Control box Reinforced insulating type 24VDC power supply No-fuse Magnetic Serve breaker contactor motor Servo amplifier (b) MR-J3-DU30KB(4) or more Control box…
  • Page 11
    (b) Do not connect two ground cables to the same protective earth (PE) terminal. Always connect the cables to the terminals one-to-one. PE terminals PE terminals (c) If a leakage current breaker is used to prevent an electric shock, the protective earth (PE) terminals of the servo amplifier must be connected to the corresponding earth terminals.
  • Page 12
    CONFORMANCE WITH UL/C-UL STANDARD (1) Converter unit, servo amplifiers (drive unit) and servo motors used Use the converter unit, servo amplifiers (drive unit) and servo motors which comply with the standard model. Converter unit series :MR-J3-CR55K MR-J3-CR55K4 Servo amplifier (drive unit) series :MR-J3-10B to MR-J3-22KB MR-J3-10B1 to MR-J3-40B1 MR-J3-60B4 to MR-J3-22KB4…
  • Page 13
    (4) Capacitor discharge time The capacitor discharge time is as listed below. To ensure safety, do not touch the charging section for 15 minutes (more than 20 minutes in case drive unit is 30kW or more) after power-off. Servo amplifier Discharge time [min] MR-J3-10B 20B MR-J3-40B 60B(4) 10B1 20B1…
  • Page 14
    (7) About wiring protection For installation in United States, branch circuit protection must be provided, in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any applicable local codes. For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided, in accordance with the Canada Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes.
  • Page 15
    MEMO A — 14…
  • Page 16: Table Of Contents

    CONTENTS 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1 — 1 to 1 -28 1.1 Introduction…………………………. 1 — 1 1.2 Function block diagram……………………..1 — 2 1.3 Servo amplifier standard specifications………………..1 — 5 1.4 Function list ………………………… 1 — 7 1.5 Model code definition ……………………..1 — 8 1.6 Combination with servo motor ……………………

  • Page 17
    3.13 Control axis selection……………………..3 -51 4. STARTUP 4 — 1 to 4 -10 4.1 Switching power on for the first time ………………….. 4 — 1 4.1.1 Startup procedure……………………..4 — 1 4.1.2 Wiring check ……………………….4 — 2 4.1.3 Surrounding environment……………………4 — 3 4.2 Start up …………………………
  • Page 18
    6.4 Interpolation mode ……………………..6 -11 6.5 Differences between MELSERVO-J2-Super and MELSERVO-J3 in auto tuning…….. 6 -12 7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 7 — 1 to 7 -16 7.1 Function block diagram……………………..7 — 1 7.2 Adaptive filter ……………………….7 — 1 7.3 Machine resonance suppression filter…………………
  • Page 19
    11.3.4 Outline dimension drawings………………….11-43 11.4 Power regeneration converter ………………….11-45 11.5 Power regeneration common converter ………………..11-48 11.6 External dynamic brake ……………………11-56 11.7 Junction terminal block PS7DW-20V14B-F (recommended)…………. 11-61 11.8 MR Configurator……………………… 11-63 11.9 Battery MR-J3BAT ……………………..11-64 11.10 Heat sink outside mounting attachment (MR-J3ACN)…………..
  • Page 20
    13.4.1 Display flowchart ……………………… 13-47 13.4.2 Status display mode……………………13-48 13.4.3 Diagnostic mode……………………..13-49 13.4.4 Alarm mode ……………………… 13-51 13.4.5 Parameter mode ……………………… 13-52 13.5. Parameters for converter unit ………………….13-53 13.5.1 Parameter list ……………………..13-53 13.5.2 List of details……………………..13-54 13.6 Troubleshooting ………………………
  • Page 21
    MEMO…
  • Page 22: Functions And Configuration

    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.1 Introduction The Mitsubishi MELSERVO-J3 series general-purpose AC servo has further higher performance and higher functions compared to the current MELSERVO-J2-Super series. The MR-J3-B servo amplifier connects to servo system controller and others via high speed synchronous network and operates by directly reading position data.

  • Page 23: Function Block Diagram

    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.2 Function block diagram The function block diagram of this servo is shown below. (1) MR-J3-350B or less MR-J3-200B4 or less Power factor improving DC Regenerative reactor option N( ) Servo amplifier P( ) Servo motor Diode (Note 1) stack Relay…

  • Page 24
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (2) MR-J3-350B4 MR-J3-500B(4) MR-J3-700B(4) Power factor improving DC Regenerative reactor option Servo amplifier Servo motor Diode stack Relay (Note) Current Power detector supply CHARGE Regene- lamp rative Dynamic Cooling fan brake Electro- Control magnetic circuit brake power supply Base…
  • Page 25
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (3) MR-J3-11KB(4) to 22KB(4) Power factor improving DC Regenerative reactor option Servo amplifier Servo motor Diode stack Thyristor (Note) Current Power detector supply CHARGE Regene- lamp rative Dynamic Cooling fan brake Electro- Control magnetic circuit brake power supply Base…
  • Page 26: Servo Amplifier Standard Specifications

    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.3 Servo amplifier standard specifications (1) 200V class, 100V class Servo Amplifier 10B 20B 40B 60B 70B 100B 200B 350B 500B 700B 11KB 15KB 22KB 10B1 20B1 40B1 MR-J3- Item 3-phase or 1-phase 200 1-phase 100V to Voltage/frequency 3-phase 200 to 230VAC, 50/60Hz to 230VAC, 50/60Hz…

  • Page 27
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (2) 400V class Servo Amplifier 60B4 100B4 200B4 350B4 500B4 700B4 11KB4 15KB4 22KB4 MR-J3- Item Voltage/frequency 3-phase 380 to 480VAC, 50/60Hz Permissible voltage fluctuation 3-phase 323 to 528VAC Permissible frequency Within 5% fluctuation Power supply capacity Refer to section 10.2 Inrush current Refer to section 10.5…
  • Page 28: Function List

    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.4 Function list The following table lists the functions of this servo. For details of the functions, refer to the reference field. Function Description Reference High-resolution encoder of 262144 pulses/rev is used as a servo motor High-resolution encoder encoder.

  • Page 29: Model Code Definition

    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.5 Model code definition (1) Rating plate AC SERVO Model MR-J3-10B Capacity POWER : 100W Applicable power supply INPUT 0.9A 3PH+1PH200-230V 50Hz 3PH+1PH200-230V 60Hz 1.3A 1PH 200-230V 50/60Hz OUTPUT: 170V 0-360Hz 1.1A Rated output current SERIAL : A34230001 Serial number 1 — 8…

  • Page 30
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (2) Model MR-J3-100B or less MR-J3-60B4 100B4 With no regenerative resistor Symbol Description Series Indicates a servo amplifier of 11 to 22kw that does not use a regenerative resistor as standard accessory. Power supply Symbol Power supply Rating plate Rating plate 3-phase or 1-phase 200…
  • Page 31: Combination With Servo Motor

    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.6 Combination with servo motor The following table lists combinations of servo amplifiers and servo motors. The same combinations apply to the models with electromagnetic brakes. Servo motors Servo amplifier HF-SP HF-MP HF-KP HC-RP HC-UP HC-LP 1000r/min 2000r/min MR-J3-10B (1)

  • Page 32: Structure

    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.7 Structure 1.7.1 Parts identification (1) MR-J3-100B or less Detailed Name/Application Explanation Display The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo Chapter 4 status and alarm number. Rotary axis setting switch (SW1) Used to set the axis No. of servo amplifier. Section 3.13 ON 4F Test operation select switch (SW2-1)

  • Page 33
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (2) MR-J3-60B4 MR-J3-100B4 Detailed Name/Application Explanation Display The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo Chapter 4 status and alarm number. Rotary axis setting switch (SW1) Used to set the axis No. of servo amplifier. Section 3.13 ON 4F Test operation select switch (SW2-1) TEST…
  • Page 34
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (3) MR-J3-200B MR-J3-350B Detailed Name/Application Explanation Display The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo Chapter 4 status and alarm number. Rotary axis setting switch (SW1) Used to set the axis No. of servo amplifier. Section 3.13 ON 4F Test operation select switch (SW2-1) TEST…
  • Page 35
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (4) MR-J3-200B4 Detailed Name/Application Explanation Display The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo Chapter 4 status and alarm number. Rotary axis setting switch (SW1) Used to set the axis No. of servo amplifier. Section 3.13 ON 4F Test operation select switch (SW2-1) TEST Used to perform the test operation…
  • Page 36
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (5) MR-J3-350B4 MR-J3-500B(4) POINT The servo amplifier is shown without the front cover. For removal of the front cover, refer to section 1.7.2. Detailed Name/Application Explanation Display The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo Chapter 4 status and alarm number.
  • Page 37
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (6) MR-J3-700B(4) POINT The servo amplifier is shown without the front cover. For removal of the front cover, refer to section 1.7.2. Detailed Name/Application Explanation Display The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo Chapter 4 status and alarm number. Rotary axis setting switch (SW1) Used to set the axis No.
  • Page 38
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (7) MR-J3-11KB(4) to MR-J3-22KB(4) POINT The servo amplifier is shown without the front cover. For removal of the front cover, refer to section 1.7.2. Detailed Name/Application Explanation Display The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo Chapter 4 status and alarm number.
  • Page 39: Removal And Reinstallation Of The

    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.7.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover Before removing or installing the front cover, turn off the power and wait for 15 minutes or more until the charge lamp turns off. Then, confirm that the voltage WARNING between P( ) and N( ) is safe with a voltage tester and others.

  • Page 40
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION Reinstallation of the front cover Front cover setting tab Insert the front cover setting tabs into the sockets of Pull up the cover, supporting at point A) . servo amplifier (2 places). Setting tab Push the setting tabs until they click. 1 — 19…
  • Page 41
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (2) For MR-J3-11KB(4) to MR-J3-22KB(4) Removal of the front cover 1) Press the removing knob on the lower side of the 3) Pull it to remove the front cover. front cover ( A) and B) ) and release the installation hook.
  • Page 42: Configuration Including Auxiliary Equipment

    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.8 Configuration including auxiliary equipment POINT Equipment other than the servo amplifier and servo motor are optional or recommended products. (1) MR-J3-100B or less (a) For 3-phase or 1-phase 200V to 230VAC Personal R S T computer (Note 3) MR Configurator…

  • Page 43
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (b) For 1-phase 100V to 120VAC Personal computer MR Configurator (Note 3) Power supply Servo amplifier No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse Junction terminal block Magnetic (Note 2) contactor (MC) Servo system CN1A controller or Front axis Power factor servo amplifier CN1B improving…
  • Page 44
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (2) MR-J3-60B4 MR-J3-100B4 Personal R S T computer MR Configurator (Note 3) Power supply Servo amplifier No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse Junction terminal Magnetic block contactor (MC) Servo system CN1A (Note 2) controller or Front axis servo amplifier CN1B Line noise CN1B…
  • Page 45
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (3) MR-J3-200B MR-J3-350B R S T (Note 4) Power supply No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse Magnetic contactor (MC) Personal computer MR Configurator (Note 2) (Note 3) Line noise filter (FR-BSF01) Servo amplifier Junction terminal block Servo system CN1A (Note 2) controller or Front axis…
  • Page 46
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (4) MR-J3-200B4 R S T (Note 3) Power supply No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse Magnetic contactor Personal (MC) computer MR Configurator (Note 2) Line noise filter (FR-BSF01) Servo amplifier (Note 2) Power factor improving DC Junction reactor terminal (FR-BEL-H)
  • Page 47
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (5) MR-J3-350B4 MR-J3-500B(4) R S T (Note 3) Power supply Personal computer MR Configurator No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse Servo amplifier Junction terminal Magnetic block contactor (MC) (Note 2) (Note 1) Battery Servo system CN1A MR-J3BAT controller or Front axis Line noise filter servo amplifier CN1B…
  • Page 48
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (6) MR-J3-700B(4) R S T Personal (Note 3) computer Power supply MR Configurator No-fuse breaker Servo amplifier (NFB) or fuse Junction Magnetic terminal contactor block (MC) (Note 2) Servo system Line noise filter CN1A controller or Front axis (FR-BLF) servo amplifier CN1B (Note 1)
  • Page 49
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (7) MR-J3-11KB(4) to MR-J3-22KB(4) (Note 3) R S T Power supply Personal computer MR Configurator No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse Servo amplifier Junction Magnetic terminal contactor block (MC) Servo system (Note 2) controller or Front axis (Note 1) CN1A Line noise filter…
  • Page 50: Installation

    Do not install or operate a faulty servo amplifier. When the product has been stored for an extended period of time, consult Mitsubishi. When treating the servo amplifier, be careful about the edged parts such as the corners of the servo amplifier.

  • Page 51
    2. INSTALLATION (b) Installation of two or more servo amplifiers POINT Mounting closely is available for a combination of servo amplifiers of 3.5kW or less in 200V or 100V class. Leave a large clearance between the top of the servo amplifier and the internal surface of the control box, and install a cooling fan to prevent the internal temperature of the control box from exceeding the environmental conditions.
  • Page 52: Keep Out Foreign Materials

    2. INSTALLATION (b) Installation of two or more servo amplifiers Leave a large clearance between the top of the servo amplifier and the internal surface of the control box, and install a cooling fan to prevent the internal temperature of the control box from exceeding the environmental conditions.

  • Page 53: Sscnet Cable Laying

    2. INSTALLATION 2.4 SSCNET cable laying SSCNET cable is made from optical fiber. If optical fiber is added a power such as a major shock, lateral pressure, haul, sudden bending or twist, its inside distorts or breaks, and optical transmission will not be available.

  • Page 54
    2. INSTALLATION (4) Bundle fixing Fix the cable at the closest part to the connector with bundle material in order to prevent SSCNET cable from putting its own weight on CN1A CN1B connector of servo amplifier. Optical cord should be given loose slack to avoid from becoming smaller than the minimum bend radius, and it should not be twisted.
  • Page 55: Inspection Items

    2. INSTALLATION 2.5 Inspection items Before starting maintenance and/or inspection, turn off the power and wait for 15 minutes or more until the charge lamp turns off. Then, confirm that the voltage between P( ) and N( ) is safe with a voltage tester and others. Otherwise, an electric shock may occur.

  • Page 56: Signals And Wiring

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Any person who is involved in wiring should be fully competent to do the work. Before wiring, turn off the power and wait for 15 minutes or more until the charge lamp turns off. Then, confirm that the voltage between P( ) and N( ) is safe with a voltage tester and others.

  • Page 57: Input Power Supply Circuit

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.1 Input power supply circuit Always connect a magnetic contactor (MC) between the main circuit power supply and L and L of the servo amplifier, and configure the wiring to be able to shut down the power supply on the side of the servo amplifier’s power supply. If a magnetic contactor (MC) is not connected, continuous flow of a large current may CAUTION cause a fire when the servo amplifier malfunctions.

  • Page 58
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Note 1. Always connect P . (Factory-wired.) When using the power factor improving DC reactor, refer to section 11.13. 2. Always connect P-D. (Factory-wired.) When using the regenerative option, refer to section 11.2. 3. For the encoder cable, use of the option cable is recommended. Refer to section 11.1 for selection of the cable. 4.
  • Page 59
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (3) For MR-J3-10B1 to MR-J3-40B1 (Note 4) Controller Forced Alarm forced stop stop Servo amplifier Servo motor CNP1 1-phase CNP3 100 to (Note 6) Blank 120VAC Motor (Note 1) CNP2 (Note 2) (Note 3) Encoder Encoder cable 24VDC Forced stop DOCOM…
  • Page 60
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (4) MR-J3-60B4 to MR-J3-200B4 (Note 4) Controller Forced Alarm forced stop stop (Note 7) Stepdown transformer Servo amplifier Servo motor CNP1 3-phase CNP3 (Note 6) 200 to Motor 230VAC (Note 1) CNP2 (Note 2) (Note 3) Encoder Encoder cable 24VDC…
  • Page 61
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (5) MR-J3-500B MR-J3-700B (Note 4) Controller Forced Alarm forced stop stop (Note 7) Power supply of Cooling fan Servo amplifier Servo motor 3-phase (Note 6) Built-in 200 to regenerative Motor 230VAC resistor (Note 2) (Note 3) Encoder Encoder cable (Note 1)
  • Page 62
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (6) MR-J3-350B4 to MR-J3-700B4 (Note 4) Controller Forced Alarm forced stop stop (Note 8) Power supply of Cooling fan (Note 7) Stepdown transformer Servo amplifier Servo motor 3-phase (Note 6) Built-in 380 to regenerative Motor 480VAC resistor (Note 2) (Note 3)
  • Page 63
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (7) MR-J3-11KB to MR-J3-22KB (Note 4) Controller Servo motor Forced Alarm forced stop thermal relay stop Servo amplifier Servo motor Dynamic break (Option) 3-phase 200 to 230VAC (Note 2) (Note 6) (Note 1) Regenerative resistor (Note 3) Encoder Encoder cable (Note 7)
  • Page 64
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (8) MR-J3-11KB4 to MR-J3-22KB4 (Note 4) Controller Servo motor Forced Alarm forced stop thermal relay stop (Note 8) Cooling fan power supply (Note 9) Stepdown transformer Servo amplifier Servo motor Dynamic break (Option) 3-phase 380 to 480VAC (Note 6) (Note 2)
  • Page 65: I/O Signal Connection Example

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.2 I/O signal connection example Servo amplifier (Note10) 24VDC (Note12) (Note12) Power (Note2) (Note14) supply DICOM Magnetic brake interlock DOCOM In-position (Note3,4)Forced stop (Note13,14) Trouble (Note11) (Note15) DICOM Personal USB cable Encoder A-phase pulse (Note5) computer MR-J3USBCBL3M (differential line driver) MR Configurator…

  • Page 66
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Note 1 To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal (terminal marked ) of the servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box. 2. Connect the diode in the correct direction. If it is connected reversely, the servo amplifier will be faulty and will not output signals, disabling the forced stop (EM1) and other protective circuits.
  • Page 67: Explanation Of Power Supply System

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.3 Explanation of power supply system 3.3.1 Signal explanations POINT For the layout of connector and terminal block, refer to outline drawings in chapter 9. Connection Target Abbreviation Description (Application) Supply the following power to L .

  • Page 68: Power-On Sequence

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.3.2 Power-on sequence (1) Power-on procedure 1) Always wire the power supply as shown in above section 3.1 using the magnetic contactor with the main circuit power supply (three-phase: L , single-phase: L ). Configure up an external sequence to switch off the magnetic contactor as soon as an alarm occurs.

  • Page 69: Cnp1, Cnp2, Cnp3 Wiring Method

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.3.3 CNP1, CNP2, CNP3 wiring method POINT Refer to table 11.1 in section 11.11 for the wire sizes used for wiring. MR-J3-500B or more MR-J3-350B4 or more does not have these connectors. Use the supplied servo amplifier power supply connectors for wiring of CNP1, CNP2 and CNP3. (1) MR-J3-10B to MR-J3-100B (a) Servo amplifier power supply connectors (Note)Servo amplifier power supply connectors…

  • Page 70
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (c) The twin type connector for CNP2 (L ): 721-2105/026-000 (WAGO JAPAN) Using this connector enables passing a wire of control circuit power supply. Refer to Appendix 3 for details of connector. Twin type connector for CNP2 CNP2 Power supply Rear axis…
  • Page 71
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (b) Termination of the cables 1) CNP1 CNP3 Solid wire: After the sheath has been stripped, the cable can be used as it is. Sheath Core Twisted wire: Use the cable after stripping the sheath and twisting the core. At this time, take care to avoid a short caused by the loose wires of the core and the adjacent pole.
  • Page 72
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (b) Termination of the cables Solid wire: After the sheath has been stripped, the cable can be used as it is. Sheath Core 8 to 9mm Twisted wire: Use the cable after stripping the sheath and twisting the core. At this time, take care to avoid a short caused by the loose wires of the core and the adjacent pole.
  • Page 73
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (a) When using the supplied cable connection lever 1) The servo amplifier is packed with the cable connection lever. a) 54932-0000 (Molex) [Unit: mm] 20.6 Approx. 4.9 M X J 5 4 9 3 2 Approx.3.4 b) 231-131 (WAGO JAPAN) [Unit: mm] 20.3…
  • Page 74
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 2) Cable connection procedure Cable connection lever 1) Attach the cable connection lever to the housing. (Detachable) 2) Push the cable connection lever in the direction of arrow. 3) Hold down the cable connection lever and insert the cable in the direction of arrow.
  • Page 75
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (b) Inserting the cable into the connector 1) Applicable flat-blade screwdriver dimensions Always use the screwdriver shown here to do the work. [Unit: mm] Approx. R0.3 Approx. 22 Approx. R0.3 2) When using the flat-blade screwdriver — part 1 1) Insert the screwdriver into the square hole.
  • Page 76
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3) When using the flat-blade screwdriver — part 2 1) Insert the screwdriver into the 2) Push the screwdriver in the 3) With the screwdriver pushed, insert the cable in the square window at top of the direction of arrow.
  • Page 77
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (4) How to insert the cable into Phoenix Contact connector POINT Do not use a precision driver because the cable cannot be tightened with enough torque. Insertion of cables into Phoenix Contact connector PC4/6-STF-7.62-CRWH or PC4/3-STF-7.62-CRWH is shown as follows.
  • Page 78: Connectors And Signal Arrangements

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.4 Connectors and signal arrangements POINT The pin configurations of the connectors are as viewed from the cable connector wiring section. (1) Signal arrangement The servo amplifier front view shown is that of the MR-J3-20B or less. Refer to chapter 9 Outline Drawings for the appearances and connector layouts of the other servo amplifiers.

  • Page 79: Signal (Device) Explanations

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.5 Signal (device) explanations For the I/O interfaces (symbols in I/O division column in the table), refer to section 3.7.2. In the control mode field of the table The pin No.s in the connector pin No. column are those in the initial status. (1) Connector applications Connector Name…

  • Page 80
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (b) Output device Connector Device Symbol Function/Application Pin No. division Trouble CN3-15 ALM turns off when power is switched off or the protective circuit is DO-1 activated to shut off the base circuit. Without alarm occurring, ALM turns on within about 1s after power-on. Electromagnetic CN3-13 When using this signal, set operation delay time of the electromagnetic…
  • Page 81
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Connector Device Symbol Function/Application Pin No. division Warning When using this signal, make it usable by the setting of parameter DO-1 No.PD07 to PD09. When warning has occurred, WNG turns on. When there is no warning, WNG turns off within about 1.5s after power-on.
  • Page 82: Alarm Occurrence Timing Chart

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.6 Alarm occurrence timing chart When an alarm has occurred, remove its cause, make sure that the operation signal is not being input, ensure safety, and reset the alarm before restarting CAUTION operation. As soon as an alarm occurs, make the Servo off status and interrupt the main circuit power.

  • Page 83: Interfaces

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.7 Interfaces 3.7.1 Internal connection diagram Servo amplifier Approx Forced stop 5.6k DICOM (Note 3) (Note 2) (Note 1) Approx (Note 3) 5.6k 24VDC DICOM DOCOM <Isolated> Differential line driver output (35mA or less) Analog monitor 10VDC VBUS 10VDC…

  • Page 84: Detailed Description Of Interfaces

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.7.2 Detailed description of interfaces This section provides the details of the I/O signal interfaces (refer to the I/O division in the table) given in section 3.5. Refer to this section and make connection with the external equipment. (1) Digital input interface DI-1 Give a signal with a relay or open collector transistor.

  • Page 85
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (3) Encoder pulse output DO-2 (Differential line driver system) (a) Interface Max. output current: 35mA Servo amplifier Servo amplifier Am26LS32 or equivalent High-speed photocoupler (LB, LZ) (LB, LZ) (LBR, LZR) (LBR, LZR) b) Output pulse Servo motor CCW rotation Time cycle (T) is determined by the settings of parameter No.PA15 and PC03.
  • Page 86: Source I/O Interfaces

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.7.3 Source I/O interfaces In this servo amplifier, source type I/O interfaces can be used. In this case, all DI-1 input signals and DO-1 output signals are of source type. Perform wiring according to the following interfaces. (1) Digital input interface DI-1 Servo amplifier EM1,…

  • Page 87: Treatment Of Cable Shield External Conductor

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.8 Treatment of cable shield external conductor In the case of the CN2 and CN3 connectors, securely connect the shielded external conductor of the cable to the ground plate as shown in this section and fix it to the connector shell. External conductor Sheath Core…

  • Page 88: Sscnet Cable Connection

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.9 SSCNET cable connection POINT Do not see directly the light generated from CN1A CN1B connector of servo amplifier or the end of SSCNET cable. When the light gets into eye, may feel something is wrong for eye. (The light source of SSCNET complies with class1 defined in JIS C6802 or IEC60825-1.) (1) SSCNET cable connection…

  • Page 89
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3) With holding a tab of SSCNET cable connector, make sure to insert it into CN1A CN1B connector of servo amplifier until you hear the click. If the end face of optical code tip is dirty, optical transmission is interrupted and it may cause malfunctions.
  • Page 90: Connection Of Servo Amplifier And Servo Motor

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.10 Connection of servo amplifier and servo motor During power-on, do not open or close the motor power line. Otherwise, a CAUTION malfunction or faulty may occur. 3.10.1 Connection instructions Insulate the connections of the power supply terminals to prevent an electric WARNING shock.

  • Page 91: Power Supply Cable Wiring Diagrams

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.10.2 Power supply cable wiring diagrams (1) HF-MP service HF-KP series HF-KP series servo motor (a) When cable length is 10m or less 10m or less MR-PWS1CBL M-A1-L MR-PWS1CBL M-A2-L MR-PWS1CBL M-A1-H Servo amplifier Servo motor MR-PWS1CBL M-A2-H CNP3 AWG 19(red)

  • Page 92
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (2) HF-SP series HC-RP series HC-UP series HC-LP series servo motor POINT Insert a contact in the direction shown in the figure. If inserted in the wrong direction, the contact is damaged and falls off. Soldered part or Soldered part Pin No.1 Pin No.1…
  • Page 93
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 2) When the power supply connector and the electromagnetic brake connector are shared. 50m or less Servo amplifier Servo motor DC24V DOCOM DICOM Electromagnetic Forced brake interlock Trouble stop (MBR) (ALM) (EM1) 24VDC power supply for (Note) electromagnetic brake…
  • Page 94
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Power supply connector signal allotment Encoder connector signal allotment MS3102A18-10P Power supply connector signal allotment CM10-R10P MS3102A22-22P CE05-2A22-23PD-B CE05-2A32-17PD-B Terminal Terminal Terminal Signal Signal Signal (earth) (earth) View a View b View b (Note) (Note) Note. For the motor with electromagnetic brake, supply…
  • Page 95
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (3) HA-LP series servo motor (a) Wiring diagrams Refer to section 11.11 for the cables used for wiring. 1) 200V class 50m or less Servo amplifier Servo motor 24VDC Cooling fan (Note 2) DOCOM DICOM Electromagnetic Forced brake interlock Trouble…
  • Page 96
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 2) 400V class (Note4) Cooling fan power supply 50m or less Servo amplifier Servo motor 24VDC Cooling fan (Note 2) DOCOM DICOM Electromagnetic Forced brake interlock Trouble stop (MBR) (ALM) (EM1) 24VDC power supply for (Note 1) electromagnetic brake OHS1…
  • Page 97
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (b) Servo motor terminals Encoder connector CM10-R10P Brake connector Terminal box MS3102A10SL-4P Encoder connector signal Terminal Brake connector signal Terminal Signal Signal allotment allotment CM10-R10P MS3102A10SL-4P (Note) (Note) Note. For the motor with electromagnetic brake, supply electromagnetic brake power (24VDC).
  • Page 98
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Terminal box inside (HA-LP801(4), 12K1(4), 11K1M(4), 15K1M(4), 15K2(4), 22K2(4)) Thermal sensor Cooling fan terminal block terminal block (OHS1,OHS2) M4 screw (BU,BV,BW) M4 screw Terminal block signal Motor power supply terminal block arrangement (U,V,W) M8 screw Encoder connector CM10-R10P OHS1OHS2 Earth terminal M6 screw…
  • Page 99
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Terminal box inside (HA-LP25K1) Encoder connector CM10-R10P Thermal sensor terminal block (OHS1, OHS2) M4 screw Motor power supply terminal block (U, V, W) M10 screw Cooling fan terminal block (BU, BV, BW) M4 screw Earth terminal M6 screw Terminal block signal arrangement BW OHS1 OHS2…
  • Page 100
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Signal Name Abbreviation Description Connect to the motor output terminals (U, V, W) of the servo amplifier. During power-on, do Power supply U V W not open or close the motor power line. Otherwise, a malfunction or faulty may occur. Supply power which satisfies the following specifications.
  • Page 101: Servo Motor With Electromagnetic Brake

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.11 Servo motor with electromagnetic brake 3.11.1 Safety precautions Configure the electromagnetic brake circuit so that it is activated not only by the interface unit signals but also by a forced stop (EM1). Contacts must be open when Circuit must be servo-off, when an alarm occurrence opened during…

  • Page 102: Timing Charts

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.11.2 Timing charts (1) Servo-on command (from controller) ON/OFF Tb [ms] after the servo-on is switched off, the servo lock is released and the servo motor coasts. If the electromagnetic brake is made valid in the servo lock status, the brake life may be shorter. Therefore, when using the electromagnetic brake in a vertical lift application or the like, set delay time (Tb) to about the same as the electromagnetic brake operation delay time to prevent a drop.

  • Page 103
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (3) Alarm occurrence Dynamic brake Dynamic brake Electromagnetic brake Servo motor speed Electromagnetic brake (10ms) Base circuit Invalid(ON) Electromagnetic brake Electromagnetic operation delay time brake interlock (MBR) Valid(OFF) Alarm (4) Both main and control circuit power supplies off Dynamic brake Dynamic brake (10ms)
  • Page 104: Wiring Diagrams (Hf-Mp Series Hf-Kp Series Servo Motor)

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.11.3 Wiring diagrams (HF-MP series HF-KP series servo motor) POINT For HF-SP series HC-RP series HC-UP series HC-LP series servo motors, refer to section 3.10.2 (2). (1) When cable length is 10m or less 10m or less 24VDC power MR-BKS1CBL M-A1-L supply for…

  • Page 105: Grounding

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.12 Grounding Ground the servo amplifier and servo motor securely. To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal WARNING (terminal marked ) of the servo amplifier with the protective earth (PE) of the control box.

  • Page 106: Control Axis Selection

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.13 Control axis selection POINT The control axis number set to rotary axis setting switch (SW1) should be the same as the one set to the servo system controller. Use the rotary axis setting switch (SW1) to set the control axis number for the servo. If the same numbers are set to different control axes in a single communication system, the system will not operate properly.

  • Page 107
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING MEMO 3 — 52…
  • Page 108: Switching Power On For The First Time

    4. STARTUP 4. STARTUP WARNING Do not operate the switches with wet hands. You may get an electric shock. Before starting operation, check the parameters. Some machines may perform unexpected operation. Take safety measures, e.g. provide covers, to prevent accidental contact of hands and parts (cables, etc.) with the servo amplifier heat sink, regenerative resistor, servo motor, etc.

  • Page 109: Wiring Check

    4. STARTUP 4.1.2 Wiring check (1) Power supply system wiring Before switching on the main circuit and control circuit power supplies, check the following items. (a) Power supply system wiring The power supplied to the power input terminals (L ) of the servo amplifier should satisfy the defined specifications.

  • Page 110: Surrounding Environment

    4. STARTUP 2) When regenerative option is used over 5kW for 200V class and 3.5kW for 400V class The lead of built-in regenerative resistor connected to P terminal and D terminal of TE1 terminal block should not be connected. The generative brake option should be connected to P terminal and C terminal. A twisted cable should be used when wiring is over 5m and under 10m.

  • Page 111: Start Up

    4. STARTUP 4.2 Start up Connect the servo motor with a machine after confirming that the servo motor operates properly alone. (1) Power on When the main and control circuit power supplies are switched on, «b01» (for the first axis) appears on the servo amplifier display.

  • Page 112: Servo Amplifier Display

    4. STARTUP 4.3 Servo amplifier display On the servo amplifier display (three-digit, seven-segment display), check the status of communication with the servo system controller at power-on, check the axis number, and diagnose a fault at occurrence of an alarm. (1) Display sequence Servo amplifier power ON Waiting for servo system controller power to switch ON…

  • Page 113
    4. STARTUP (2) Indication list Indication Status Description Power of the servo amplifier was switched on at the condition that the power of servo system controller is OFF. The axis No. set to the servo system controller does not match the axis No. set with the rotary axis setting switch (SW1) of the servo amplifier.
  • Page 114: Test Operation

    4. STARTUP 4.4 Test operation Before starting actual operation, perform test operation to make sure that the machine operates normally. Refer to section 4.2 for the power on and off methods of the servo amplifier. POINT If necessary, verify controller program by using motorless operation. Refer to section 4.5.2 for the motorless operation.

  • Page 115: Test Operation Mode

    4. STARTUP 4.5 Test operation mode The test operation mode is designed for servo operation confirmation and not for machine operation confirmation. Do not use this mode with the machine. Always CAUTION use the servo motor alone. If an operation fault occurred, use the forced stop (EM1) to make a stop. POINT The content described in this section indicates the environment that servo amplifier and personal computer are directly connected.

  • Page 116
    4. STARTUP (c) Program operation Positioning operation can be performed in two or more operation patterns combined, without using the servo system controller. Use this operation with the forced stop reset. This operation may be used independently of whether the servo is on or off and whether the servo system controller is connected or not.
  • Page 117: Motorless Operation In Controller

    4. STARTUP 4.5.2 Motorless operation in controller POINT Use motor-less operation which is available by making the servo system controller parameter setting. Motorless operation is done while connected with the servo system controller. (1) Motorless operation Without connecting the servo motor, output signals or status displays can be provided in response to the servo system controller commands as if the servo motor is actually running.

  • Page 118: Basic Setting Parameters (No.pa )

    5. PARAMETERS 5. PARAMETERS Never adjust or change the parameter values extremely as it will make operation CAUTION instable. In this servo amplifier, the parameters are classified into the following groups on a function basis. Parameter Group Main Description Basic setting parameters Make basic setting with these parameters.

  • Page 119: Parameter Write Inhibit

    5. PARAMETERS 5.1.2 Parameter write inhibit Parameter Initial Value Unit Setting Range Symbol Name PA19 *BLK Parameter write inhibit 000Bh Refer to the text. POINT This parameter is made valid when power is switched off, then on after setting, or when the controller reset has been performed. In the factory setting, this servo amplifier allows changes to the basic setting parameter, gain/filter parameter and extension setting parameter settings.

  • Page 120: Selection Of Regenerative Option

    5. PARAMETERS 5.1.3 Selection of regenerative option Parameter Initial Value Unit Setting Range Symbol Name PA02 **REG Regenerative option 0000h Refer to the text. POINT This parameter value and switch power off once, then switch it on again to make that parameter setting valid. Wrong setting may cause the regenerative option to burn.

  • Page 121: Using Absolute Position Detection System

    5. PARAMETERS 5.1.4 Using absolute position detection system Parameter Initial Value Unit Setting Range Symbol Name PA03 *ABS Absolute position detection system 0000h Refer to the text. POINT This parameter is made valid when power is switched off, then on after setting, or when the controller reset has been performed.

  • Page 122: Auto Tuning

    5. PARAMETERS 5.1.6 Auto tuning Parameter Initial Value Unit Setting Range Symbol Name PA08 Auto tuning mode 0001h Refer to the text. PA09 Auto tuning response 1 to 32 Make gain adjustment using auto tuning. Refer to section 6.2 for details. (1) Auto tuning mode (parameter No.

  • Page 123: In-Position Range

    5. PARAMETERS (2) Auto tuning response (parameter No. PA09) If the machine hunts or generates large gear sound, decrease the set value. To improve performance, e.g. shorten the settling time, increase the set value. Guideline for Machine Guideline for Machine Setting Response Setting…

  • Page 124: Selection Of Servo Motor Rotation Direction

    5. PARAMETERS 5.1.8 Selection of servo motor rotation direction Parameter Initial Value Unit Setting Range Symbol Name PA14 *POL Rotation direction selection POINT This parameter is made valid when power is switched off, then on after setting, or when the controller reset has been performed. Select servo motor rotation direction relative.

  • Page 125
    5. PARAMETERS (1) For output pulse designation Set » » (initial value) in parameter No. PC03. Set the number of pulses per servo motor revolution. Output pulse set value [pulses/rev] For instance, set «5600» to Parameter No. PA15, the actually output A/B-phase pulses are as indicated below: 5600 A B-phase output pulses…
  • Page 126: Gain/Filter Parameters (No. Pb )

    5. PARAMETERS 5.2 Gain/filter parameters (No. PB POINT Parameter whose symbol is preceded by * is made valid with the following conditions. * : Set the parameter value, switch power off once after setting, and then switch it on again, or perform the controller reset. 5.2.1 Parameter list Symbol Name…

  • Page 127: Detail List

    5. PARAMETERS Symbol Name Initial Value Unit PB42 For manufacturer setting 1125 PB43 0004h PB44 PB45 0000h 5.2.2 Detail list Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PB01 FILT Adaptive tuning mode (adaptive filter ) 0000h Select the setting method for filter tuning. Setting this parameter to » 1″…

  • Page 128
    5. PARAMETERS Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PB02 VRFT Vibration suppression control tuning mode (advanced vibration suppression control) 0000h This parameter cannot be used in the speed control mode. The vibration suppression is valid when the parameter No. PA08 (auto tuning) setting is «…
  • Page 129
    5. PARAMETERS Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PB06 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment times Used to set the ratio of the load inertia moment to the servo motor shaft inertia moment. When auto tuning mode 1 and interpolation mode is selected, the result of auto tuning is 300.0 automatically used.
  • Page 130
    5. PARAMETERS Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PB14 NHQ1 Notch shape selection 1 0000h Refer to Used to selection the machine resonance suppression filter 1. Name function column. Notch depth selection Setting value Depth Gain Deep 40dB 14dB Shallow…
  • Page 131
    5. PARAMETERS Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PB18 Low-pass filter setting 3141 rad/s Set the low-pass filter. Setting parameter No. PB23 (low-pass filter selection) to » » automatically 18000 changes this parameter. When parameter No. PB23 is set to » «, this parameter can be set manually.
  • Page 132
    5. PARAMETERS Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PB26 *CDP Gain changing selection 0000h Refer to Select the gain changing condition. (Refer to section 7.6.) Name function column. Gain changing selection Under any of the following conditions, the gains change on the basis of the parameter No.
  • Page 133
    5. PARAMETERS Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PB34 VRF2B Gain changing vibration suppression control resonance frequency setting 100.0 This parameter cannot be used in the speed control mode. Set the resonance frequency for vibration suppression control when the gain changing is 100.0 valid.
  • Page 134: Extension Setting Parameters (No. Pc )

    5. PARAMETERS 5.3 Extension setting parameters (No. PC POINT Parameter whose symbol is preceded by * is made valid with the following conditions. * : Set the parameter value, switch power off once after setting, and then switch it on again, or perform the controller reset. **: Set the parameter value, switch power off once, and then switch it on again.

  • Page 135: List Of Details

    5. PARAMETERS 5.3.2 List of details Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PC01 Error excessive alarm level (Note 2) This parameter cannot be used in the speed control mode. (Note 1) Set error excessive alarm level with rotation amount of servo motor. Note 1.

  • Page 136
    5. PARAMETERS Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PC06 *COP3 Function selection C-3 0000h Refer to Name Select the error excessive alarm level setting for parameter No.PC01. function column. Error excessive alarm level setting selection 0: 1 [rev]unit 1: 0.1 [rev]unit…
  • Page 137
    5. PARAMETERS Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PC12 Analog monitor 2 offset -999 Used to set the offset voltage of the analog monitor2 (MO2) output. PC13 MOSDL Analog monitor feedback position output standard data Low pulse -9999 Used to set the standard position of feedback output with analog monitor 1 (M01) or 2 (M02).
  • Page 138: Analog Monitor

    5. PARAMETERS 5.3.3 Analog monitor The servo status can be output to two channels in terms of voltage. The servo status can be monitored using an ammeter. (1) Setting Change the following digits of parameter No. PC09, PC10: Parameter No. PC09 0 0 0 Analog monitor (MO1) output selection (Signal output to across MO1-LG)

  • Page 139
    5. PARAMETERS Setting Output item Description Setting Output item Description Droop pulses (Note 1) CCW direction Droop pulses (Note 1) CCW direction 10[V] 10[V] ( 10V/100 pulses) ( 10V/1000 pulses) 100[pulse] 1000[pulse] 100[pulse] 1000[pulse] -10[V] -10[V] CW direction CW direction Droop pulses CCW direction Droop pulses…
  • Page 140: Alarm History Clear

    5. PARAMETERS (3) Analog monitor block diagram Speed Current Droop pulse command command Bus voltage Speed Position Differ- command Current encoder command ential Position Current Speed Servo Motor received control control control from a controller Encoder Current feedback Differ- ential Position feedback Position feedback data returned to…

  • Page 141: I/O Setting Parameters (No. Pd )

    5. PARAMETERS 5.4 I/O setting parameters (No. PD POINT Parameter whose symbol is preceded by * is made valid with the following conditions. * : Set the parameter value, switch power off once after setting, and then switch it on again, or perform the controller reset. 5.4.1 Parameter list Symbol Name…

  • Page 142: List Of Details

    5. PARAMETERS 5.4.2 List of details Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PD01 For manufacturer setting 0000h Do not change this value by any means. PD02 0000h PD03 0000h PD04 0000h PD05 0000h PD06 0000h PD07 *DO1 Output signal device selection 1 (CN3-13) 0005h Refer to…

  • Page 143
    5. PARAMETERS Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PD10 For manufacturer setting 0000h Do not change this value by any means. PD11 0004h PD12 0000h PD13 0000h PD14 *DOP3 Function selection D-3 0000h Refer to Set the ALM output signal at warning occurrence. Name function column.
  • Page 144: Different Adjustment Methods

    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 6.1 Different adjustment methods 6.1.1 Adjustment on a single servo amplifier The gain adjustment in this section can be made on a single servo amplifier. For gain adjustment, first execute auto tuning mode 1. If you are not satisfied with the results, execute auto tuning mode 2 and manual mode in this order.

  • Page 145: Adjustment Using Mr Configurator

    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT (2) Adjustment sequence and mode usage START Usage Used when you want to Interpolation made for 2 or more match the position gain (PG1) axes? between 2 or more axes. Interpolation mode Normally not used for other purposes.

  • Page 146: Auto Tuning Mode

    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 6.2 Auto tuning 6.2.1 Auto tuning mode The servo amplifier has a real-time auto tuning function which estimates the machine characteristic (load inertia moment ratio) in real time and automatically sets the optimum gains according to that value. This function permits ease of gain adjustment of the servo amplifier.

  • Page 147: Auto Tuning Mode Operation

    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 6.2.2 Auto tuning mode operation The block diagram of real-time auto tuning is shown below. Load inertia Automatic setting moment Encoder Loop gains Command Current Servo PG1,VG1 control motor PG2,VG2,VIC Current feedback Real-time auto Position/speed Set 0 or 1 to turn on. tuning section feedback Load inertia…

  • Page 148: Adjustment Procedure By Auto Tuning

    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 6.2.3 Adjustment procedure by auto tuning Since auto tuning is made valid before shipment from the factory, simply running the servo motor automatically sets the optimum gains that match the machine. Merely changing the response level setting value as required completes the adjustment.

  • Page 149: Response Level Setting In Auto Tuning Mode

    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 6.2.4 Response level setting in auto tuning mode Set the response (The first digit of parameter No. PA09) of the whole servo system. As the response level setting is increased, the track ability and settling time for a command decreases, but a too high response level will generate vibration.

  • Page 150: Manual Mode 1 (Simple Manual Adjustment)

    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 6.3 Manual mode 1 (simple manual adjustment) If you are not satisfied with the adjustment of auto tuning, you can make simple manual adjustment with three parameters. POINT If machine resonance occurs, filter tuning mode (parameter No. PB01) or machine resonance suppression filter (parameter No.

  • Page 151
    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT (c)Adjustment description 1) Speed loop gain (parameter No. PB09) This parameter determines the response level of the speed control loop. Increasing this value enhances response but a too high value will make the mechanical system liable to vibrate. The actual response frequency of the speed loop is as indicated in the following expression: Speed loop gain setting Speed loop response…
  • Page 152
    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT (2) For position control (a) Parameters The following parameters are used for gain adjustment: Parameter No. Abbreviation Name PB06 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment PB07 Model loop gain PB08 Position loop gain PB09 Speed loop gain PB10…
  • Page 153
    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT (c) Adjustment description 1) Speed loop gain (VG2: parameter No. PB09) This parameter determines the response level of the speed control loop. Increasing this value enhances response but a too high value will make the mechanical system liable to vibrate. The actual response frequency of the speed loop is as indicated in the following expression: Speed loop gain 2 setting Speed loop response…
  • Page 154: Interpolation Mode

    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 6.4 Interpolation mode The interpolation mode is used to match the position loop gains of the axes when performing the interpolation operation of servo motors of two or more axes for an X-Y table or the like. In this mode, the model loop gain and speed loop gain which determine command track ability are set manually and the other parameter for gain adjustment are set automatically.

  • Page 155: Differences Between Melservo-J2-Super And Melservo-J3 In Auto Tuning

    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 6.5 Differences between MELSERVO-J2-Super and MELSERVO-J3 in auto tuning To meet higher response demands, the MELSERVO-J3 series has been changed in response level setting range from the MELSERVO-J2S-Super series. The following table lists comparison of the response level setting.

  • Page 156: Adaptive Filter

    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS POINT The functions given in this chapter need not be used generally. Use them if you are not satisfied with the machine status after making adjustment in the methods in chapter 7. If a mechanical system has a natural resonance point, increasing the servo system response level may cause the mechanical system to produce resonance (vibration or unusual noise) at that resonance frequency.

  • Page 157
    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (2) Parameters The operation of adaptive tuning mode (parameter No. PB01). Parameter No.60 0 0 0 Filter tuning mode selection Setting Filter adjustment mode Automatically set parameter Filter OFF (Note) Parameter No. PB13 Filter tuning mode Parameter No.
  • Page 158
    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (3) Adaptive tuning mode procedure Adaptive tuning adjustment Operation Is the target response reached? Increase the response setting. Has vibration or unusual noise occurred? Execute or re-execute adaptive tuning. (Set parameter No. PB01 to «0001».) Tuning ends automatically after the If assumption fails after tuning is executed at predetermined period of time.
  • Page 159: Machine Resonance Suppression Filter

    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS POINT «Filter OFF» enables a return to the factory-set initial value. When adaptive tuning is executed, vibration sound increases as an excitation signal is forcibly applied for several seconds. When adaptive tuning is executed, machine resonance is detected for a maximum of 10 seconds and a filter is generated.

  • Page 160
    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (2) Parameters (a) Machine resonance suppression filter 1 (parameter No. PB13, PB14) Set the notch frequency, notch depth and notch width of the machine resonance suppression filter 1 (parameter No. PB13, PB14) When you have made adaptive filter tuning mode (parameter No. PB01) «manual mode», set up the machine resonance suppression filter 1 becomes effective.
  • Page 161: Advanced Vibration Suppression Control

    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 7.4 Advanced vibration suppression control (1) Operation Vibration suppression control is used to further suppress machine end vibration, such as workpiece end vibration and base shake. The motor side operation is adjusted for positioning so that the machine does not shake.

  • Page 162
    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (3) Vibration suppression control tuning mode procedure Vibration suppression control tuning adjustment Operation Is the target response reached? Increase the response setting. Has vibration of workpiece end/device increased? Stop operation. Execute or re-execute vibration suppression control tuning. (Set parameter No.
  • Page 163
    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (4) Vibration suppression control manual mode Measure work end vibration and device shake with the machine analyzer or external measuring instrument, and set the vibration suppression control vibration frequency (parameter No. PB19) and vibration suppression control resonance frequency (parameter No. PB20) to set vibration suppression control manually.
  • Page 164
    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS POINT When machine end vibration does not show up in motor end vibration, the setting of the motor end vibration frequency does not produce an effect. When the anti-resonance frequency and resonance frequency can be confirmed using the machine analyzer or external FFT device, do not set the same value but set different values to improve the vibration suppression performance.
  • Page 165: Low-Pass Filter

    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 7.5 Low-pass filter (1) Function When a ballscrew or the like is used, resonance of high frequency may occur as the response level of the servo system is increased. To prevent this, the low-pass filter is factory-set to be valid for a torque command.

  • Page 166: Function Block Diagram

    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 7.6.2 Function block diagram The valid loop gains PG2, VG2, VIC and GD2 of the actual loop are changed according to the conditions selected by gain changing selection CDP (parameter No. PB26) and gain changing condition CDS (parameter No.

  • Page 167: Parameters

    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 7.6.3 Parameters When using the gain changing function, always set » 3″ in parameter No. PA08 (auto tuning) to choose the manual mode of the gain adjustment modes. The gain changing function cannot be used in the auto tuning mode.

  • Page 168
    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (1) Parameters No. PB06 to PB10 These parameters are the same as in ordinary manual adjustment. Gain changing allows the values of ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment, position loop gain, speed loop gain and speed integral compensation to be changed.
  • Page 169: Gain Changing Operation

    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 7.6.4 Gain changing operation This operation will be described by way of setting examples. (1) When you choose changing by external input (a) Setting Parameter No. Abbreviation Name Setting Unit PB07 Model loop gain rad/s Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor PB06 times inertia moment…

  • Page 170
    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (2) When you choose changing by droop pulses (a) Setting Parameter No. Abbreviation Name Setting Unit PB07 Model loop gain rad/s Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor PB06 times inertia moment PB08 Position loop gain rad/s PB09 Speed loop gain…
  • Page 171
    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS MEMO 7 — 16…
  • Page 172: Troubleshooting

    8. TROUBLESHOOTING 8. TROUBLESHOOTING POINT As soon as an alarm occurs, make the Servo off status and interrupt the main circuit power. If an alarm/warning has occurred, refer to this chapter and remove its cause. 8.1 Alarms and warning list When a fault occurs during operation, the corresponding alarm or warning is displayed.

  • Page 173: Remedies For Alarms

    8. TROUBLESHOOTING 8.2 Remedies for alarms When any alarm has occurred, eliminate its cause, ensure safety, then reset the alarm, and restart operation. Otherwise, injury may occur. If an absolute position erase (25) occurred, always make home position setting CAUTION again.

  • Page 174: Troubleshooting

    8. TROUBLESHOOTING Display Name Definition Cause Action Memory error 1 RAM, memory fault Faulty parts in the servo amplifier Change the servo amplifier. (RAM) Checking method Clock error Printed board fault Alarm (any of 12 and 13) occurs if power is switched on after disconnection of all cables but the control circuit power supply cables.

  • Page 175
    8. TROUBLESHOOTING Display Name Definition Cause Action Regenerative Permissible 1. Wrong setting of parameter No. Set correctly. error regenerative power PA02 of the built-in 2. Built-in regenerative resistor or Connect correctly regenerative resistor regenerative option is not or regenerative connected. option is exceeded.
  • Page 176
    8. TROUBLESHOOTING Display Name Definition Cause Action Overvoltage The following shows 1. Regenerative option is not used. Use the regenerative option. the input value of 2. Though the regenerative option is Set correctly. used, the parameter No.PA02 converter bus setting is » 00 (not used)».
  • Page 177
    8. TROUBLESHOOTING Display Name Definition Cause Action Parameter error Parameter setting is 1. Servo amplifier fault caused the Change the servo amplifier. wrong. parameter setting to be rewritten. 2. There is a parameter whose value Change the parameter value to within the was set to outside the setting range setting range.
  • Page 178
    8. TROUBLESHOOTING Display Name Definition Cause Action Overload 2 Machine collision or 1. Machine struck something. 1. Review operation pattern. the like caused max. 2. Install limit switches. For the time of the 2. Wrong connection of servo motor. Connect correctly. alarm occurrence, Servo amplifier’s output terminals U, refer to the section…
  • Page 179: Remedies For Warnings

    8. TROUBLESHOOTING Display Name Definition Cause Action (Note) Watchdog CPU, parts faulty Fault of parts in servo amplifier Change servo amplifier. Checking method Alarm (888) occurs if power is switched on after disconnection of all cables but the control circuit power supply cable.

  • Page 180
    8. TROUBLESHOOTING Display Name Definition Cause Action Absolute position Absolute position encoder 1. Noise entered the encoder. Take noise suppression counter warning pulses faulty. measures. 2. Encoder faulty. Change servo motor. The multi-revolution 3. The movement amount from the home Make home position setting counter value of the position exceeded a 32767 rotation or…
  • Page 181
    8. TROUBLESHOOTING MEMO 8 — 10…
  • Page 182: Outline Drawings

    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS 9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS 9.1 Servo amplifier (1) MR-J3-10B MR-J3-20B MR-J3-10B1 MR-J3-20B1 [Unit: mm] 6 mounting hole Approx.80 (Note) CNP1 (Note) CNP2 CNP3 Approx. Approx.68 25.5 With MR-J3BAT Note. This data applies to the 3-phase or 1-phase 200 to 230VAC power supply models. For a single-phase, 100 to 120VAC power supply, refer to the terminal signal layout.

  • Page 183
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS (2) MR-J3-40B MR-J3-60B MR-J3-40B1 [Unit: mm] 6 mounting hole Approx.80 (Note) CNP1 (Note) CNP2 CNP3 CHARGE Approx. Approx.68 25.5 With MR-J3BAT Note. This data applies to the 3-phase or 1-phase 200 to 230VAC power supply models. For a single-phase, 100 to 120VAC power supply, refer to the terminal signal layout. Mass: 1.0 [kg] (2.21 [lb]) Terminal signal layout Mounting screw…
  • Page 184
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS (3) MR-J3-70B MR-J3-100B [Unit: mm] 6 mounting hole Approx.80 CNP1 CNP2 CNP3 Cooling fan wind direction Approx.68 Approx.25.5 With MR-J3BAT Mass: 1.4 [kg] (3.09 [lb]) Terminal signal layout Mounting screw Screw size: M5 Tightening torque: 3.24 [N m] (28.7 [lb in]) PE terminal Approx.
  • Page 185
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS (4) MR-J3-60B4 MR-J3-100B4 [Unit: mm] Approx. 80 6mounting hole CNP1 CNP2 CNP3 12 42 Approx. 68 Approx. 25.5 With MR-J3BAT Mass: 1.7 [kg] (3.75 [lb]) Mounting screw Terminal signal layout Screw size: M5 Tightening torque: 3.24 [N m] (28.7 [lb in]) PE terminal Approx.
  • Page 186
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS (5) MR-J3-200B MR-J3-350B [Unit: mm] 6 mounting hole Approx.80 21.4 Cooling fan Approx. wind direction 25.5 Approx.68 With MR-J3BAT Mass: 2.3 [kg] (5.07 [lb]) Mounting screw Terminal signal layout Screw size: M5 Tightening torque: 3.24 [N m] (28.7 [lb in]) PE terminal Approx.
  • Page 187
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS (6) MR-J3-200B4 [Unit: mm] 6mounting hole Approx. 80 CNP1 CNP2 CNP3 Approx. Cooling fan 25.5 wind direction Approx. 68 With MR-J3BAT Mass: 2.1 [kg] (4.63 [lb]) Mounting screw Terminal signal layout Screw size: M5 Tightening torque: 3.24 [N m] (28.7 [lb in] PE terminal Approx.
  • Page 188
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS (7) MR-J3-350B4 MR-J3-500B(4) [Unit: mm] Approx. 80 2- 6 mounting hole 131.5 68.5 Cooling fan Terminal layout wind direction (Terminal cover open) Cooling fan With MR-J3BAT CHARGE 20.5 3 places for ground (M4) Built-in regenerative resistor lead terminal fixing screw Mass: 4.6 [kg] (10.1 [lb]) Terminal signal layout…
  • Page 189
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS (8) MR-J3-700B(4) [Unit: mm] Approx.80 2- 6 mounting hole Cooling fan Terminal layout wind direction (Terminal cover open) Cooling fan With MR-J3BAT CHARGE 20.5 3 places for ground (M4) Built-in regenerative resistor lead terminal fixing screw Mass: 6.2 [kg] (13.7[lb]) Terminal signal layout Mounting screw Screw size: M5…
  • Page 190
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS (9) MR-J3-11KB(4) to 22KB(4) [Unit: mm] Approx. 80 Cooling fan 12mounting hole wind direction With MR-J3BAT Rating plate 123.5 6 26 Approx. 260 Approx. 12 Approx. 12 236 0.5 4-M10 screw Servo amplifier Mass[kg]([lb]) MR-J3-11KB(4) 18.0 (40) MR-J3-15KB(4) 18.0 (40) MR-J3-22KB(4)
  • Page 191
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS 9.2 Connector (1) CN1A CN1B connector [Unit: mm] F0-PF2D103 F0-PF2D103-S 17.6 17.6 20.9 20.9 (2) Miniature delta ribbon (MDR) system (3M) (a) One-touch lock type [Unit: mm] Logo etc, are indicated here. 12.7 Each type of dimension Connector Shell kit 10120-3000PE…
  • Page 192
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS (b) Jack screw M2.6 type This is not available as option. [Unit: mm] Logo etc, are indicated here. 12.7 Each type of dimension Connector Shell kit 10120-3000PE 10320-52F0-008 22.0 33.3 14.0 10.0 12.0 27.4 (3) SCR connector system (3M) Receptacle : 36210-0100PL Shell kit : 36310-3200-008…
  • Page 193
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS MEMO 9 — 12…
  • Page 194: Characteristics

    10. CHARACTERISTICS 10. CHARACTERISTICS 10.1 Overload protection characteristics An electronic thermal relay is built in the servo amplifier to protect the servo motor and servo amplifier from overloads. Overload 1 alarm (50) occurs if overload operation performed is above the electronic thermal relay protection curve shown in any of Figs 10.1.

  • Page 195
    10. CHARACTERISTICS 10000 1000 During operation During servo lock (Note) Load ratio [%] MR-J3-11KB(4) to MR-J3-22KB(4) Note. If operation that generates torque more than 100% of the rating is performed with an abnormally high frequency in a servo motor stop status (servo lock status) or in a 30r/min or less low-speed operation status, the servo amplifier may fail even when the electronic thermal relay protection is not activated.
  • Page 196: Power Supply Equipment Capacity And Generated Loss

    10. CHARACTERISTICS 10.2 Power supply equipment capacity and generated loss (1) Amount of heat generated by the servo amplifier Table 10.1 indicates servo amplifiers’ power supply capacities and losses generated under rated load. For thermal design of an enclosure, use the values in Table 10.1 in consideration for the worst operating conditions.

  • Page 197
    10. CHARACTERISTICS (Note 1) (Note 2) Area required for Servo amplifier Servo motor Power supply Servo amplifier-generated heat[W] heat dissipation capacity[kVA] At rated torque With servo off HF-SP702 (4) 10.0 HA-LP702 10.6 MR-J3-700B (4) HA-LP601 (4) 10.0 HA-LP701M (4) 11.0 HC-LP11K2 (4) 16.0 11.0…
  • Page 198
    10. CHARACTERISTICS (2) Heat dissipation area for enclosed servo amplifier The enclosed control box (hereafter called the control box) which will contain the servo amplifier should be designed to ensure that its temperature rise is within 10 at the ambient temperature of 40 . (With a 5 (41 ) safety margin, the system should operate within a maximum 55 (131 ) limit.) The necessary enclosure heat dissipation area can be calculated by Equation 10.1:…
  • Page 199: Dynamic Brake Characteristics

    10. CHARACTERISTICS 10.3 Dynamic brake characteristics 10.3.1 Dynamic brake operation (1) Calculation of coasting distance Fig. 10.3 shows the pattern in which the servo motor comes to a stop when the dynamic brake is operated. Use Equation 10.2 to calculate an approximate coasting distance to a stop. The dynamic brake time constant varies with the servo motor and machine operation speeds.

  • Page 200
    10. CHARACTERISTICS 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 1000 1500 2000 Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] HF-SP1000r/min series HF-SP2000r/min series 22K1M 20K1 11K1M 12K1 15K1 15K1M 701M 25K1 800 1000 1200 1000 1500 2000 Speed[r/min] Speed[r/min] HA-LP1000r/min series HA-LP1500r/min series 15K2 11K2 22K2 1000…
  • Page 201: The Dynamic Brake At The Load Inertia Moment

    If there is a possibility that the load inertia moment may exceed the value, contact Mitsubishi. The values of the load inertia moment ratio in the table are the values at the maximum rotation speed of the servo motor.

  • Page 202: Cable Flexing Life

    10. CHARACTERISTICS Servo motor Servo HA-LP amplifier HF-SP 4 HA-LP 14 HA-LP 24 MR-J3-60B4 5 (Note 1) MR-J3-100B4 5 (Note 1) MR-J3-200B4 MR-J3-350B4 5 (Note 1) MR-J3-500B4 5 (Note 1) MR-J3-700B4 5 (Note 1) MR-J3-11KB4 (Note 2) MR-J3-15KB4 (Note 2) MR-J3-22KB4 (Note 2) Note 1.

  • Page 203: Inrush Currents At Power-On Of Main Circuit And Control Circuit

    10. CHARACTERISTICS 10.5 Inrush currents at power-on of main circuit and control circuit The following table indicates the inrush currents (reference data) that will flow when the maximum permissible voltage (200V class: 253VAC, 400V class: 528VAC) is applied at the power supply capacity of 2500kVA and the wiring length of 1m (3.28ft).

  • Page 204: Cable/Connector Sets

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Before connecting any option or peripheral equipment, turn off the power and wait for 15 minutes or more until the charge lamp turns off. Then, confirm that the WARNING voltage between P( ) and N( ) is safe with a voltage tester and others. Otherwise, an electric shock may occur.

  • Page 205: Combinations Of Cable/Connector Sets

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.1.1 Combinations of cable/connector sets Servo system Cont Personal computer 32)33)34) Servo amplifier Servo amplifier 1)2) Note CNP1 CN1A CN1A 32)33)34) CNP2 CN1B CN1B CNP3 (Servo amplifier attachment) Direct connection type (cable length 10m or less, IP65) 15)16)17)18) Junction type (cable length more than 10m, IP20) 21)22)

  • Page 206
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT From previous page a) From previous page b) 24)25) Servo motor 30)39)40) HC-RP HC-UP HC-LP Power supply Encoder Brake connector connector connector 24)25) Servo motor HA-LP Terminal box Product Model Description Application 1) Servo Supplied with amplifier servo power supply…
  • Page 207
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Product Model Description Application 2) Servo Supplied with amplifier servo power supply amplifiers of connector 2kW and 3.5kW in 200V CNP1 connector: CNP2 connector: CNP3 connector: class PC4/6-STF-7.62- 54927-0510 PC4/3-STF-7.62- CRWH (Molex) CRWH (Phoenix Contact) (Phoenix Contact) <Applicable cable example>…
  • Page 208
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Product Model Description Application 9) Motor brake MR-BKS1CBL M-A1-L IP65 Brake connector cable Cable length: 2 5 10m Load side lead 10) Motor brake MR-BKS1CBL M-A1-H IP65 HF-MP series cable Cable length: 2 5 10m Load side lead HF-KP series Long flex life…
  • Page 209
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Product Model Description Application 21) Encoder MR-EKCBL IP20 cable Cable length: 20 30m 22) Encoder MR-EKCBL IP20 cable Cable length: Long flex life For HF-MP HF-KP series 20 30 40 50m Refer to section 11.1.2 (2) for details. 23) Encoder MR-ECNM IP20…
  • Page 210
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Product Model Description Application 32) SSCNET MR-J3BUS M Connector: PF-2D103 Connector: PF-2D103 Inside panel cable Cable length: 0.15 to 3m (Japan Aviation Electronics (Japan Aviation Electronics standard cord (Refer to section 11.1.5.) Industry, Ltd.) Industry, Ltd.) 33) SSCNET MR-J3BUS M-A Outside panel…
  • Page 211: Encoder Cable/Connector Sets

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.1.2 Encoder cable/connector sets (1) MR-J3ENCBL M-A1-L/H MR-J3ENCBL M-A2-L/H These cables are encoder cables for the HF-MP HF-KP series servo motors. The numerals in the Cable Length field of the table are the symbols entered in the part of the cable model.

  • Page 212
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) Cable internal wiring diagram MR-J3ENCBL2M-L/-H MR-J3ENCBL5M-L/-H MR-J3ENCBL10M-L/-H Encoder side Servo amplifier connector side connector Plate (2) MR-EKCBL M-L/H POINT The following encoder cables are of four-wire type. When using any of these encoder cables, set parameter No. PC04 to «1 «…
  • Page 213
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (a) Connection of servo amplifier and servo motor Servo amplifier MR-EKCBL M-L MR-J3JCBL03M-L MR-EKCBL M-H Cable length: 0.3m Servo motor HF-MP HF-KP Cable Model 1) For CN2 Connector 2) For Encoder Connector MR-EKCBL Connector set: 54599-1019(Molex) Housing: 1-172161-9 Receptacle: 36210-0100PL Crimping pin: 170359-1…
  • Page 214
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) Internal wiring diagram MR-EKCBL20M-L MR-EKCBL30M-L Servo amplifier side Encoder side Servo amplifier side Encoder side Plate (Note) CONT Plate (Note) MR-EKCBL20M-H MR-EKCBL30M-H MR-EKCBL40M-H Servo amplifier side Encoder side MR-EKCBL50M-H Servo amplifier side Encoder side Plate (Note) CONT…
  • Page 215
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (c) When fabricating the encoder cable When fabricating the cable, prepare the following parts and tool, and fabricate it according to the wiring diagram in (b). Refer to section 11.8 for the specifications of the used cable. Parts/Tool Description Connector set…
  • Page 216
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (a) Connection of servo amplifier and servo motor MR-J3JCBL03M-A1-L Servo amplifier Servo motor HF-MP HF-KP MR-EKCBL M-L/-H MR-J3JCBL03M-A2-L Servo motor HF-MP HF-KP Cable Model 1) Junction Connector 2) For Encoder Connector MR-J3JCBL03M-A1-L Housing: 1-172169-9 Connector: 1674320-1 Contact: 1473226-1 Crimping tool for ground clip: 1596970-1 Cable clamp: 316454-1…
  • Page 217
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (4) MR-J3ENSCBL M-L MR-J3ENSCBL These cables are detector cables for HF-SP Series servomotors. The number in the cable length column of the table indicates the symbol filling the square in the cable model. Cable lengths corresponding to the specified symbols are prepared.
  • Page 218
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) Internal wiring diagram MR-J3ENSCBL2M-L/H MR-J3ENSCBL20M-L MR-J3ENSCBL20M-H MR-J3ENSCBL5M-L/H MR-J3ENSCBL30M-L MR-J3ENSCBL30M-H MR-J3ENSCBL40M-H MR-J3ENSCBL10M-L/H Encoder side Servo amplifier MR-J3ENSCBL50M-H connector side connector Encoder side Servo amplifier Encoder side Servo amplifier connector side connector connector side connector Plate Plate Plate (c) When fabricating the encoder cable…
  • Page 219
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (5) MR-J3BTCBL03M This cable is a battery connection cable. Use this cable to retain the current position even if the detector cable is disconnected from the servo amplifier. Cable Cable Model Application Length MR-J3BTCBL03M 0.3m For HF-MP HF-KP HF-SP servo motor (a) Connection of servo amplifier and servo motor Servo amplifier…
  • Page 220: Motor Power Supply Cables

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.1.3 Motor power supply cables These cables are motor power supply cables for the HF-MP HF-KP series servo motors. The numerals in the Cable Length field of the table are the symbols entered in the part of the cable model.

  • Page 221: Motor Brake Cables

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.1.4 Motor brake cables These cables are motor brake cables for the HF-MP HF-KP series servo motors. The numerals in the Cable Length field of the table are the symbols entered in the part of the cable model. The cables of the lengths with the symbols are available.

  • Page 222: Sscnet Cable

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.1.5 SSCNET cable POINT Do not see directly the light generated from CN1A CN1B connector of servo amplifier or the end of SSCNET cable. When the light gets into eye, you may feel something is wrong for eye. (The light source of SSCNET complies with class1 defined in JIS C6802 or IEC60825-1.) (1) Model explanations Numeral in the column of cable length on the table is a symbol put in the…

  • Page 223
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (3) Outline drawings (a) MR-J3BUS015M [Unit: mm] (6.7) (15) (13.4) Protective tube (37.65) (20.9) (b) MR-J3BUS03M to MR-J3BUS3M Refer to the table shown in (1) of this section for cable length (L). [Unit: mm] Protective tube (Note) (100) (100)
  • Page 224: Regenerative Options

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.2 Regenerative options The specified combinations of regenerative options and servo amplifiers may only CAUTION be used. Otherwise, a fire may occur. (1) Combination and regenerative power The power values in the table are resistor-generated powers and not rated powers. Regenerative power[W] Built-in (Note 1)

  • Page 225
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (2) Selection of the regenerative option Use the following method when regeneration occurs continuously in vertical motion applications or when it is desired to make an in-depth selection of the regenerative option: (a) Regenerative energy calculation Use the following table to calculate the regenerative energy.
  • Page 226
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) Losses of servo motor and servo amplifier in regenerative mode The following table lists the efficiencies and other data of the servo motor and servo amplifier in the regenerative mode. Servo amplifier Inverse efficiency[%] Capacitor charging[J] Servo amplifier Inverse efficiency[%]…
  • Page 227
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT The following are setting values for regenerative resistor and regenerative brake option which are used with a servo amplifier of 11k to 22kW. Setting Regenerative resistor, regenerative brake option value Standard supplied regenerative resistor Standard supplied regenerative resistor (with a cooling fan to cool it) MR-RB5E MR-RB5E (with a cooling fan to cool it)
  • Page 228
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (a) MR-J3-350B or less MR-J3-200B4 or less Always remove the wiring from across P-D and fit the regenerative option across P-C. The G3 and G4 terminals act as a thermal sensor. G3-G4 is disconnected when the regenerative option overheats abnormally.
  • Page 229
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) MR-J3-350B4 MR-J3-500B(4) MR-J3-700B(4) Always remove the wiring (across P-C) of the servo amplifier built-in regenerative resistor and fit the regenerative option across P-C. The G3 and G4 terminals act as a thermal sensor. G3-G4 is opened when the regenerative option overheats abnormally.
  • Page 230
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT The drawing below shows the MR-J3-350B4 MR-J3-500B(4). Refer to section 9.1 (6) outline drawings for the position of the fixing screw for MR-J3-700B(4). Built-in regenerative resistor lead terminal fixing screw For the MR-RB51, MR-RB3G-4, MR-RB5G-4, MR-RB34-4 or MR-RB54-4 install the cooling fan as shown.
  • Page 231
    The detection level of the thermal sensor varies according to the settings of the resistor. Set the thermal sensor in the most appropriate position on your design basis or use the thermal sensor built-in regenerative option (MR- RB5E, 9P, 9F, 6B-4, 60-4 and 6K-4) provided by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Regenerative…
  • Page 232
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (d) MR-J3-11KB(4)-PX to MR-J3-22KB(4)-PX (when using the regenerative option) The MR-J3-11KB(4)-PX to MR-J3-22KB(4)-PX servo amplifiers are not supplied with regenerative resistors. When using any of these servo amplifiers, always use the MR-RB5E, 9P, 9F, 6B-4, 60-4 and 6K-4 regenerative option.
  • Page 233
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (5) Outline drawing (a) MR-RB032 MR-RB12 [Unit: mm (in)] Terminal block 6 mounting hole Terminal screw: M3 Tightening torque: 0.5 to 0.6 [N m] MR-RB (4.43 to 5.31 [lb in]) Mounting screw Screw size: M5 Tightening torque: 3.2 [N m] (28.32 [lb in]) Approx.
  • Page 234: Options

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) MR-RB30 MR-RB31 MR-RB32 MR-RB34-4 MR-RB3M-4 MR-RB3G-4 [Unit: mm (in)] Terminal block Cooling fan mounting screw (2-M4 screw) Terminal screw: M4 Tightening torque: 1.2 [N m] (10.62 [lb in]) Mounting screw 101.5 82.5 Screw size: M6 Tightening torque: 5.4 [N m] (47.79 [lb in]) Variable Wind blows in the…

  • Page 235
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (d) MR-RB5E MR-RB9P MR-RB9F MR-RB6B-4 MR-RB60-4 MR-RB6K-4 [Unit: mm (in)] Terminal block 2- 10 mounting hole Terminal screw: M5 Tightening torque: 2.0 [N m] (17.70 [lb in]) Mounting screw Screw size: M8 Tightening torque: 13.2 [N m] (116.83 [lb in]) Regenerative Mass option…
  • Page 236
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (f) MR-RB1H-4 [Unit: mm (in)] Terminal screw: M3 Tightening torque: 0.5 to 0.6 [N m] (4.43 to 5.31 [lb in]) 6 mounting hole Mounting screw Screw size: M5 Tightening torque: 3.24 [N m] (28.32 [lb in]) Regenerative Mass [kg] ([lb]) option…
  • Page 237: Fr-Bu2-(H) Brake Unit

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.3 FR-BU2-(H) Brake unit POINT Use a 200V class brake unit and a resistor unit with a 200V class servo amplifier, and a 400V class brake unit and a resistor unit with a 400V class servo amplifier.

  • Page 238: Selection

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.3.1 Selection Use a combination of servo amplifier, brake unit and resistor unit listed below. Number of Permissible Total Applicable servo Brake unit Resistor unit connected continuous resistance amplifier units power [kW] 200V FR-BU2-15K FR-BR-15K 0.99 MR-J3-500B (Note) class…

  • Page 239: Connection Example

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.3.3 Connection example POINT Connecting PR terminal of the brake unit to P terminal of the servo amplifier results in brake unit malfunction. Always connect the PR terminal of the brake unit to the PR terminal of the resistor unit. (1) Combination with FR-BR-(H) resistor unit (a) When connecting a brake unit to a servo amplifier (Note 8)

  • Page 240
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) When connecting two brake units to a servo amplifier POINT To use brake units with a parallel connection, use two sets of FR-BU2 brake unit. Combination with other brake unit results in alarm occurrence or malfunction.
  • Page 241
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (Note 7) Servo motor Controller thermal relay forced stop Servo amplifier (Note 1) Power DOCOM supply DC24V FR-BR DICOM (Note 5) (Note 3) FR-BU2-(H) (Note 11) (Note 10) (Note 4) (Note 8) (Note 6) (Note 9) Terminal block (Note 2)
  • Page 242
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (2) Combination with MT-BR5-(H) resistor unit Servo motor Controller thermal relay forced stop (Note 4) Servo amplifier (Note 1) Power DOCOM supply 24VDC MT-BR5-(H) DICOM (Note 5) FR-BU2-(H) (Note 9) (Note 2) P( ) (Note 3) (Note 7) N( ) (Note 6)
  • Page 243
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (3) Precautions for wiring The cables between the servo amplifier and the brake unit, and between the resistor unit and the brake unit should be as short as possible. Always twist the cable longer than 5m (twist five times or more per one meter).
  • Page 244
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 2) Control circuit terminal POINT Undertightening can cause a cable disconnection or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to damage to the screw or the brake unit. Sheath SD SD Core Jumper Terminal block Wire the stripped cable after twisting to prevent the cable…
  • Page 245
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (5) Crimping terminals for P and N terminals of servo amplifier (a) Recommended crimping terminals POINT Always use recommended crimping terminals or equivalent since some crimping terminals cannot be installed depending on the size. Number of (Note 1) Servo amplifier Brake unit…
  • Page 246: Outline Dimension Drawings

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.3.4 Outline dimension drawings (1) FR-BU2- (H) brake unit [Unit: mm] FR-BU2-15K 5 hole (Screw size: M4) Rating plate 18.5 132.5 FR-BU2-30K FR-BU2-H30K 2- 5 hole (Screw size: M4) Rating plate 18.5 129.5 FR-BU2-55K FR-BU2-H55K, H75K 2- 5 hole (Screw size: M4) Rating…

  • Page 247
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (2) FR-BR- (H) resistor unit [Unit: mm] 2 | C (Note) Control circuit (Note) terminal Main circuit terminal (35) (35) W1 1 For FR-BR-55K/FR-BR-H55K, a hanging bolt is placed on two locations (Indicated below). Hanging bolt Note.
  • Page 248: Power Regeneration Converter

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.4 Power regeneration converter When using the power regeneration converter, set » 01″ in parameter No.PA02. (1) Selection The converters can continuously return 75% of the nominal regenerative power. They are applied to the servo amplifiers of the 5k to 22kW. Nominal Power regeneration Regenerative…

  • Page 249
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (2) Connection example Servo amplifier Power factor improving reactor FR-BAL-(H) (Note 6) Power supply 24VDC Forced stop DOCOM DOCOM DICOM Trouble(Note 3) (Note 2) 5m or less (Note 4) (Note 5) Ready output Alarm output R R X (Note 1) Phase detection…
  • Page 250
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (3) Outside dimensions of the power regeneration converters [Unit : mm] Mounting foot (removable) 2- D hole Mounting foot movable Rating plate Display panel Front cover window Cooling fan Heat generation area outside mounting dimension Power Approx.
  • Page 251: Power Regeneration Common Converter

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.5 Power regeneration common converter POINT Use the FR-CV for the servo amplifier of 200V class and the FR-CV-H for that of 400V class. For details of the power regeneration common converter FR-CV-(H), refer to the FR-CV-(H) Installation Guide (IB(NA)0600075).

  • Page 252
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT The following table lists the restrictions. FR-CV- Item 7.5K Maximum number of connected servo amplifiers Total of connectable servo amplifier capacities [kW] 3.75 18.5 27.5 Total of connectable servo motor rated currents [A] Maximum servo amplifier capacity [kW] FR-CV-H Item Maximum number of connected servo amplifiers…
  • Page 253
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (3) Connection diagram (a) 200V class FR-CVL FR-CV Servo amplifier Servo motor R2/L R2/L 3-phase S2/L 200 to S2/L Thermal 230VAC T2/L (Note 7) relay T2/L OHS2 (Note 6) (Note 2) OHS1 (Note 1) (Note 5) T/MC1 DOCOM RESET…
  • Page 254
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) 400V class FR-CVL FR-CV-H Servo amplifier Servo motor R2/L R2/L 3-phase S2/L 380 to S2/L Thermal 480VAC T2/L (Note 7) relay T2/L (Note 6) OHS2 P( ) N( ) (Note 2) OHS1 (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 8) Stepdown…
  • Page 255
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (4) Wires used for wiring (a) Wire sizes 1) Across P-P( ), N-N( ) The following table indicates the connection wire sizes of the DC power supply (P( ), N( terminals) between the FR-CV and servo amplifier. The used wires are based on the 600V vinyl wires.
  • Page 256
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) Example of selecting the wire sizes When connecting multiple servo amplifiers, always use junction terminals for wiring the servo amplifier terminals P, N. Also, connect the servo amplifiers in the order of larger to smaller capacities. 1) 200V class Wire as short as possible.
  • Page 257
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 2) 400V class Wire as short as possible. Servo amplifier (15kW) FR-CV-H55K 22mm 22mm First unit: P/L+ R2/L 22mm assuming that the total of servo amplifier S2/L N/L- capacities is 30kW since 15kW + 7kW + 3.5kW + 2.0kW = 27.5kW.
  • Page 258
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (6) Specifications Power regeneration common converter FR-CV- 7.5K Item Total of connectable servo amplifier capacities [kW] 3.75 18.5 27.5 Maximum servo amplifier capacity [kW] Total of connectable servo motor rated currents Short-time Output Total capacity of applicable servo motors, 300% torque, 60s (Note1) Regenerative rating braking torque…
  • Page 259: External Dynamic Brake

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.6 External dynamic brake POINT Configure up a sequence which switches off the contact of the brake unit after (or as soon as) it has turned off the servo on signal at a power failure or failure.

  • Page 260
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (2) Connection example Operation-ready Servo amplifier Servo motor (Note 4) (Note 5) Power supply DICOM (Note 3) (Note 2) DICOM DOCOM (Note 1) Plate 13 U (Note 6) External dynamic brake Note 1. Terminals 13, 14 are normally open contact outputs. If the dynamic brake is seized, terminals 13, 14 will open. Therefore, configure up an external sequence to prevent servo-on.
  • Page 261
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Coasting Coasting Servo motor rotation Dynamic brake Dynamic brake Present Alarm Absent Base Invalid Dynamic brake Valid Short Forced stop (EM1) Open a. Timing chart at alarm occurrence b. Timing chart at forced stop (EM1) validity Coasting Dynamic brake Electro magnetic…
  • Page 262
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (3) Outline dimension drawing (a) DBU-11K DBU-15K DBU-22K [Unit: mm] Terminal block 13 14 (GND) Screw : M4 Screw : M3.5 Tightening torque: 1.2 [N m](10.6 [lb in]) Tightening torque: 0.8 [N m](7 [lb in]) Mass Connection Dynamic brake…
  • Page 263
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) DBU-11K-4 DBU-22K-4 [Unit: mm] 2- 7mounting hole 73.75 Mass: 6.7[kg] Terminal block Screw: M3.5 Screw: M4 Tightening torque: 0.8[N m](7[lb in]) Tightening torque: 1.2[N m](10.6[lb in]) Wire [mm Dynamic brake U V W DBU-11K DBU-15K, 22K 11 — 60…
  • Page 264: Junction Terminal Block Ps7Dw-20V14B-F (Recommended)

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.7 Junction terminal block PS7DW-20V14B-F (recommended) (1) How to use the junction terminal block Always use the junction terminal block (PS7W-20V14B-F(YOSHIDA ELECTRIC INDUSTRY)) with the option cable (MR-J2HBUS M) as a set. A connection example is shown below: Servo amplifier Cable clamp Junction terminal block…

  • Page 265
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (3) Outline drawings of junction terminal block [Unit : mm] 44.11 7.62 TB.E M3 5L 1.42 M3 6L 11 — 62…
  • Page 266: Mr Configurator

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.8 MR Configurator The MR Configurator (MRZJW3-SETUP221E) uses the communication function of the servo amplifier to perform parameter setting changes, graph display, test operation, etc. on a personal computer. (1) Specifications Item Description The following table shows MR Configurator software version for each servo amplifier. Compatible servo amplifier (Drive unit) Version 100V class 200V class…

  • Page 267: Battery Mr-J3Bat

    The year and month of manufacture are indicated by the last one digit of the year and 1 to 9, X(10), Y(11), Z(12). For October 2004, the Serial No. is like, «SERIAL «. MELSERVO MR-J3BAT 3.6V,2000mAh SERIAL MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN The year and month of manufacture 11 — 64…

  • Page 268: Heat Sink Outside Mounting Attachment (Mr-J3Acn)

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.10 Heat sink outside mounting attachment (MR-J3ACN) Use the heat sink outside mounting attachment to mount the heat generation area of the servo amplifier in the outside of the control box to dissipate servo amplifier-generated heat to the outside of the box and reduce the amount of heat generated in the box, thereby allowing a compact control box to be designed.

  • Page 269
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (3) Fitting method Attachment Punched hole Servo amplifier Servo Fit using the Control box amplifier assembling screws. Attachment a. Assembling the heat sink outside mounting attachment b. Installation to the control box (4) Outline dimension drawing Panel Servo amplifier…
  • Page 270: Recommended Wires

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.11 Recommended wires POINT Refer to section 11.1.5 for SSCNET cable. (1) Wires for power supply wiring The following diagram shows the wires used for wiring. Use the wires given in this section or equivalent. 1) Main circuit power supply lead 3) Motor power supply lead Servo amplifier…

  • Page 271
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Table 11.1 Recommended wires Wires [mm Servo amplifer 2) L 4) P C 5) B1 B2 U V W BU BV BW OHS1 OHS2 MR-J3-10B(1) MR-J3-20B(1) MR-J3-40B(1) 1.25(AWG16) MR-J3-60B 2(AWG14) 1.25(AWG16) 2(AWG14) MR-J3-70B MR-J3-100B 2(AWG14) MR-J3-200B MR-J3-350B 3.5(AWG12)
  • Page 272
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Table 11.2 Recommended crimping terminals Servo amplifier side crimping terminals (Note 2) Applicable tool Symbol Crimping Manufacturer Body Head Dice terminal FVD5.5-4 YNT-1210S (Note 1)b 8-4NS YHT-8S FVD14-6 DH-112 DH122 YF-1 E-4 YNE-38 FVD22-6 DH-113 DH123 YPT-60-21 (Note 1)e 38-6 TD-112 TD-124…
  • Page 273
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (2) Wires for cables When fabricating a cable, use the wire models given in the following table or equivalent: Table 11.3 Wires for option cables Characteristics of one core (Note 3) Insulation Length Core size Number Conductor Type…
  • Page 274: No-Fuse Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.12 No-fuse breakers, fuses, magnetic contactors Always use one no-fuse breaker and one magnetic contactor with one servo amplifier. When using a fuse instead of the no-fuse breaker, use the one having the specifications given in this section. No-fuse breaker Fuse Magnetic…

  • Page 275
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Rating plate Terminal box — screw size G Rating plate (Note 1)Terminal cover Screw size G Servo amplifier FR-BEL-(H) Servo amplifier FR-BEL-(H) (Note 2) (Note 3) (Note 2) 5m or less 5m or less A or less B or less L notch A or less…
  • Page 276: Power Factor Improving Ac Reactors

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.14 Power factor improving AC reactors The power factor improving AC reactors improve the phase factor by increasing the form factor of servo amplifier’s input current. It can reduce the power capacity. The input power factor is improved to be about 90%. For use with a 1-phase power supply, it may be slightly lower than 90%.

  • Page 277: Relays (Recommended)

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Dimensions [mm] Mounting Terminal Mass Servo amplifier Model screw size screw size [kg (lb)] 10B1 FR-BAL-0.4K MR-J3-10B M3.5 2.0 (4.41) -2.5 FR-BAL-0.75K MR-J3-40B 20B1 M3.5 2.8 (6.17) -2.5 40B1 FR-BAL-1.5K MR-J3-60B M3.5 3.7 (8.16) -2.5 FR-BAL-2.2K MR-J3-100B M3.5…

  • Page 278: Surge Absorbers (Recommended)

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.16 Surge absorbers (recommended) A surge absorber is required for the electromagnetic brake. Use the following surge absorber or equivalent. When using the surge absorber, perform insulation beforehand to prevent short-circuit. Maximum rating Static capacity Maximum Varistor voltage (reference…

  • Page 279
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (c) Techniques for noises radiated by the servo amplifier that cause peripheral devices to malfunction Noises produced by the servo amplifier are classified into those radiated from the cables connected to the servo amplifier and its main circuits (input and output circuits), those induced electromagnetically or statically by the signal cables of the peripheral devices located near the main circuit cables, and those transmitted through the power supply cables.
  • Page 280
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Noise transmission route Suppression techniques When measuring instruments, receivers, sensors, etc. which handle weak signals and may malfunction due to noise and/or their signal cables are contained in a control box together with the servo amplifier or run near the servo amplifier, such devices may malfunction due to noises transmitted through the air.
  • Page 281
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) Surge suppressor The recommended surge suppressor for installation to an AC relay, AC valve, AC electromagnetic brake or the like near the servo amplifier is shown below. Use this product or equivalent. Relay Surge suppressor Surge suppressor This distance should be short Surge suppressor…
  • Page 282
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Outline drawing [Unit: mm] Earth plate Clamp section diagram 2- 5 hole 17.5 installation hole L or less (Note)M4 screw Note. Screw hole for grounding. Connect it to the earth plate of the control box. Type Accessory fittings Clamp fitting…
  • Page 283: Line Noise Filter (Fr-Blf)

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (d) Line noise filter (FR-BSF01, FR-BLF) This filter is effective in suppressing noises radiated from the power supply side and output side of the servo amplifier and also in suppressing high-frequency leakage current (zero-phase current) especially within 0.5MHz to 5MHz band.

  • Page 284
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (f) Varistors for input power supply (Recommended) Varistors are effective to prevent exogenous noise and lightning surge from entering the servo amplifier. When using a varistor, connect it between each phase of the input power supply of the equipment. For varistors, the TND20V-431K, TND20V-471K and TND20V-102K, manufactured by NIPPON CHEMI- CON, are recommended.
  • Page 285: Leakage Current Breaker

    Make the input and output cables as short as possible, and also make the grounding cable as long as possible (about 30cm) to minimize leakage currents. Rated sensitivity current 10 {Ig1 Ign Iga K (Ig2 Igm)} [mA] (11.1) K: Constant considering the harmonic contents Cable Leakage current breaker Mitsubishi Type Noise products filter NV-SP Servo…

  • Page 286
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Table 11.4 Servo motor’s leakage current example (Igm) Table 11.5 Servo amplifier’s leakage current example (Iga) Servo motor power Leakage current Servo amplifier capacity Leakage current [kW] [mA] [kW] [mA] 0.05 to 1 0.1 to 0.6 0.75 to 3.5 (Note) 0.15 11 15…
  • Page 287: Emc Filter (Recommended)

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.19 EMC filter (recommended) For compliance with the EMC directive of the EN Standard, it is recommended to use the following filter: Some EMC filters are large in leakage current. (1) Combination with the servo amplifier Recommended filter (Soshin Electric) Servo amplifier Mass [kg]([lb])

  • Page 288
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (3) Outline drawing (a) EMC filter HF3010A-UN [Unit: mm] 3-M4 4-5.5 7 3-M4 Approx.41 HF3030A-UN HF-3040A-UN Dimensions [mm] Model HF3030A-UN R3.25, length HF3040A-UN 11 — 85…
  • Page 289
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT HF3100A-UN 2- 6.5 2-6.5 380 1 400 5 TF3005C-TX TX3020C-TX TF3030C-TX [Unit: mm] 3-M4 6-R3.25 length8 3 M4 Approx.67.5 100 1 100 1 290 2 150 2 308 5 Approx.160 332 5 170 5 11 — 86…
  • Page 290
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT TF3040C-TX TF3060C-TX [Unit: mm] 3-M6 3-M6 Dimensions [mm] Model R3.25 TF3040C-TX Approx.190 Approx.91.5 length 8 TF3060C-TX (M6) 11 — 87…
  • Page 291
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) Surge protector RAV-781BYZ-2 [Unit: mm] Black Black Black UL-1015AWG16 41 1.0 RAV-781BXZ-4 [Unit: mm] UL-1015AWG16 41 1.0 11 — 88…
  • Page 292: Features

    12. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM 12. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM If an absolute position erase alarm (25) or absolute position counter warning (E3) CAUTION has occurred, always perform home position setting again. Not doing so can cause runaway. 12.1 Features For normal operation, as shown below, the encoder consists of a detector designed to detect a position within one revolution and a cumulative revolution counter designed to detect the number of revolutions.

  • Page 293: Specifications

    12. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM 12.2 Specifications POINT Replace the battery with only the control circuit power ON. Removal of the battery with the control circuit power OFF will erase the absolute position data. (1) Specification list Item Description System Electronic battery backup system 1 piece of lithium battery ( primary battery, nominal 3.6V)

  • Page 294: Battery Installation Procedure

    12. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM 12.3 Battery installation procedure Before installing a battery, turn off the main circuit power while keeping the control circuit power on. Wait for 15 minutes or more (20 minutes or for drive unit 30kW or more) until the charge lamp turns off.

  • Page 295
    12. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM (2) For MR-J3-500B or more MR-J3-350B4 or more Insert connector into CN4. 12 — 4…
  • Page 296: Confirmation Of Absolute Position Detection Data

    12. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM 12.4 Confirmation of absolute position detection data You can confirm the absolute position data with MR Configurator. Choose «Diagnostics» and «Absolute Encoder Data» to open the absolute position data display screen. (1) Choosing «Diagnostics» in the menu opens the sub-menu as shown below: (2) By choosing «Absolute Encoder Data»…

  • Page 297
    12. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM MEMO 12 — 6…
  • Page 298: Functions And Menus

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) This chapter explains the MELSERVO-J3-B series AC servo featuring a large capacity of 200V (30k to 37kW)/400V (30k to 55kW). Explanation made in this chapter is exclusively for the MR-J3-CR (4) converter units and the MR-J3-DU B(4) drive units.

  • Page 299: Function Block Diagram

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.1.1 Function block diagram The function block diagram of this servo is shown below. Power factor Regenerative improving DC option Converter Diode Thyristor stak Power supply CHARGE Regenerative lamp Cooling fan Control power supply…

  • Page 300
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (Note) Power supply Drive unit Servo motor Current detector Cooling fan Control power supply Base amplifier Over Current current detection Encoder Cooling fan Virtual Position command encoder input Model position Model speed control control…
  • Page 301: Packing List

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.1.2 Packing list Unpack the product and check the rating plate to see if the converter unit, drive unit and servo motor are as you ordered. (1) Converter unit POINT Regenerative resistor and power factor improving DC reactors are option.

  • Page 302: Standard Specifications

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.1.3 Standard specifications (1) Converter unit Model MR-J3-CR55K MR-J3-CR55K4 Item Voltage/frequency 3-phase 200 to 230VAC, 50/60Hz 3-phase 380 to 480VAC, 50/60Hz Permissible voltage Main circuit power 3-phase 170 to 253VAC 3-phase 323 to 528VAC fluctuation supply…

  • Page 303
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) Drive unit (a) 200V class Model MR-J3-DU30KB MR-J3-DU37KB Item Voltage/frequency 1-phase 200 to 230VAC, 50/60Hz Permissible voltage 1-phase 170 to 253VAC Control power fluctuation supply Permissible frequency Within 5% fluctuation Power consumption Main circuit power supply…
  • Page 304
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (b) 400V class Model MR-J3-DU30KB4 MR-J3-DU37KB4 MR-J3-DU45KB4 MR-J3-DU55KB4 Item Voltage/frequency 1-phase 380 to 480VAC, 50/60Hz Permissible voltage 1-phase 323 to 528VAC Control power fluctuation supply Permissible frequency Within 5% fluctuation Power consumption Main circuit power supply The main circuit power of the drive unit is supplied by the converter unit.
  • Page 305: Model Definition

    POWER Applicable power supply INPUT : AC200V-230V 50/60Hz Rated output current OUTPUT SERIAL : A5******* Serial number PASSED MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN (2) Model (a) Converter unit Power supply Series Symbol Power supply None 3-phase 200 to 230VAC 3-phase 380 to 480VAC Indicates converter unit.

  • Page 306: Combinations Of Converter Units, Drive Unit And Servo Motors

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.1.5 Combinations of converter units, drive unit and servo motors The following tables indicate the combinations of the converter units, drive unit and servo motors. These servo motors may not be connected depending on the production time of the drive unit. Please refer to app 5. (1) 200V class Servo motor Converter unit…

  • Page 307: Parts Identification

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.1.6 Parts identification (1) Converter unit (MR-J3-CR55K(4)) POINT The servo amplifier is shown without the front cover. For removal of the front cover, refer to section 13.1.7. Detailed Name/Application Explanation Magnetic contactor control connector (CNP1) Connect to the operation coil of the magnetic contactor.

  • Page 308
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) Drive unit (MR-J3-DU30KB4 MR-J3-DU37KB4) POINT The servo amplifier is shown with the front cover opened. For removal of the front cover, refer to section 13.1.7. Detailed Name/Application Explanation Display Chapter 4 The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo status and alarm number.
  • Page 309
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (3) Drive unit (MR-J3-DU30KB MR-J3-DU37KB MR-J3-DU45KB4 MR-J3-DU55KB4) POINT This servo amplifier is shown without the front cover. For removal of the front cover, refer to section 13.1.7. Detailed Name/Application Explanation Display The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo Chapter 4…
  • Page 310: Removal And Reinstallation Of The Terminal Block Cover

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.1.7 Removal and reinstallation of the terminal block cover Before removing or installing the front cover, turn off the power and wait for 20 minutes or more until the charge lamp turns off. Then, confirm that the voltage between L and L is safe with a voltage tester and others.

  • Page 311
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (b) How to reinstall the terminal block cover 1) Put the terminal block cover on and match the screw holes of the cover fit with those of the main unit. 2) Install the installing screws into the screw holes (A), B), C), D)).
  • Page 312
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) MR-J3-DU30KB4 or MR-J3-DU37KB4 (a) Upper terminal block cover 1) How to open Pull up the cover using the axis A), A)’ as a support. When pulled up to the top, the cover is fixed. 13 — 15…
  • Page 313
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 2) How to close Close the cover using the axis A), A)’ as a support. Setting tab Press the cover against the terminal box until the installing knobs click. Setting tab 13 — 16…
  • Page 314
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (b) Lower terminal block cover 1) How to open Hold the bottom of the terminal block cover with both hands. Pull up the cover using the axis B), B)’ as a support.
  • Page 315
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 2) How to close Hold the bottom of the terminal block cover with both hands. Setting tab Setting tab Close the cover using the axis B), B)’ as a support. Press the cover against the terminal box until the installing knobs click.
  • Page 316: Servo System With Auxiliary Equipment

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.1.8 Servo system with auxiliary equipment R S T 3-phase AC power supply Personal MR Configurator computer No-fuse breaker(NFB) The MR Configurator is required for parameter setting. Converter unit Communication cable Magnetic contactor(MC)

  • Page 317: Installation

    Do not install or operate a faulty converter unit drive unit. When the product has been stored for an extended period of time, consult Mitsubishi. When treating the converter unit drive unit, be careful about the edged parts such as the corners of the converter unit drive unit.

  • Page 318: Installation Direction And Clearances

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.2.1 Installation direction and clearances Install the equipment in the specified direction. Not doing so can cause a failure. Leave the specified clearances between the converter unit/drive unit and the CAUTION control box inside walls or other equipment.

  • Page 319: Inspection

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.2.2 Inspection Before starting maintenance and/or inspection, turn off the power and wait for 20 minutes or more until the charge lamp turns off. Then, confirm that the voltage WARNING between L and L is safe with a voltage tester and others.

  • Page 320: Signals And Wiring

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.3 Signals and wiring Any person who is involved in wiring should be fully competent to do the work. Before wiring, turn off the power and wait for 20 minutes or more until the charge lamp turns off.

  • Page 321: Magnetic Contactor Control Connector (Cnp1)

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) POINT Explanations on the following item are the same as those for servo amplifiers with 22kW or less. Refer to the section below for details. I/O signal connection example Refer to section 3.2. Signal (device) explanations Refer to section 3.5.

  • Page 322
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (1) Enabling control function of magnetic contactor (parameter No.PA02 1 (initial value)) Connecting the magnetic contactor control connector (CNP1) to the operating coil of the magnetic contactor enables to control the magnetic contactor. Converter unit Power supply Control circuit…
  • Page 323: Input Power Supply Circuit

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.3.2 Input power supply circuit Insulate the connections of the power supply terminals. Not doing so can cause an electric shock. WARNING Magnetic contactor wiring connector on the converter unit CNP1. Unattached state may cause an electric shock.

  • Page 324
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (1) When magnetic contactor control connector (CNP1) is made valid (factory-set) POINT The converter unit controls the main circuit magnetic contactor. Refer to section 13.3.7 (1) for the power circuit timing chart, section 13.3.7 (2) for the alarm occurrence timing chart, section 13.3.7 (3) for the forced stop (EM1) timing chart.
  • Page 325
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (b) 400V class (MR-J3-DU30KB4 to MR-J3-DU55KB4) (Note 5) Power supply Converter unit Drive unit TE2-2 TE2-1 Dynamic Dynamic brake CN40 CN40A brake (Option) (Option) MR-J3CDL05M cable CN40B Termination 3-phase Servo motor connector 380 to 480VAC MR-J3-TM…
  • Page 326
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) When magnetic contactor control connector (CNP1) is made invalid POINT The converter unit controls the main circuit magnetic contactor. When making CNP1 invalid, set «0000» in parameter No.PA02. (Refer to section 13.5.) Always connect a protection coordination cable (MR-J3CDL05M) and a termination connector (MR-J3-TM).
  • Page 327
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (b) 400V class (MR-J3-DU30KB4 to MR-J3-DU55KB4) (Note 6) Power supply Converter unit Drive unit TE2-2 TE2-1 Dynamic brake CN40 CN40A (Option) MR-J3CDL05M cable CN40B Termination 3-phase Servo motor connector 380 to 480VAC MR-J3-TM 50/60Hz (Option)
  • Page 328: Terminal

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.3.3 Terminal Refer to section 13.7 for the terminal block arrangement and signal layout. (1) Converter unit Connection Target (Note) Description Abbreviation (Application) Terminal Block MR-J3-CR55K MR-J3-CR55K4 Connect 3-phase 200 to Connect 3-phase 380 to Main circuit power supply TE1-1…

  • Page 329: How To Use The Connection Bars

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.3.4 How to use the connection bars Make sure to use the supplied connection conductors and connect the L and L of the drive unit to those of the converter unit as shown below. Never use connection conductors other than the ones supplied with the drive unit.

  • Page 330: Connectors And Signal Arrangements

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.3.5 Connectors and signal arrangements POINT The pin configurations of the connectors are as viewed from the cable connector wiring section. (1) Converter unit CN1 (Digital I/O connector) CN6 Leave this open. Model: 17JE-23090-02 (D8A) K11-CG (D-sub 9 pin or equivalent) CN40 Connect to CN40A of the…

  • Page 331
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) Drive unit The drive unit front view shown is that of the MR-J3-DU30KB4, MR-J3-DU37KB4 or less. Refer to section 13.7 Outline Drawings for the appearances and connector layouts of the MR-J3-DU30KB, MR-J3-DU37KB, MR-J3-DU45KB4, MR-J3-DU55KB4.
  • Page 332: Converter Unit Signal (Device) Explanations

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.3.6 Converter unit signal (device) explanations POINT Explanations on the drive unit signals are the same as those for servo amplifiers with 22kW or less. Refer to section 3.5. (1) Signals For the I/O interfaces (symbols in I/O column in the table), refer to (b) of this section.

  • Page 333
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) I/O interfaces (a) Digital input interface (DI) Give a signal with a relay or open collector transistor. Refer to section 3.7.3 for the source input. Converter unit For transistor 5.6k Approx.
  • Page 334: Timing Chart

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.3.7 Timing chart (1) Power circuit timing chart Power-on procedure (a) Always wire the power supply as shown in above section 13.3.2 using the magnetic contactor with the main circuit power supply (3-phase: L ).

  • Page 335
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 3) When controlling magnetic contactor by external sequence When an alarm occurs, turn OFF the magnetic contactor by the external sequence and shut off the main circuit power supply. Drive unit control power supply Converter unit control power supply…
  • Page 336
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) Alarm occurrence timing chart When an alarm has occurred, remove its cause, make sure that the operation signal is not being input, ensure safety, and reset the alarm before restarting CAUTION operation.
  • Page 337
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 2) Drive unit When an alarm occurs on the drive unit, the base circuit is shut off and the servo motor coasts. When using a dynamic brake (option), the dynamic brake is activated to stop the servo motor. To deactivate the alarm, power the control circuit off, then on, turn the reset (RES) on or CPU reset command.
  • Page 338
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (b) When controlling magnetic contactor by external sequence 1) Converter unit When an alarm occurs on the converter unit, the servo-on turns OFF; however, the main circuit power supply is not shut off. Therefore, shut off the main circuit power supply by the external sequence. After cancelling the alarm on the converter unit (when an alarm is also occurring on the drive unit after cancelling the alarm on the drive unit as well), turning ON the reset command enables to operate again.
  • Page 339
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 2) Drive unit When an alarm occurs in the drive unit, the drive unit turns into the servo off but the main circuit power supply is not shut off. Therefore, shut off the main circuit power supply using the external sequence.
  • Page 340
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (3) Forced stop (EM1) ON/OFF timing chart (a) When control function of magnetic controller is enabled 1) Converter unit When the forced stop is made valid in the converter unit, the magnetic contactor is turned off and the main circuit power supply is shut off.
  • Page 341
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (b) Forced stop in the drive unit When the forced stop is made valid in the drive unit, the drive unit in operation stops, Main circuit off warning (E9) appears, and then the drive unit is forcedly stopped. Configure to activate the forced stop of the drive unit as the forced stop of the converter unit is activated, and to activate the forced stop of the converter unit as the forced stop of the drive unit is activated.
  • Page 342: Servo Motor Side Details

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.3.8 Servo motor side details Encoder connector signal arrangement Terminal box Encoder connector CM10-R10P CM10-R10P Terminal Signal HA-LP30K1 HA-LP37K2 HA-LP45K1M4 HA-LP37K1 HA-LP25K14 HA-LP50K1M4 HA-LP30K1M4 HA-LP30K24 HA-LP30K1M HA-LP30K14 HA-LP45K24 HA-LP37K24 HA-LP37K1M HA-LP37K14 HA-LP55K24 HA-LP30K2…

  • Page 343
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Signal name Abbreviation Description Connect to the motor power terminals (U, V, W) of the drive unit. During power-on, do not Servo motor U V W open or close the motor power line. power supply Otherwise, a malfunction or faulty may occur.
  • Page 344: Display Section And Operation Section Of The Converter Unit

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.4 Display section and operation section of the converter unit 13.4.1 Display flowchart Use the display (3-dight, 7-segment LED) on the front panel of the converter unit for status display, parameter setting, etc.

  • Page 345
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.4.2 Status display mode The servo status during operation is shown on the 3-digit, 7-segment LED display. Press the «UP» or «DOWN» button to change display data as desired. When the required data is selected, the corresponding symbol is displayed. Press the «SET» button to display that data.
  • Page 346
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.4.3 Diagnostic mode (1) Diagnostic list Name Display Unit Not ready. Initializing. An alarm occurred. External forced stop status. Sequence Bus voltage is not established. Ready Indicates that the servo was switched on after completion of initialization and the drive unit is ready to operate.
  • Page 347
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (b) Display definition The 7-segment LED segments and CN1 connector pins correspond as shown below. CN1-7: Forced stop (EM1) Input signals Output signals CN1-8: CN-2: Warning (WNG) Trouble (ALM) Lit: ON Extinguished: OFF The LED segment corresponding to the pin is lit to indicate ON, and is extinguished to indicate OFF.
  • Page 348
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.4.4 Alarm mode The current alarm, parameter error and point table error are displayed. The lower 2 digits on the display indicate the alarm number that has occurred or the parameter number in error. Display example are shown below.
  • Page 349: Parameter Mode

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Functions at occurrence of an alarm (1) Any mode screen displays the current alarm. (2) The other screen is visible during occurrence of an alarm. At this time, the decimal point in the third digit flickers.

  • Page 350: Parameters For Converter Unit

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.5. Parameters for converter unit Never adjust or change the parameter values extremely as it will make operation CAUTION instable. POINT Refer to chapter 5 for parameters for drive unit. Parameter whose symbol is preceded by * is made valid with the following conditions.

  • Page 351: List Of Details

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.5.2 List of details Initial Setting Symbol Name and function Unit value range PA01 *REG Regenerative option 0000h Refer to Used to select the regenerative option. Name function column. Select the regenerative option. 00: No used 01: MR-RB139 Only for MR-J3-CR55K…

  • Page 352: Troubleshooting

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Initial Setting Symbol Name and function Unit value range PA12 *DIF Input filter setting 0002h Refer to Select the input filter. Name function column. Input signal filter If external input signal causes chattering due to noise, etc., input filter is used to suppress it.

  • Page 353
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) Remedies for alarms When any alarm has occurred, eliminate its cause, ensure safety, then reset the CAUTION alarm, and restart operation. Otherwise, injury may occur. POINT When any of the following alarms has occurred, always remove its cause and allow about 30 minutes for cooling before resuming operation.
  • Page 354
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Display Name Definition Cause Action A.30 Regenerative Permissible regenerative 1. Wrong setting of parameter No. Set correctly. error power of regenerative PA01 option is exceeded. 2. Regenerative option is not Connect correctly.
  • Page 355
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Display Name Definition Cause Action A.38 MC drive circuit Magnetic contactor drive 1. Wrong connection of the magnetic Review the wiring. error circuit error contactor. (When the magnetic 2. Parameters specifying whether to Set parameter No.PA02 correctly.
  • Page 356
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (3) Remedies for warnings Continuing operation in an alarm occurrence status may result in an alarm or disable proper operation. Eliminate the cause of the warning according to this section. The warning displayed will disappear when the cause of its occurrence is resolved.
  • Page 357
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.6.2 Drive unit POINT Explanation made in this section is exclusively for the driver unit. Other troubleshooting is the same as that for servo amplifiers with 22kW or less. Refer to chapter 8. As soon as an alarm occurs, make the Servo off status and interrupt the main circuit power.
  • Page 358
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (3) Remedies for warnings Continuing operation in an alarm occurrence status may result in an alarm or disable proper operation. Eliminate the cause of the warning according to this section. The warning displayed will disappear when the cause of its occurrence is resolved.
  • Page 359: Outline Drawings

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.7 Outline drawings POINT Refer to section 13.2.1 for outline dimension drawing. 13.7.1 Converter unit (MR-J3-CR55K(4)) [Unit: mm] Cooling fan wind direction 2- 7 Installation hole Approx. 20 Approx. 200 Terminal block layout Approx.

  • Page 360
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.7.2 Drive unit (1) MR-J3-DU30KB MR-J3-DU37KB MR-J3-DU45KB4 MR-J3-DU55KB4 [Unit: mm] 2- 7 Installation hole Approx. 20 Approx. 200 Cooling fan Approx. 80 Terminal block layout wind direction (Terminal cover removed) For mounting TE2-1 TE2-1…
  • Page 361
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) MR-J3-DU30KB4 MR-J3-DU37KB4 [Unit: mm] 2- 6 Installation hole Approx. 60 Approx. 200 Cooling fan Approx. 80 Terminal block layout wind direction (Terminal cover removed) For mounting MR-J3BAT Approx. 200 219.2 Mass: 18[kg] (Approx.
  • Page 362: Overload Protection Characteristics

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.8 Characteristics 13.8.1 Overload protection characteristics An electronic thermal relay is built in the converter unit and drive unit to protect the servo motor, converter unit and drive unit from overloads. Overload 1 alarm (50) occurs if overload operation performed is above the electronic thermal relay protection curve shown below.

  • Page 363: Power Supply Equipment Capacity And Generated Loss

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.8.2 Power supply equipment capacity and generated loss POINT The calculation method of heat dissipation area for enclosed control panel is the same as that for servo amplifiers with 22kW or less. Refer to section 10.2 (2).

  • Page 364: Dynamic Brake Characteristics

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.8.3 Dynamic brake characteristics Fig. 13.2 shows the pattern in which the servo motor comes to a stop when the dynamic brake is operated. Use Equation 13.1 to calculate an approximate coasting distance to a stop. The dynamic brake time constant varies with the servo motor and machine operation speeds.

  • Page 365
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) HA-LP37K1M HA-LP37K1M4 HA-LP45K1M4 HA-LP50K1M4 HA-LP30K1M HA-LP30K1M4 1000 1500 2000 1000 1500 2000 Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] HA-LP1500r/min series 0.045 0.045 HA-LP45K24 0.04 0.04 HA-LP30K2 0.035 0.035 HA-LP37K2 HA-LP55K24 HA-LP37K24 0.03 0.03 HA-LP30K24 0.025…
  • Page 366: Inrush Currents At Power-On Of Main Circuit And Control Circuit

    Use the dynamic brake at the load inertia moment indicated in the following table. If the load inertia moment is higher than this value, the built-in dynamic brake may burn. If there is a possibility that the load inertia moment may exceed the value, contact Mitsubishi. Load inertia moment ratio…

  • Page 367: Options

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.9 Options Before connecting any option or peripheral equipment, turn off the power and wait for 20 minutes or more until the charge lamp turns off. Then, confirm that the voltage between L and L is safe with a voltage tester and others.

  • Page 368
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (1) Makeup of cables and like The following shows the cable makeup for connection with the servo motor and other model. Converter unit Drive unit CNP1 CN40 CN40A CN40B 4) 5) Servo motor HA-LP Terminal…
  • Page 369
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) MR-J3CDL05M(0.5m) Protection coordination cable Connect protection coordination cables correctly if they are fabricated. CAUTION Otherwise, misoperation or explosion may occur. When fabricating a protection coordination cable, use the recommended wires given in section 13.9.4, and fabricate a protection coordination cable as shown in the wiring diagram in this section.
  • Page 370
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.9.2 Regenerative option The specified combinations of regenerative options, converter unit and drive unit CAUTION may only be used. Otherwise, a fire may occur. POINT The calculation method of regenerative energy is the same as that for servo amplifiers with 22kW or less.
  • Page 371
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (4) Connection of the regenerative option Always supply 1-phase 200V and 400V respectively to the cooling fan. The cooling fan specifications are as follows. Table 13.3 Cooling fan Item 200V class 400V class Model MR-RB137 MR-RB139…
  • Page 372
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (b) MR-RB137 MR-RB138-4 POINT Three of MR-RB137 or MR-RB138-4 are required per converter unit. Please purchase three of MR-RB137 or MR-RB138-4. Converter unit Power factor improving DC reactor (Option) (Note 1) Servo motor 5m or less OHS1…
  • Page 373
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (5) Outline dimension drawings [Unit:mm] 2- 10 hole Mass Regenerative option [kg(lb)] MR-RB139 MR-RB136-4 10(22.05) Cooling fan (Note 1) MR-RB137 MR-RB138-4 11(24.25) Terminal block signal layout (Note 2) (Note 2) Terminal screw: M5 Tightening torque: 2.0 [N m] (17.7 [lb in]) Mounting screw…
  • Page 374: External Dynamic Brake

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.9.3 External dynamic brake POINT Configure up a sequence which switches off the contact of the brake unit after (or as soon as) it has turned off the servo on (signal) at a power failure or failure.

  • Page 375
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Converter unit Drive unit Servo motor (Note 4) Power supply DICOM DOCOM DICOM CNP1 (Note 3) DICOM (Note 3) DOCOM DICOM DOCOM Forced stop (Note 2) Plate (Note 5) Drive Controller (Note 5) Operation…
  • Page 376
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (3) Outline dimension drawing [Unit:mm] 2- 10 installation hole Terminal block Terminal screw: M5 Tightening torque: 2.0 [N m] (17.7 [lb in]) Terminal screw: M5 Tightening torque: 0.8 [N m] (7.1 [lb in]) a b 1314 U V W Mounting screw…
  • Page 377: Recommended Wires

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.9.4 Recommended wires The following diagram shows the wires used for wiring. Use the wires given in this paragraph or equivalent. Converter unit Drive unit Servo motor 3) Motor power supply lead Power factor improving DC reactor…

  • Page 378: No-Fuse Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Table 13.5 Recommended crimping terminals Servo amplifier side crimping terminals Symbol (Note 2) Applicable tool Manufacturer Crimping terminal Body Head Dice FVD5.5-10 YNT-1210S FVD22-10 YF-1 E-4 YNE-38 DH-123 DH113 Japan Solderless (Note 1) R38-8 YPT-60-21…

  • Page 379: Power Factor Improving Dc Reactor

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.9.6 Power factor improving DC reactor The input power factor is improved to about 95%. [Unit:mm] Power factor improving Terminal Mass Converter unit Drive unit DC reactor Screw [kg (lb)] MR-J3-DU30KB MR-DCL30K MR-J3-CR55K…

  • Page 380
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.9.7 Line noise filter (FR-BLF) POINT This section explains how to use the line noise filter unique to servo amplifiers with a large capacity. Other noise reduction products are the same as those for servo amplifiers with 22kW or less.
  • Page 381: Leakage Current Breaker

    (about 30cm) to minimize leakage currents. Rated sensitivity current 10 {Ig1 (Ig2 Igm)} [mA] ··········································· (13.2) K: Constant considering the harmonic contents Leakage current breaker Cable Noise filter Mitsubishi Type Cable Converter Drive products unit unit NV-SP Models provided with…

  • Page 382
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) Selection example Indicated below is an example of selecting a leakage current breaker under the following conditions: 30mm 22mm Converter Drive Servo motor unit unit Use a leakage current breaker designed for suppressing harmonics/surges. Find the terms of Equation (13.2) from the diagram: 95 ×…
  • Page 383: Emc Filter (Recommended)

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.9.9 EMC filter (recommended) For compliance with the EMC directive of the EN Standard, it is recommended to use the following filter: Some EMC filters are large in leakage current. (1) Converter unit Drive unit Recommended filter (Soshin Electric)

  • Page 384
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (3) Outline drawing HF3200A-UN [Unit: mm] 6.5 Length: 8 3-M10 TF3150C-TX [Unit: mm] 8-R 4.25 Length: 12 (for M8) 3-M8 3-M8 (227) 13 — 87…
  • Page 385: Fr-Bu2-(H) Brake Unit

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.9.10 FR-BU2-(H) Brake Unit POINT Use a 200V class brake unit and a resistor unit with a 200V class converter unit, and a 400V class brake unit and a resistor unit with a 400V class converter unit.

  • Page 386
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) Brake unit parameter setting Normally, changing parameters of the FR-BU2-(H) is not necessary. Whether a parameter can be changed or not is listed below. Parameter Change Remarks possible/ Name impossible Brake mode switchover Impossible…
  • Page 387
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Converter unit Drive unit (Note 1) (Note 3) Power supply DICOM 24VDC DOCOM DICOM CNP1 DICOM 24VDC DICOM (Note 2) DOCOM DOCOM (Note 9) Forced stop (Note 2) Plate (Note 5) (Note 2) Drive Controller…
  • Page 388
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Note 1. For power supply specifications, refer to section 13.1.3. 2. Configure the circuit to turn OFF the forced stop (EM1) of the drive unit and the converter unit at the same time. 3.
  • Page 389
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (b) Combination with MT-BR5-(H) resistor unit 1) When connecting a brake unit to a converter unit Converter unit Drive unit (Note 1) Power supply (Note 3) DICOM 24VDC DOCOM DICOM CNP1 DICOM 24VDC…
  • Page 390
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 2) When connecting two brake units to a converter unit POINT To use brake units with a parallel connection, use two sets of FR-BU2-(H) brake unit. Combination with other brake unit results in alarm occurrence or malfunction.
  • Page 391
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Converter unit Drive unit (Note 1) Power (Note 3) supply DICOM 24VDC DOCOM DICOM CNP1 DICOM 24VDC DICOM (Note 2) DOCOM DOCOM (Note 9) Forced stop (Note 2) Plate (Note 5) (Note 2) Controller Drive…
  • Page 392
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Note 1. For power supply specifications, refer to section 13.1.3. 2. Configure the circuit to turn OFF the forced stop (EM1) of the drive unit and the converter unit at the same time. 3.
  • Page 393
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) b) Control circuit terminal POINT Undertightening can cause a cable disconnection or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to damage to the screw or the brake unit. Sheath SD SD Core…
  • Page 394
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (e) Crimping terminals for L and L terminals of TE2-1 of servo amplifier 1) Recommended crimping terminals POINT Always use recommended crimping terminals or equivalent since some crimping terminals cannot be installed depending on the size. Number of (Note 1) Converter unit…
  • Page 395
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (4) Outline dimension drawings (a) FR-BU2- (H) brake unit [Unit: mm] FR-BU2-55K FR-BU2-H55K, H75K 2- 5hole (Screw size: M4) Rating plate 18.5 142.5 (b) FR-BR- (H) resistor unit [Unit: mm] 2- C (Note) Control circuit…
  • Page 396
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (c) MT-BR5- (H) resistor unit [Unit: mm] Approximate Resistance Resistor unit mass [kg] value 200V MT-BR5-55K class 400V MT-BR5-H75K class 4 15 mounting hole 13 — 99…
  • Page 397
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) MEMO 13 — 100…
  • Page 398: Appendix

    APPENDIX App 1. Parameter list POINT Parameter whose symbol is preceded by * is made valid with the following conditions. * : Set the parameter value, switch power off once after setting, and then switch it on again, or perform the controller reset. **: Set the parameter value, switch power off once, and then switch it on again.

  • Page 399
    APPENDIX Extension setting parameters (PC I/O setting parameters (PD Symbol Name Symbol Name PC01 *ERZ Error excessive alarm level PD01 For manufacturer setting PC02 Electromagnetic brake sequence output PD06 PC03 *ENRS Encoder output pulses selection PC04 **COP1 Function selection C-1 PD07 *DO1 Output signal device selection 1 (CN3-13)
  • Page 400: App 2. Signal Layout Recording Paper

    APPENDIX App 2. Signal layout recording paper DOCOM DICOM DICOM App 3. Twin type connector : Outline drawing for 721-2105/026-000(WAGO) [Unit: mm] Latch Coding finger Size [mm] Model 721-2105/026-000 5.25 721-2205/026-000 7.75 Detecting hole 26.45 2.75 15.1 4.75 Driver slot Wire inserting hole App — 3…

  • Page 401: App 4. Change Of Connector Sets To The Rohs Compatible Products

    APPENDIX App 4. Change of connector sets to the RoHS compatible products Connector sets (options) in the following table are changed to the RoHS compatible products after September, 2006 shipment. Please accept that the current products might be mixed with RoHS compatible products based on availability. Model Current Product RoHS Compatible Product…

  • Page 402
    REVISIONS *The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover. Print Data *Manual Number Revision May, 2005 SH(NA)030051-A First edition Jan., 2006 SH(NA)030051-B Addition of servo amplifier MR-J3-11KB(4), 15KB(4) and 22KB(4) Addition of servo motor HC-RP, HC-UP, HC-LP and HA-LP4 series Section 1.5 (2) : Addition of regeneration brake resistor-less specification Section 1.7.2…
  • Page 403
    Print Data *Manual Number Revision Jul., 2007 SH(NA)030051-C Section 1.2(1) : Unification of Note 3 to Note 2, addition of new Note 3 Section 1.3 : Addition of MR-J3-500B4 and 700B4 Section 1.3(2) : Addition of MR-J3-60B4 to 350B4 Section 1.5(2) : Addition of MR-J3-60B4 to 350B4 Section 1.6 : Addition of MR-J3-500B4 and 700B4…
  • Page 404
    Print Data *Manual Number Revision Jul., 2007 SH(NA)030051-C Section 3.10.2(3) : Change of Note1 and 3 in (a) 1) and 2), Addition and change of (b) Terminal box inside diagrams, Addition and change of corresponding motor models in the cooling fan power supply list Section 3.10.2(3) (b) : Change of servo motor diagram Section 3.11.3(1)
  • Page 405
    Print Data *Manual Number Revision Jul., 2007 SH(NA)030051-C Section 11.1.1 : Change of Application description for No.34 from “outside panel long distance cable” to “long distance cable” Change of connector model Addition of 2) Connector for 2kW and 3.5kW (400V) Section 11.1.2(1) : Deletion of 0.3m from table Section 11.1.2(1) (a)
  • Page 406
    Print Data *Manual Number Revision Jul., 2007 SH(NA)030051-C Section 11.11(1) : Addition of cable diameter for MR-J3-60B4 to 350B4, addition of Note 3: Cable 5) to 7) of MR-J3-700B(4) Section 11.12 : Addition of MR-J3-60B4 to 350B4 compliant products Addition of no-fuse breakers, fuses and magnetic contactors for MR-J3-500B4 and 700B4 Section 11.13 : Addition of MR-J3-60B4 to 350B4 compliant products,…
  • Page 407
    Print Data *Manual Number Revision Jul., 2007 SH(NA)030051-C Section 13.4.3(3) : Deletion Section 13.5.2 : Deletion of parameter No.PA08 name and initial value Section 13.6.1(3) : Deletion of «built-in regenerative register» from excessive regenerative load warning (A.E0) definition and cause Section 13.8.1 : Division of Load ratio graph for MR-J3- B(4) and MR- J3-CR55K(4)
  • Page 408
    MODEL MODEL CODE HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BLDG MARUNOUCHI TOKYO 100-8310 This Instruction Manual uses recycled paper. SH (NA) 030051-C (0707) MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.

Mitsubishi Electric Melservo-J3 Series MR-J3-B Instruction Manual

  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Troubleshooting

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

General-Purpose AC Servo

SSCNET

MODEL

MR-J3- B

SERVO AMPLIFIER

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

J3

Compatible

Series

C

loading

Related Manuals for Mitsubishi Electric Melservo-J3 Series MR-J3-B

Summary of Contents for Mitsubishi Electric Melservo-J3 Series MR-J3-B

  • Page 1
    General-Purpose AC Servo Series SSCNET Compatible MODEL MR-J3- B SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL…
  • Page 2: Safety Instructions

    Safety Instructions (Always read these instructions before using the equipment.) Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the servo amplifier and servo motor until you have read through this Instruction Manual, Installation guide, Servo motor Instruction Manual and appended documents carefully and can use the equipment correctly.

  • Page 3
    1. To prevent electric shock, note the following: WARNING Before wiring or inspection, turn off the power and wait for 15 minutes or more (20 minutes or for drive unit 30kW or more) until the charge lamp turns off. Then, confirm that the voltage between P( ) and N( ) (L and L for drive unit 30kW or more) is safe with a voltage tester and others.
  • Page 4
    4. Additional instructions The following instructions should also be fully noted. Incorrect handling may cause a fault, injury, electric shock, etc. (1) Transportation and installation CAUTION Transport the products correctly according to their weights. Stacking in excess of the specified number of products is not allowed. Do not carry the servo motor by the cables, shaft or encoder.
  • Page 5
    Never hit the servo motor or shaft, especially when coupling the servo motor to the machine. The encoder may become faulty. Do not subject the servo motor shaft to more than the permissible load. Otherwise, the shaft may break. When the equipment has been stored for an extended period of time, consult Mitsubishi. (2) Wiring CAUTION Wire the equipment correctly and securely.
  • Page 6
    (3) Test run adjustment CAUTION Before operation, check the parameter settings. Improper settings may cause some machines to perform unexpected operation. The parameter settings must not be changed excessively. Operation will be insatiable. (4) Usage CAUTION Provide an external emergency stop circuit to ensure that operation can be stopped and power switched off immediately.
  • Page 7
    (5) Corrective actions CAUTION When it is assumed that a hazardous condition may take place at the occur due to a power failure or a product fault, use a servo motor with electromagnetic brake or an external brake mechanism for the purpose of prevention.
  • Page 8
    Write to the EEP-ROM due to device changes Precautions for Choosing the Products Mitsubishi will not be held liable for damage caused by factors found not to be the cause of Mitsubishi; machine damage or lost profits caused by faults in the Mitsubishi products; damage, secondary damage, accident compensation caused by special factors unpredictable by Mitsubishi;…
  • Page 9
    COMPLIANCE WITH EC DIRECTIVES 1. WHAT ARE EC DIRECTIVES? The EC directives were issued to standardize the regulations of the EU countries and ensure smooth distribution of safety-guaranteed products. In the EU countries, the machinery directive (effective in January, 1995), EMC directive (effective in January, 1996) and low voltage directive (effective in January, 1997) of the EC directives require that products to be sold should meet their fundamental safety requirements and carry the CE marks (CE marking).
  • Page 10
    (2) Configuration The control circuit provide safe separation to the main circuit in the converter unit and servo amplifier (drive unit). (a) MR-J3-22KB(4) or less Control box Reinforced insulating type 24VDC power supply No-fuse Magnetic Serve breaker contactor motor Servo amplifier (b) MR-J3-DU30KB(4) or more Control box…
  • Page 11
    (b) Do not connect two ground cables to the same protective earth (PE) terminal. Always connect the cables to the terminals one-to-one. PE terminals PE terminals (c) If a leakage current breaker is used to prevent an electric shock, the protective earth (PE) terminals of the servo amplifier must be connected to the corresponding earth terminals.
  • Page 12
    CONFORMANCE WITH UL/C-UL STANDARD (1) Converter unit, servo amplifiers (drive unit) and servo motors used Use the converter unit, servo amplifiers (drive unit) and servo motors which comply with the standard model. Converter unit series :MR-J3-CR55K MR-J3-CR55K4 Servo amplifier (drive unit) series :MR-J3-10B to MR-J3-22KB MR-J3-10B1 to MR-J3-40B1 MR-J3-60B4 to MR-J3-22KB4…
  • Page 13
    (4) Capacitor discharge time The capacitor discharge time is as listed below. To ensure safety, do not touch the charging section for 15 minutes (more than 20 minutes in case drive unit is 30kW or more) after power-off. Servo amplifier Discharge time [min] MR-J3-10B 20B MR-J3-40B 60B(4) 10B1 20B1…
  • Page 14
    (7) About wiring protection For installation in United States, branch circuit protection must be provided, in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any applicable local codes. For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided, in accordance with the Canada Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes.
  • Page 15
    MEMO A — 14…
  • Page 16: Table Of Contents

    CONTENTS 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1 — 1 to 1 -28 1.1 Introduction…………………………. 1 — 1 1.2 Function block diagram……………………..1 — 2 1.3 Servo amplifier standard specifications………………..1 — 5 1.4 Function list ………………………… 1 — 7 1.5 Model code definition ……………………..1 — 8 1.6 Combination with servo motor ……………………

  • Page 17
    3.13 Control axis selection……………………..3 -51 4. STARTUP 4 — 1 to 4 -10 4.1 Switching power on for the first time ………………….. 4 — 1 4.1.1 Startup procedure……………………..4 — 1 4.1.2 Wiring check ……………………….4 — 2 4.1.3 Surrounding environment……………………4 — 3 4.2 Start up …………………………
  • Page 18
    6.4 Interpolation mode ……………………..6 -11 6.5 Differences between MELSERVO-J2-Super and MELSERVO-J3 in auto tuning…….. 6 -12 7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 7 — 1 to 7 -16 7.1 Function block diagram……………………..7 — 1 7.2 Adaptive filter ……………………….7 — 1 7.3 Machine resonance suppression filter…………………
  • Page 19
    11.3.4 Outline dimension drawings………………….11-43 11.4 Power regeneration converter ………………….11-45 11.5 Power regeneration common converter ………………..11-48 11.6 External dynamic brake ……………………11-56 11.7 Junction terminal block PS7DW-20V14B-F (recommended)…………. 11-61 11.8 MR Configurator……………………… 11-63 11.9 Battery MR-J3BAT ……………………..11-64 11.10 Heat sink outside mounting attachment (MR-J3ACN)…………..
  • Page 20
    13.4.1 Display flowchart ……………………… 13-47 13.4.2 Status display mode……………………13-48 13.4.3 Diagnostic mode……………………..13-49 13.4.4 Alarm mode ……………………… 13-51 13.4.5 Parameter mode ……………………… 13-52 13.5. Parameters for converter unit ………………….13-53 13.5.1 Parameter list ……………………..13-53 13.5.2 List of details……………………..13-54 13.6 Troubleshooting ………………………
  • Page 21
    MEMO…
  • Page 22: Functions And Configuration

    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.1 Introduction The Mitsubishi MELSERVO-J3 series general-purpose AC servo has further higher performance and higher functions compared to the current MELSERVO-J2-Super series. The MR-J3-B servo amplifier connects to servo system controller and others via high speed synchronous network and operates by directly reading position data.

  • Page 23: Function Block Diagram

    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.2 Function block diagram The function block diagram of this servo is shown below. (1) MR-J3-350B or less MR-J3-200B4 or less Power factor improving DC Regenerative reactor option N( ) Servo amplifier P( ) Servo motor Diode (Note 1) stack Relay…

  • Page 24
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (2) MR-J3-350B4 MR-J3-500B(4) MR-J3-700B(4) Power factor improving DC Regenerative reactor option Servo amplifier Servo motor Diode stack Relay (Note) Current Power detector supply CHARGE Regene- lamp rative Dynamic Cooling fan brake Electro- Control magnetic circuit brake power supply Base…
  • Page 25
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (3) MR-J3-11KB(4) to 22KB(4) Power factor improving DC Regenerative reactor option Servo amplifier Servo motor Diode stack Thyristor (Note) Current Power detector supply CHARGE Regene- lamp rative Dynamic Cooling fan brake Electro- Control magnetic circuit brake power supply Base…
  • Page 26: Servo Amplifier Standard Specifications

    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.3 Servo amplifier standard specifications (1) 200V class, 100V class Servo Amplifier 10B 20B 40B 60B 70B 100B 200B 350B 500B 700B 11KB 15KB 22KB 10B1 20B1 40B1 MR-J3- Item 3-phase or 1-phase 200 1-phase 100V to Voltage/frequency 3-phase 200 to 230VAC, 50/60Hz to 230VAC, 50/60Hz…

  • Page 27
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (2) 400V class Servo Amplifier 60B4 100B4 200B4 350B4 500B4 700B4 11KB4 15KB4 22KB4 MR-J3- Item Voltage/frequency 3-phase 380 to 480VAC, 50/60Hz Permissible voltage fluctuation 3-phase 323 to 528VAC Permissible frequency Within 5% fluctuation Power supply capacity Refer to section 10.2 Inrush current Refer to section 10.5…
  • Page 28: Function List

    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.4 Function list The following table lists the functions of this servo. For details of the functions, refer to the reference field. Function Description Reference High-resolution encoder of 262144 pulses/rev is used as a servo motor High-resolution encoder encoder.

  • Page 29: Model Code Definition

    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.5 Model code definition (1) Rating plate AC SERVO Model MR-J3-10B Capacity POWER : 100W Applicable power supply INPUT 0.9A 3PH+1PH200-230V 50Hz 3PH+1PH200-230V 60Hz 1.3A 1PH 200-230V 50/60Hz OUTPUT: 170V 0-360Hz 1.1A Rated output current SERIAL : A34230001 Serial number 1 — 8…

  • Page 30
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (2) Model MR-J3-100B or less MR-J3-60B4 100B4 With no regenerative resistor Symbol Description Series Indicates a servo amplifier of 11 to 22kw that does not use a regenerative resistor as standard accessory. Power supply Symbol Power supply Rating plate Rating plate 3-phase or 1-phase 200…
  • Page 31: Combination With Servo Motor

    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.6 Combination with servo motor The following table lists combinations of servo amplifiers and servo motors. The same combinations apply to the models with electromagnetic brakes. Servo motors Servo amplifier HF-SP HF-MP HF-KP HC-RP HC-UP HC-LP 1000r/min 2000r/min MR-J3-10B (1)

  • Page 32: Structure

    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.7 Structure 1.7.1 Parts identification (1) MR-J3-100B or less Detailed Name/Application Explanation Display The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo Chapter 4 status and alarm number. Rotary axis setting switch (SW1) Used to set the axis No. of servo amplifier. Section 3.13 ON 4F Test operation select switch (SW2-1)

  • Page 33
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (2) MR-J3-60B4 MR-J3-100B4 Detailed Name/Application Explanation Display The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo Chapter 4 status and alarm number. Rotary axis setting switch (SW1) Used to set the axis No. of servo amplifier. Section 3.13 ON 4F Test operation select switch (SW2-1) TEST…
  • Page 34
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (3) MR-J3-200B MR-J3-350B Detailed Name/Application Explanation Display The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo Chapter 4 status and alarm number. Rotary axis setting switch (SW1) Used to set the axis No. of servo amplifier. Section 3.13 ON 4F Test operation select switch (SW2-1) TEST…
  • Page 35
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (4) MR-J3-200B4 Detailed Name/Application Explanation Display The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo Chapter 4 status and alarm number. Rotary axis setting switch (SW1) Used to set the axis No. of servo amplifier. Section 3.13 ON 4F Test operation select switch (SW2-1) TEST Used to perform the test operation…
  • Page 36
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (5) MR-J3-350B4 MR-J3-500B(4) POINT The servo amplifier is shown without the front cover. For removal of the front cover, refer to section 1.7.2. Detailed Name/Application Explanation Display The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo Chapter 4 status and alarm number.
  • Page 37
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (6) MR-J3-700B(4) POINT The servo amplifier is shown without the front cover. For removal of the front cover, refer to section 1.7.2. Detailed Name/Application Explanation Display The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo Chapter 4 status and alarm number. Rotary axis setting switch (SW1) Used to set the axis No.
  • Page 38
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (7) MR-J3-11KB(4) to MR-J3-22KB(4) POINT The servo amplifier is shown without the front cover. For removal of the front cover, refer to section 1.7.2. Detailed Name/Application Explanation Display The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo Chapter 4 status and alarm number.
  • Page 39: Removal And Reinstallation Of The

    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.7.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover Before removing or installing the front cover, turn off the power and wait for 15 minutes or more until the charge lamp turns off. Then, confirm that the voltage WARNING between P( ) and N( ) is safe with a voltage tester and others.

  • Page 40
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION Reinstallation of the front cover Front cover setting tab Insert the front cover setting tabs into the sockets of Pull up the cover, supporting at point A) . servo amplifier (2 places). Setting tab Push the setting tabs until they click. 1 — 19…
  • Page 41
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (2) For MR-J3-11KB(4) to MR-J3-22KB(4) Removal of the front cover 1) Press the removing knob on the lower side of the 3) Pull it to remove the front cover. front cover ( A) and B) ) and release the installation hook.
  • Page 42: Configuration Including Auxiliary Equipment

    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.8 Configuration including auxiliary equipment POINT Equipment other than the servo amplifier and servo motor are optional or recommended products. (1) MR-J3-100B or less (a) For 3-phase or 1-phase 200V to 230VAC Personal R S T computer (Note 3) MR Configurator…

  • Page 43
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (b) For 1-phase 100V to 120VAC Personal computer MR Configurator (Note 3) Power supply Servo amplifier No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse Junction terminal block Magnetic (Note 2) contactor (MC) Servo system CN1A controller or Front axis Power factor servo amplifier CN1B improving…
  • Page 44
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (2) MR-J3-60B4 MR-J3-100B4 Personal R S T computer MR Configurator (Note 3) Power supply Servo amplifier No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse Junction terminal Magnetic block contactor (MC) Servo system CN1A (Note 2) controller or Front axis servo amplifier CN1B Line noise CN1B…
  • Page 45
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (3) MR-J3-200B MR-J3-350B R S T (Note 4) Power supply No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse Magnetic contactor (MC) Personal computer MR Configurator (Note 2) (Note 3) Line noise filter (FR-BSF01) Servo amplifier Junction terminal block Servo system CN1A (Note 2) controller or Front axis…
  • Page 46
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (4) MR-J3-200B4 R S T (Note 3) Power supply No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse Magnetic contactor Personal (MC) computer MR Configurator (Note 2) Line noise filter (FR-BSF01) Servo amplifier (Note 2) Power factor improving DC Junction reactor terminal (FR-BEL-H)
  • Page 47
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (5) MR-J3-350B4 MR-J3-500B(4) R S T (Note 3) Power supply Personal computer MR Configurator No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse Servo amplifier Junction terminal Magnetic block contactor (MC) (Note 2) (Note 1) Battery Servo system CN1A MR-J3BAT controller or Front axis Line noise filter servo amplifier CN1B…
  • Page 48
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (6) MR-J3-700B(4) R S T Personal (Note 3) computer Power supply MR Configurator No-fuse breaker Servo amplifier (NFB) or fuse Junction Magnetic terminal contactor block (MC) (Note 2) Servo system Line noise filter CN1A controller or Front axis (FR-BLF) servo amplifier CN1B (Note 1)
  • Page 49
    1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (7) MR-J3-11KB(4) to MR-J3-22KB(4) (Note 3) R S T Power supply Personal computer MR Configurator No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse Servo amplifier Junction Magnetic terminal contactor block (MC) Servo system (Note 2) controller or Front axis (Note 1) CN1A Line noise filter…
  • Page 50: Installation

    Do not install or operate a faulty servo amplifier. When the product has been stored for an extended period of time, consult Mitsubishi. When treating the servo amplifier, be careful about the edged parts such as the corners of the servo amplifier.

  • Page 51
    2. INSTALLATION (b) Installation of two or more servo amplifiers POINT Mounting closely is available for a combination of servo amplifiers of 3.5kW or less in 200V or 100V class. Leave a large clearance between the top of the servo amplifier and the internal surface of the control box, and install a cooling fan to prevent the internal temperature of the control box from exceeding the environmental conditions.
  • Page 52: Keep Out Foreign Materials

    2. INSTALLATION (b) Installation of two or more servo amplifiers Leave a large clearance between the top of the servo amplifier and the internal surface of the control box, and install a cooling fan to prevent the internal temperature of the control box from exceeding the environmental conditions.

  • Page 53: Sscnet Cable Laying

    2. INSTALLATION 2.4 SSCNET cable laying SSCNET cable is made from optical fiber. If optical fiber is added a power such as a major shock, lateral pressure, haul, sudden bending or twist, its inside distorts or breaks, and optical transmission will not be available.

  • Page 54
    2. INSTALLATION (4) Bundle fixing Fix the cable at the closest part to the connector with bundle material in order to prevent SSCNET cable from putting its own weight on CN1A CN1B connector of servo amplifier. Optical cord should be given loose slack to avoid from becoming smaller than the minimum bend radius, and it should not be twisted.
  • Page 55: Inspection Items

    2. INSTALLATION 2.5 Inspection items Before starting maintenance and/or inspection, turn off the power and wait for 15 minutes or more until the charge lamp turns off. Then, confirm that the voltage between P( ) and N( ) is safe with a voltage tester and others. Otherwise, an electric shock may occur.

  • Page 56: Signals And Wiring

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Any person who is involved in wiring should be fully competent to do the work. Before wiring, turn off the power and wait for 15 minutes or more until the charge lamp turns off. Then, confirm that the voltage between P( ) and N( ) is safe with a voltage tester and others.

  • Page 57: Input Power Supply Circuit

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.1 Input power supply circuit Always connect a magnetic contactor (MC) between the main circuit power supply and L and L of the servo amplifier, and configure the wiring to be able to shut down the power supply on the side of the servo amplifier’s power supply. If a magnetic contactor (MC) is not connected, continuous flow of a large current may CAUTION cause a fire when the servo amplifier malfunctions.

  • Page 58
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Note 1. Always connect P . (Factory-wired.) When using the power factor improving DC reactor, refer to section 11.13. 2. Always connect P-D. (Factory-wired.) When using the regenerative option, refer to section 11.2. 3. For the encoder cable, use of the option cable is recommended. Refer to section 11.1 for selection of the cable. 4.
  • Page 59
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (3) For MR-J3-10B1 to MR-J3-40B1 (Note 4) Controller Forced Alarm forced stop stop Servo amplifier Servo motor CNP1 1-phase CNP3 100 to (Note 6) Blank 120VAC Motor (Note 1) CNP2 (Note 2) (Note 3) Encoder Encoder cable 24VDC Forced stop DOCOM…
  • Page 60
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (4) MR-J3-60B4 to MR-J3-200B4 (Note 4) Controller Forced Alarm forced stop stop (Note 7) Stepdown transformer Servo amplifier Servo motor CNP1 3-phase CNP3 (Note 6) 200 to Motor 230VAC (Note 1) CNP2 (Note 2) (Note 3) Encoder Encoder cable 24VDC…
  • Page 61
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (5) MR-J3-500B MR-J3-700B (Note 4) Controller Forced Alarm forced stop stop (Note 7) Power supply of Cooling fan Servo amplifier Servo motor 3-phase (Note 6) Built-in 200 to regenerative Motor 230VAC resistor (Note 2) (Note 3) Encoder Encoder cable (Note 1)
  • Page 62
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (6) MR-J3-350B4 to MR-J3-700B4 (Note 4) Controller Forced Alarm forced stop stop (Note 8) Power supply of Cooling fan (Note 7) Stepdown transformer Servo amplifier Servo motor 3-phase (Note 6) Built-in 380 to regenerative Motor 480VAC resistor (Note 2) (Note 3)
  • Page 63
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (7) MR-J3-11KB to MR-J3-22KB (Note 4) Controller Servo motor Forced Alarm forced stop thermal relay stop Servo amplifier Servo motor Dynamic break (Option) 3-phase 200 to 230VAC (Note 2) (Note 6) (Note 1) Regenerative resistor (Note 3) Encoder Encoder cable (Note 7)
  • Page 64
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (8) MR-J3-11KB4 to MR-J3-22KB4 (Note 4) Controller Servo motor Forced Alarm forced stop thermal relay stop (Note 8) Cooling fan power supply (Note 9) Stepdown transformer Servo amplifier Servo motor Dynamic break (Option) 3-phase 380 to 480VAC (Note 6) (Note 2)
  • Page 65: I/O Signal Connection Example

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.2 I/O signal connection example Servo amplifier (Note10) 24VDC (Note12) (Note12) Power (Note2) (Note14) supply DICOM Magnetic brake interlock DOCOM In-position (Note3,4)Forced stop (Note13,14) Trouble (Note11) (Note15) DICOM Personal USB cable Encoder A-phase pulse (Note5) computer MR-J3USBCBL3M (differential line driver) MR Configurator…

  • Page 66
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Note 1 To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal (terminal marked ) of the servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box. 2. Connect the diode in the correct direction. If it is connected reversely, the servo amplifier will be faulty and will not output signals, disabling the forced stop (EM1) and other protective circuits.
  • Page 67: Explanation Of Power Supply System

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.3 Explanation of power supply system 3.3.1 Signal explanations POINT For the layout of connector and terminal block, refer to outline drawings in chapter 9. Connection Target Abbreviation Description (Application) Supply the following power to L .

  • Page 68: Power-On Sequence

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.3.2 Power-on sequence (1) Power-on procedure 1) Always wire the power supply as shown in above section 3.1 using the magnetic contactor with the main circuit power supply (three-phase: L , single-phase: L ). Configure up an external sequence to switch off the magnetic contactor as soon as an alarm occurs.

  • Page 69: Cnp1, Cnp2, Cnp3 Wiring Method

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.3.3 CNP1, CNP2, CNP3 wiring method POINT Refer to table 11.1 in section 11.11 for the wire sizes used for wiring. MR-J3-500B or more MR-J3-350B4 or more does not have these connectors. Use the supplied servo amplifier power supply connectors for wiring of CNP1, CNP2 and CNP3. (1) MR-J3-10B to MR-J3-100B (a) Servo amplifier power supply connectors (Note)Servo amplifier power supply connectors…

  • Page 70
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (c) The twin type connector for CNP2 (L ): 721-2105/026-000 (WAGO JAPAN) Using this connector enables passing a wire of control circuit power supply. Refer to Appendix 3 for details of connector. Twin type connector for CNP2 CNP2 Power supply Rear axis…
  • Page 71
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (b) Termination of the cables 1) CNP1 CNP3 Solid wire: After the sheath has been stripped, the cable can be used as it is. Sheath Core Twisted wire: Use the cable after stripping the sheath and twisting the core. At this time, take care to avoid a short caused by the loose wires of the core and the adjacent pole.
  • Page 72
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (b) Termination of the cables Solid wire: After the sheath has been stripped, the cable can be used as it is. Sheath Core 8 to 9mm Twisted wire: Use the cable after stripping the sheath and twisting the core. At this time, take care to avoid a short caused by the loose wires of the core and the adjacent pole.
  • Page 73
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (a) When using the supplied cable connection lever 1) The servo amplifier is packed with the cable connection lever. a) 54932-0000 (Molex) [Unit: mm] 20.6 Approx. 4.9 M X J 5 4 9 3 2 Approx.3.4 b) 231-131 (WAGO JAPAN) [Unit: mm] 20.3…
  • Page 74
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 2) Cable connection procedure Cable connection lever 1) Attach the cable connection lever to the housing. (Detachable) 2) Push the cable connection lever in the direction of arrow. 3) Hold down the cable connection lever and insert the cable in the direction of arrow.
  • Page 75
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (b) Inserting the cable into the connector 1) Applicable flat-blade screwdriver dimensions Always use the screwdriver shown here to do the work. [Unit: mm] Approx. R0.3 Approx. 22 Approx. R0.3 2) When using the flat-blade screwdriver — part 1 1) Insert the screwdriver into the square hole.
  • Page 76
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3) When using the flat-blade screwdriver — part 2 1) Insert the screwdriver into the 2) Push the screwdriver in the 3) With the screwdriver pushed, insert the cable in the square window at top of the direction of arrow.
  • Page 77
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (4) How to insert the cable into Phoenix Contact connector POINT Do not use a precision driver because the cable cannot be tightened with enough torque. Insertion of cables into Phoenix Contact connector PC4/6-STF-7.62-CRWH or PC4/3-STF-7.62-CRWH is shown as follows.
  • Page 78: Connectors And Signal Arrangements

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.4 Connectors and signal arrangements POINT The pin configurations of the connectors are as viewed from the cable connector wiring section. (1) Signal arrangement The servo amplifier front view shown is that of the MR-J3-20B or less. Refer to chapter 9 Outline Drawings for the appearances and connector layouts of the other servo amplifiers.

  • Page 79: Signal (Device) Explanations

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.5 Signal (device) explanations For the I/O interfaces (symbols in I/O division column in the table), refer to section 3.7.2. In the control mode field of the table The pin No.s in the connector pin No. column are those in the initial status. (1) Connector applications Connector Name…

  • Page 80
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (b) Output device Connector Device Symbol Function/Application Pin No. division Trouble CN3-15 ALM turns off when power is switched off or the protective circuit is DO-1 activated to shut off the base circuit. Without alarm occurring, ALM turns on within about 1s after power-on. Electromagnetic CN3-13 When using this signal, set operation delay time of the electromagnetic…
  • Page 81
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Connector Device Symbol Function/Application Pin No. division Warning When using this signal, make it usable by the setting of parameter DO-1 No.PD07 to PD09. When warning has occurred, WNG turns on. When there is no warning, WNG turns off within about 1.5s after power-on.
  • Page 82: Alarm Occurrence Timing Chart

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.6 Alarm occurrence timing chart When an alarm has occurred, remove its cause, make sure that the operation signal is not being input, ensure safety, and reset the alarm before restarting CAUTION operation. As soon as an alarm occurs, make the Servo off status and interrupt the main circuit power.

  • Page 83: Interfaces

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.7 Interfaces 3.7.1 Internal connection diagram Servo amplifier Approx Forced stop 5.6k DICOM (Note 3) (Note 2) (Note 1) Approx (Note 3) 5.6k 24VDC DICOM DOCOM <Isolated> Differential line driver output (35mA or less) Analog monitor 10VDC VBUS 10VDC…

  • Page 84: Detailed Description Of Interfaces

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.7.2 Detailed description of interfaces This section provides the details of the I/O signal interfaces (refer to the I/O division in the table) given in section 3.5. Refer to this section and make connection with the external equipment. (1) Digital input interface DI-1 Give a signal with a relay or open collector transistor.

  • Page 85
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (3) Encoder pulse output DO-2 (Differential line driver system) (a) Interface Max. output current: 35mA Servo amplifier Servo amplifier Am26LS32 or equivalent High-speed photocoupler (LB, LZ) (LB, LZ) (LBR, LZR) (LBR, LZR) b) Output pulse Servo motor CCW rotation Time cycle (T) is determined by the settings of parameter No.PA15 and PC03.
  • Page 86: Source I/O Interfaces

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.7.3 Source I/O interfaces In this servo amplifier, source type I/O interfaces can be used. In this case, all DI-1 input signals and DO-1 output signals are of source type. Perform wiring according to the following interfaces. (1) Digital input interface DI-1 Servo amplifier EM1,…

  • Page 87: Treatment Of Cable Shield External Conductor

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.8 Treatment of cable shield external conductor In the case of the CN2 and CN3 connectors, securely connect the shielded external conductor of the cable to the ground plate as shown in this section and fix it to the connector shell. External conductor Sheath Core…

  • Page 88: Sscnet Cable Connection

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.9 SSCNET cable connection POINT Do not see directly the light generated from CN1A CN1B connector of servo amplifier or the end of SSCNET cable. When the light gets into eye, may feel something is wrong for eye. (The light source of SSCNET complies with class1 defined in JIS C6802 or IEC60825-1.) (1) SSCNET cable connection…

  • Page 89
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3) With holding a tab of SSCNET cable connector, make sure to insert it into CN1A CN1B connector of servo amplifier until you hear the click. If the end face of optical code tip is dirty, optical transmission is interrupted and it may cause malfunctions.
  • Page 90: Connection Of Servo Amplifier And Servo Motor

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.10 Connection of servo amplifier and servo motor During power-on, do not open or close the motor power line. Otherwise, a CAUTION malfunction or faulty may occur. 3.10.1 Connection instructions Insulate the connections of the power supply terminals to prevent an electric WARNING shock.

  • Page 91: Power Supply Cable Wiring Diagrams

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.10.2 Power supply cable wiring diagrams (1) HF-MP service HF-KP series HF-KP series servo motor (a) When cable length is 10m or less 10m or less MR-PWS1CBL M-A1-L MR-PWS1CBL M-A2-L MR-PWS1CBL M-A1-H Servo amplifier Servo motor MR-PWS1CBL M-A2-H CNP3 AWG 19(red)

  • Page 92
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (2) HF-SP series HC-RP series HC-UP series HC-LP series servo motor POINT Insert a contact in the direction shown in the figure. If inserted in the wrong direction, the contact is damaged and falls off. Soldered part or Soldered part Pin No.1 Pin No.1…
  • Page 93
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 2) When the power supply connector and the electromagnetic brake connector are shared. 50m or less Servo amplifier Servo motor DC24V DOCOM DICOM Electromagnetic Forced brake interlock Trouble stop (MBR) (ALM) (EM1) 24VDC power supply for (Note) electromagnetic brake…
  • Page 94
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Power supply connector signal allotment Encoder connector signal allotment MS3102A18-10P Power supply connector signal allotment CM10-R10P MS3102A22-22P CE05-2A22-23PD-B CE05-2A32-17PD-B Terminal Terminal Terminal Signal Signal Signal (earth) (earth) View a View b View b (Note) (Note) Note. For the motor with electromagnetic brake, supply…
  • Page 95
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (3) HA-LP series servo motor (a) Wiring diagrams Refer to section 11.11 for the cables used for wiring. 1) 200V class 50m or less Servo amplifier Servo motor 24VDC Cooling fan (Note 2) DOCOM DICOM Electromagnetic Forced brake interlock Trouble…
  • Page 96
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 2) 400V class (Note4) Cooling fan power supply 50m or less Servo amplifier Servo motor 24VDC Cooling fan (Note 2) DOCOM DICOM Electromagnetic Forced brake interlock Trouble stop (MBR) (ALM) (EM1) 24VDC power supply for (Note 1) electromagnetic brake OHS1…
  • Page 97
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (b) Servo motor terminals Encoder connector CM10-R10P Brake connector Terminal box MS3102A10SL-4P Encoder connector signal Terminal Brake connector signal Terminal Signal Signal allotment allotment CM10-R10P MS3102A10SL-4P (Note) (Note) Note. For the motor with electromagnetic brake, supply electromagnetic brake power (24VDC).
  • Page 98
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Terminal box inside (HA-LP801(4), 12K1(4), 11K1M(4), 15K1M(4), 15K2(4), 22K2(4)) Thermal sensor Cooling fan terminal block terminal block (OHS1,OHS2) M4 screw (BU,BV,BW) M4 screw Terminal block signal Motor power supply terminal block arrangement (U,V,W) M8 screw Encoder connector CM10-R10P OHS1OHS2 Earth terminal M6 screw…
  • Page 99
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Terminal box inside (HA-LP25K1) Encoder connector CM10-R10P Thermal sensor terminal block (OHS1, OHS2) M4 screw Motor power supply terminal block (U, V, W) M10 screw Cooling fan terminal block (BU, BV, BW) M4 screw Earth terminal M6 screw Terminal block signal arrangement BW OHS1 OHS2…
  • Page 100
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Signal Name Abbreviation Description Connect to the motor output terminals (U, V, W) of the servo amplifier. During power-on, do Power supply U V W not open or close the motor power line. Otherwise, a malfunction or faulty may occur. Supply power which satisfies the following specifications.
  • Page 101: Servo Motor With Electromagnetic Brake

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.11 Servo motor with electromagnetic brake 3.11.1 Safety precautions Configure the electromagnetic brake circuit so that it is activated not only by the interface unit signals but also by a forced stop (EM1). Contacts must be open when Circuit must be servo-off, when an alarm occurrence opened during…

  • Page 102: Timing Charts

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.11.2 Timing charts (1) Servo-on command (from controller) ON/OFF Tb [ms] after the servo-on is switched off, the servo lock is released and the servo motor coasts. If the electromagnetic brake is made valid in the servo lock status, the brake life may be shorter. Therefore, when using the electromagnetic brake in a vertical lift application or the like, set delay time (Tb) to about the same as the electromagnetic brake operation delay time to prevent a drop.

  • Page 103
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (3) Alarm occurrence Dynamic brake Dynamic brake Electromagnetic brake Servo motor speed Electromagnetic brake (10ms) Base circuit Invalid(ON) Electromagnetic brake Electromagnetic operation delay time brake interlock (MBR) Valid(OFF) Alarm (4) Both main and control circuit power supplies off Dynamic brake Dynamic brake (10ms)
  • Page 104: Wiring Diagrams (Hf-Mp Series Hf-Kp Series Servo Motor)

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.11.3 Wiring diagrams (HF-MP series HF-KP series servo motor) POINT For HF-SP series HC-RP series HC-UP series HC-LP series servo motors, refer to section 3.10.2 (2). (1) When cable length is 10m or less 10m or less 24VDC power MR-BKS1CBL M-A1-L supply for…

  • Page 105: Grounding

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.12 Grounding Ground the servo amplifier and servo motor securely. To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal WARNING (terminal marked ) of the servo amplifier with the protective earth (PE) of the control box.

  • Page 106: Control Axis Selection

    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.13 Control axis selection POINT The control axis number set to rotary axis setting switch (SW1) should be the same as the one set to the servo system controller. Use the rotary axis setting switch (SW1) to set the control axis number for the servo. If the same numbers are set to different control axes in a single communication system, the system will not operate properly.

  • Page 107
    3. SIGNALS AND WIRING MEMO 3 — 52…
  • Page 108: Switching Power On For The First Time

    4. STARTUP 4. STARTUP WARNING Do not operate the switches with wet hands. You may get an electric shock. Before starting operation, check the parameters. Some machines may perform unexpected operation. Take safety measures, e.g. provide covers, to prevent accidental contact of hands and parts (cables, etc.) with the servo amplifier heat sink, regenerative resistor, servo motor, etc.

  • Page 109: Wiring Check

    4. STARTUP 4.1.2 Wiring check (1) Power supply system wiring Before switching on the main circuit and control circuit power supplies, check the following items. (a) Power supply system wiring The power supplied to the power input terminals (L ) of the servo amplifier should satisfy the defined specifications.

  • Page 110: Surrounding Environment

    4. STARTUP 2) When regenerative option is used over 5kW for 200V class and 3.5kW for 400V class The lead of built-in regenerative resistor connected to P terminal and D terminal of TE1 terminal block should not be connected. The generative brake option should be connected to P terminal and C terminal. A twisted cable should be used when wiring is over 5m and under 10m.

  • Page 111: Start Up

    4. STARTUP 4.2 Start up Connect the servo motor with a machine after confirming that the servo motor operates properly alone. (1) Power on When the main and control circuit power supplies are switched on, «b01» (for the first axis) appears on the servo amplifier display.

  • Page 112: Servo Amplifier Display

    4. STARTUP 4.3 Servo amplifier display On the servo amplifier display (three-digit, seven-segment display), check the status of communication with the servo system controller at power-on, check the axis number, and diagnose a fault at occurrence of an alarm. (1) Display sequence Servo amplifier power ON Waiting for servo system controller power to switch ON…

  • Page 113
    4. STARTUP (2) Indication list Indication Status Description Power of the servo amplifier was switched on at the condition that the power of servo system controller is OFF. The axis No. set to the servo system controller does not match the axis No. set with the rotary axis setting switch (SW1) of the servo amplifier.
  • Page 114: Test Operation

    4. STARTUP 4.4 Test operation Before starting actual operation, perform test operation to make sure that the machine operates normally. Refer to section 4.2 for the power on and off methods of the servo amplifier. POINT If necessary, verify controller program by using motorless operation. Refer to section 4.5.2 for the motorless operation.

  • Page 115: Test Operation Mode

    4. STARTUP 4.5 Test operation mode The test operation mode is designed for servo operation confirmation and not for machine operation confirmation. Do not use this mode with the machine. Always CAUTION use the servo motor alone. If an operation fault occurred, use the forced stop (EM1) to make a stop. POINT The content described in this section indicates the environment that servo amplifier and personal computer are directly connected.

  • Page 116
    4. STARTUP (c) Program operation Positioning operation can be performed in two or more operation patterns combined, without using the servo system controller. Use this operation with the forced stop reset. This operation may be used independently of whether the servo is on or off and whether the servo system controller is connected or not.
  • Page 117: Motorless Operation In Controller

    4. STARTUP 4.5.2 Motorless operation in controller POINT Use motor-less operation which is available by making the servo system controller parameter setting. Motorless operation is done while connected with the servo system controller. (1) Motorless operation Without connecting the servo motor, output signals or status displays can be provided in response to the servo system controller commands as if the servo motor is actually running.

  • Page 118: Basic Setting Parameters (No.pa )

    5. PARAMETERS 5. PARAMETERS Never adjust or change the parameter values extremely as it will make operation CAUTION instable. In this servo amplifier, the parameters are classified into the following groups on a function basis. Parameter Group Main Description Basic setting parameters Make basic setting with these parameters.

  • Page 119: Parameter Write Inhibit

    5. PARAMETERS 5.1.2 Parameter write inhibit Parameter Initial Value Unit Setting Range Symbol Name PA19 *BLK Parameter write inhibit 000Bh Refer to the text. POINT This parameter is made valid when power is switched off, then on after setting, or when the controller reset has been performed. In the factory setting, this servo amplifier allows changes to the basic setting parameter, gain/filter parameter and extension setting parameter settings.

  • Page 120: Selection Of Regenerative Option

    5. PARAMETERS 5.1.3 Selection of regenerative option Parameter Initial Value Unit Setting Range Symbol Name PA02 **REG Regenerative option 0000h Refer to the text. POINT This parameter value and switch power off once, then switch it on again to make that parameter setting valid. Wrong setting may cause the regenerative option to burn.

  • Page 121: Using Absolute Position Detection System

    5. PARAMETERS 5.1.4 Using absolute position detection system Parameter Initial Value Unit Setting Range Symbol Name PA03 *ABS Absolute position detection system 0000h Refer to the text. POINT This parameter is made valid when power is switched off, then on after setting, or when the controller reset has been performed.

  • Page 122: Auto Tuning

    5. PARAMETERS 5.1.6 Auto tuning Parameter Initial Value Unit Setting Range Symbol Name PA08 Auto tuning mode 0001h Refer to the text. PA09 Auto tuning response 1 to 32 Make gain adjustment using auto tuning. Refer to section 6.2 for details. (1) Auto tuning mode (parameter No.

  • Page 123: In-Position Range

    5. PARAMETERS (2) Auto tuning response (parameter No. PA09) If the machine hunts or generates large gear sound, decrease the set value. To improve performance, e.g. shorten the settling time, increase the set value. Guideline for Machine Guideline for Machine Setting Response Setting…

  • Page 124: Selection Of Servo Motor Rotation Direction

    5. PARAMETERS 5.1.8 Selection of servo motor rotation direction Parameter Initial Value Unit Setting Range Symbol Name PA14 *POL Rotation direction selection POINT This parameter is made valid when power is switched off, then on after setting, or when the controller reset has been performed. Select servo motor rotation direction relative.

  • Page 125
    5. PARAMETERS (1) For output pulse designation Set » » (initial value) in parameter No. PC03. Set the number of pulses per servo motor revolution. Output pulse set value [pulses/rev] For instance, set «5600» to Parameter No. PA15, the actually output A/B-phase pulses are as indicated below: 5600 A B-phase output pulses…
  • Page 126: Gain/Filter Parameters (No. Pb )

    5. PARAMETERS 5.2 Gain/filter parameters (No. PB POINT Parameter whose symbol is preceded by * is made valid with the following conditions. * : Set the parameter value, switch power off once after setting, and then switch it on again, or perform the controller reset. 5.2.1 Parameter list Symbol Name…

  • Page 127: Detail List

    5. PARAMETERS Symbol Name Initial Value Unit PB42 For manufacturer setting 1125 PB43 0004h PB44 PB45 0000h 5.2.2 Detail list Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PB01 FILT Adaptive tuning mode (adaptive filter ) 0000h Select the setting method for filter tuning. Setting this parameter to » 1″…

  • Page 128
    5. PARAMETERS Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PB02 VRFT Vibration suppression control tuning mode (advanced vibration suppression control) 0000h This parameter cannot be used in the speed control mode. The vibration suppression is valid when the parameter No. PA08 (auto tuning) setting is «…
  • Page 129
    5. PARAMETERS Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PB06 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment times Used to set the ratio of the load inertia moment to the servo motor shaft inertia moment. When auto tuning mode 1 and interpolation mode is selected, the result of auto tuning is 300.0 automatically used.
  • Page 130
    5. PARAMETERS Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PB14 NHQ1 Notch shape selection 1 0000h Refer to Used to selection the machine resonance suppression filter 1. Name function column. Notch depth selection Setting value Depth Gain Deep 40dB 14dB Shallow…
  • Page 131
    5. PARAMETERS Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PB18 Low-pass filter setting 3141 rad/s Set the low-pass filter. Setting parameter No. PB23 (low-pass filter selection) to » » automatically 18000 changes this parameter. When parameter No. PB23 is set to » «, this parameter can be set manually.
  • Page 132
    5. PARAMETERS Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PB26 *CDP Gain changing selection 0000h Refer to Select the gain changing condition. (Refer to section 7.6.) Name function column. Gain changing selection Under any of the following conditions, the gains change on the basis of the parameter No.
  • Page 133
    5. PARAMETERS Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PB34 VRF2B Gain changing vibration suppression control resonance frequency setting 100.0 This parameter cannot be used in the speed control mode. Set the resonance frequency for vibration suppression control when the gain changing is 100.0 valid.
  • Page 134: Extension Setting Parameters (No. Pc )

    5. PARAMETERS 5.3 Extension setting parameters (No. PC POINT Parameter whose symbol is preceded by * is made valid with the following conditions. * : Set the parameter value, switch power off once after setting, and then switch it on again, or perform the controller reset. **: Set the parameter value, switch power off once, and then switch it on again.

  • Page 135: List Of Details

    5. PARAMETERS 5.3.2 List of details Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PC01 Error excessive alarm level (Note 2) This parameter cannot be used in the speed control mode. (Note 1) Set error excessive alarm level with rotation amount of servo motor. Note 1.

  • Page 136
    5. PARAMETERS Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PC06 *COP3 Function selection C-3 0000h Refer to Name Select the error excessive alarm level setting for parameter No.PC01. function column. Error excessive alarm level setting selection 0: 1 [rev]unit 1: 0.1 [rev]unit…
  • Page 137
    5. PARAMETERS Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PC12 Analog monitor 2 offset -999 Used to set the offset voltage of the analog monitor2 (MO2) output. PC13 MOSDL Analog monitor feedback position output standard data Low pulse -9999 Used to set the standard position of feedback output with analog monitor 1 (M01) or 2 (M02).
  • Page 138: Analog Monitor

    5. PARAMETERS 5.3.3 Analog monitor The servo status can be output to two channels in terms of voltage. The servo status can be monitored using an ammeter. (1) Setting Change the following digits of parameter No. PC09, PC10: Parameter No. PC09 0 0 0 Analog monitor (MO1) output selection (Signal output to across MO1-LG)

  • Page 139
    5. PARAMETERS Setting Output item Description Setting Output item Description Droop pulses (Note 1) CCW direction Droop pulses (Note 1) CCW direction 10[V] 10[V] ( 10V/100 pulses) ( 10V/1000 pulses) 100[pulse] 1000[pulse] 100[pulse] 1000[pulse] -10[V] -10[V] CW direction CW direction Droop pulses CCW direction Droop pulses…
  • Page 140: Alarm History Clear

    5. PARAMETERS (3) Analog monitor block diagram Speed Current Droop pulse command command Bus voltage Speed Position Differ- command Current encoder command ential Position Current Speed Servo Motor received control control control from a controller Encoder Current feedback Differ- ential Position feedback Position feedback data returned to…

  • Page 141: I/O Setting Parameters (No. Pd )

    5. PARAMETERS 5.4 I/O setting parameters (No. PD POINT Parameter whose symbol is preceded by * is made valid with the following conditions. * : Set the parameter value, switch power off once after setting, and then switch it on again, or perform the controller reset. 5.4.1 Parameter list Symbol Name…

  • Page 142: List Of Details

    5. PARAMETERS 5.4.2 List of details Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PD01 For manufacturer setting 0000h Do not change this value by any means. PD02 0000h PD03 0000h PD04 0000h PD05 0000h PD06 0000h PD07 *DO1 Output signal device selection 1 (CN3-13) 0005h Refer to…

  • Page 143
    5. PARAMETERS Initial Setting Symbol Name and Function Unit Value Range PD10 For manufacturer setting 0000h Do not change this value by any means. PD11 0004h PD12 0000h PD13 0000h PD14 *DOP3 Function selection D-3 0000h Refer to Set the ALM output signal at warning occurrence. Name function column.
  • Page 144: Different Adjustment Methods

    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 6.1 Different adjustment methods 6.1.1 Adjustment on a single servo amplifier The gain adjustment in this section can be made on a single servo amplifier. For gain adjustment, first execute auto tuning mode 1. If you are not satisfied with the results, execute auto tuning mode 2 and manual mode in this order.

  • Page 145: Adjustment Using Mr Configurator

    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT (2) Adjustment sequence and mode usage START Usage Used when you want to Interpolation made for 2 or more match the position gain (PG1) axes? between 2 or more axes. Interpolation mode Normally not used for other purposes.

  • Page 146: Auto Tuning Mode

    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 6.2 Auto tuning 6.2.1 Auto tuning mode The servo amplifier has a real-time auto tuning function which estimates the machine characteristic (load inertia moment ratio) in real time and automatically sets the optimum gains according to that value. This function permits ease of gain adjustment of the servo amplifier.

  • Page 147: Auto Tuning Mode Operation

    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 6.2.2 Auto tuning mode operation The block diagram of real-time auto tuning is shown below. Load inertia Automatic setting moment Encoder Loop gains Command Current Servo PG1,VG1 control motor PG2,VG2,VIC Current feedback Real-time auto Position/speed Set 0 or 1 to turn on. tuning section feedback Load inertia…

  • Page 148: Adjustment Procedure By Auto Tuning

    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 6.2.3 Adjustment procedure by auto tuning Since auto tuning is made valid before shipment from the factory, simply running the servo motor automatically sets the optimum gains that match the machine. Merely changing the response level setting value as required completes the adjustment.

  • Page 149: Response Level Setting In Auto Tuning Mode

    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 6.2.4 Response level setting in auto tuning mode Set the response (The first digit of parameter No. PA09) of the whole servo system. As the response level setting is increased, the track ability and settling time for a command decreases, but a too high response level will generate vibration.

  • Page 150: Manual Mode 1 (Simple Manual Adjustment)

    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 6.3 Manual mode 1 (simple manual adjustment) If you are not satisfied with the adjustment of auto tuning, you can make simple manual adjustment with three parameters. POINT If machine resonance occurs, filter tuning mode (parameter No. PB01) or machine resonance suppression filter (parameter No.

  • Page 151
    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT (c)Adjustment description 1) Speed loop gain (parameter No. PB09) This parameter determines the response level of the speed control loop. Increasing this value enhances response but a too high value will make the mechanical system liable to vibrate. The actual response frequency of the speed loop is as indicated in the following expression: Speed loop gain setting Speed loop response…
  • Page 152
    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT (2) For position control (a) Parameters The following parameters are used for gain adjustment: Parameter No. Abbreviation Name PB06 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment PB07 Model loop gain PB08 Position loop gain PB09 Speed loop gain PB10…
  • Page 153
    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT (c) Adjustment description 1) Speed loop gain (VG2: parameter No. PB09) This parameter determines the response level of the speed control loop. Increasing this value enhances response but a too high value will make the mechanical system liable to vibrate. The actual response frequency of the speed loop is as indicated in the following expression: Speed loop gain 2 setting Speed loop response…
  • Page 154: Interpolation Mode

    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 6.4 Interpolation mode The interpolation mode is used to match the position loop gains of the axes when performing the interpolation operation of servo motors of two or more axes for an X-Y table or the like. In this mode, the model loop gain and speed loop gain which determine command track ability are set manually and the other parameter for gain adjustment are set automatically.

  • Page 155: Differences Between Melservo-J2-Super And Melservo-J3 In Auto Tuning

    6. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 6.5 Differences between MELSERVO-J2-Super and MELSERVO-J3 in auto tuning To meet higher response demands, the MELSERVO-J3 series has been changed in response level setting range from the MELSERVO-J2S-Super series. The following table lists comparison of the response level setting.

  • Page 156: Adaptive Filter

    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS POINT The functions given in this chapter need not be used generally. Use them if you are not satisfied with the machine status after making adjustment in the methods in chapter 7. If a mechanical system has a natural resonance point, increasing the servo system response level may cause the mechanical system to produce resonance (vibration or unusual noise) at that resonance frequency.

  • Page 157
    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (2) Parameters The operation of adaptive tuning mode (parameter No. PB01). Parameter No.60 0 0 0 Filter tuning mode selection Setting Filter adjustment mode Automatically set parameter Filter OFF (Note) Parameter No. PB13 Filter tuning mode Parameter No.
  • Page 158
    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (3) Adaptive tuning mode procedure Adaptive tuning adjustment Operation Is the target response reached? Increase the response setting. Has vibration or unusual noise occurred? Execute or re-execute adaptive tuning. (Set parameter No. PB01 to «0001».) Tuning ends automatically after the If assumption fails after tuning is executed at predetermined period of time.
  • Page 159: Machine Resonance Suppression Filter

    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS POINT «Filter OFF» enables a return to the factory-set initial value. When adaptive tuning is executed, vibration sound increases as an excitation signal is forcibly applied for several seconds. When adaptive tuning is executed, machine resonance is detected for a maximum of 10 seconds and a filter is generated.

  • Page 160
    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (2) Parameters (a) Machine resonance suppression filter 1 (parameter No. PB13, PB14) Set the notch frequency, notch depth and notch width of the machine resonance suppression filter 1 (parameter No. PB13, PB14) When you have made adaptive filter tuning mode (parameter No. PB01) «manual mode», set up the machine resonance suppression filter 1 becomes effective.
  • Page 161: Advanced Vibration Suppression Control

    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 7.4 Advanced vibration suppression control (1) Operation Vibration suppression control is used to further suppress machine end vibration, such as workpiece end vibration and base shake. The motor side operation is adjusted for positioning so that the machine does not shake.

  • Page 162
    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (3) Vibration suppression control tuning mode procedure Vibration suppression control tuning adjustment Operation Is the target response reached? Increase the response setting. Has vibration of workpiece end/device increased? Stop operation. Execute or re-execute vibration suppression control tuning. (Set parameter No.
  • Page 163
    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (4) Vibration suppression control manual mode Measure work end vibration and device shake with the machine analyzer or external measuring instrument, and set the vibration suppression control vibration frequency (parameter No. PB19) and vibration suppression control resonance frequency (parameter No. PB20) to set vibration suppression control manually.
  • Page 164
    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS POINT When machine end vibration does not show up in motor end vibration, the setting of the motor end vibration frequency does not produce an effect. When the anti-resonance frequency and resonance frequency can be confirmed using the machine analyzer or external FFT device, do not set the same value but set different values to improve the vibration suppression performance.
  • Page 165: Low-Pass Filter

    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 7.5 Low-pass filter (1) Function When a ballscrew or the like is used, resonance of high frequency may occur as the response level of the servo system is increased. To prevent this, the low-pass filter is factory-set to be valid for a torque command.

  • Page 166: Function Block Diagram

    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 7.6.2 Function block diagram The valid loop gains PG2, VG2, VIC and GD2 of the actual loop are changed according to the conditions selected by gain changing selection CDP (parameter No. PB26) and gain changing condition CDS (parameter No.

  • Page 167: Parameters

    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 7.6.3 Parameters When using the gain changing function, always set » 3″ in parameter No. PA08 (auto tuning) to choose the manual mode of the gain adjustment modes. The gain changing function cannot be used in the auto tuning mode.

  • Page 168
    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (1) Parameters No. PB06 to PB10 These parameters are the same as in ordinary manual adjustment. Gain changing allows the values of ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment, position loop gain, speed loop gain and speed integral compensation to be changed.
  • Page 169: Gain Changing Operation

    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 7.6.4 Gain changing operation This operation will be described by way of setting examples. (1) When you choose changing by external input (a) Setting Parameter No. Abbreviation Name Setting Unit PB07 Model loop gain rad/s Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor PB06 times inertia moment…

  • Page 170
    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (2) When you choose changing by droop pulses (a) Setting Parameter No. Abbreviation Name Setting Unit PB07 Model loop gain rad/s Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor PB06 times inertia moment PB08 Position loop gain rad/s PB09 Speed loop gain…
  • Page 171
    7. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS MEMO 7 — 16…
  • Page 172: Troubleshooting

    8. TROUBLESHOOTING 8. TROUBLESHOOTING POINT As soon as an alarm occurs, make the Servo off status and interrupt the main circuit power. If an alarm/warning has occurred, refer to this chapter and remove its cause. 8.1 Alarms and warning list When a fault occurs during operation, the corresponding alarm or warning is displayed.

  • Page 173: Remedies For Alarms

    8. TROUBLESHOOTING 8.2 Remedies for alarms When any alarm has occurred, eliminate its cause, ensure safety, then reset the alarm, and restart operation. Otherwise, injury may occur. If an absolute position erase (25) occurred, always make home position setting CAUTION again.

  • Page 174: Troubleshooting

    8. TROUBLESHOOTING Display Name Definition Cause Action Memory error 1 RAM, memory fault Faulty parts in the servo amplifier Change the servo amplifier. (RAM) Checking method Clock error Printed board fault Alarm (any of 12 and 13) occurs if power is switched on after disconnection of all cables but the control circuit power supply cables.

  • Page 175
    8. TROUBLESHOOTING Display Name Definition Cause Action Regenerative Permissible 1. Wrong setting of parameter No. Set correctly. error regenerative power PA02 of the built-in 2. Built-in regenerative resistor or Connect correctly regenerative resistor regenerative option is not or regenerative connected. option is exceeded.
  • Page 176
    8. TROUBLESHOOTING Display Name Definition Cause Action Overvoltage The following shows 1. Regenerative option is not used. Use the regenerative option. the input value of 2. Though the regenerative option is Set correctly. used, the parameter No.PA02 converter bus setting is » 00 (not used)».
  • Page 177
    8. TROUBLESHOOTING Display Name Definition Cause Action Parameter error Parameter setting is 1. Servo amplifier fault caused the Change the servo amplifier. wrong. parameter setting to be rewritten. 2. There is a parameter whose value Change the parameter value to within the was set to outside the setting range setting range.
  • Page 178
    8. TROUBLESHOOTING Display Name Definition Cause Action Overload 2 Machine collision or 1. Machine struck something. 1. Review operation pattern. the like caused max. 2. Install limit switches. For the time of the 2. Wrong connection of servo motor. Connect correctly. alarm occurrence, Servo amplifier’s output terminals U, refer to the section…
  • Page 179: Remedies For Warnings

    8. TROUBLESHOOTING Display Name Definition Cause Action (Note) Watchdog CPU, parts faulty Fault of parts in servo amplifier Change servo amplifier. Checking method Alarm (888) occurs if power is switched on after disconnection of all cables but the control circuit power supply cable.

  • Page 180
    8. TROUBLESHOOTING Display Name Definition Cause Action Absolute position Absolute position encoder 1. Noise entered the encoder. Take noise suppression counter warning pulses faulty. measures. 2. Encoder faulty. Change servo motor. The multi-revolution 3. The movement amount from the home Make home position setting counter value of the position exceeded a 32767 rotation or…
  • Page 181
    8. TROUBLESHOOTING MEMO 8 — 10…
  • Page 182: Outline Drawings

    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS 9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS 9.1 Servo amplifier (1) MR-J3-10B MR-J3-20B MR-J3-10B1 MR-J3-20B1 [Unit: mm] 6 mounting hole Approx.80 (Note) CNP1 (Note) CNP2 CNP3 Approx. Approx.68 25.5 With MR-J3BAT Note. This data applies to the 3-phase or 1-phase 200 to 230VAC power supply models. For a single-phase, 100 to 120VAC power supply, refer to the terminal signal layout.

  • Page 183
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS (2) MR-J3-40B MR-J3-60B MR-J3-40B1 [Unit: mm] 6 mounting hole Approx.80 (Note) CNP1 (Note) CNP2 CNP3 CHARGE Approx. Approx.68 25.5 With MR-J3BAT Note. This data applies to the 3-phase or 1-phase 200 to 230VAC power supply models. For a single-phase, 100 to 120VAC power supply, refer to the terminal signal layout. Mass: 1.0 [kg] (2.21 [lb]) Terminal signal layout Mounting screw…
  • Page 184
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS (3) MR-J3-70B MR-J3-100B [Unit: mm] 6 mounting hole Approx.80 CNP1 CNP2 CNP3 Cooling fan wind direction Approx.68 Approx.25.5 With MR-J3BAT Mass: 1.4 [kg] (3.09 [lb]) Terminal signal layout Mounting screw Screw size: M5 Tightening torque: 3.24 [N m] (28.7 [lb in]) PE terminal Approx.
  • Page 185
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS (4) MR-J3-60B4 MR-J3-100B4 [Unit: mm] Approx. 80 6mounting hole CNP1 CNP2 CNP3 12 42 Approx. 68 Approx. 25.5 With MR-J3BAT Mass: 1.7 [kg] (3.75 [lb]) Mounting screw Terminal signal layout Screw size: M5 Tightening torque: 3.24 [N m] (28.7 [lb in]) PE terminal Approx.
  • Page 186
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS (5) MR-J3-200B MR-J3-350B [Unit: mm] 6 mounting hole Approx.80 21.4 Cooling fan Approx. wind direction 25.5 Approx.68 With MR-J3BAT Mass: 2.3 [kg] (5.07 [lb]) Mounting screw Terminal signal layout Screw size: M5 Tightening torque: 3.24 [N m] (28.7 [lb in]) PE terminal Approx.
  • Page 187
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS (6) MR-J3-200B4 [Unit: mm] 6mounting hole Approx. 80 CNP1 CNP2 CNP3 Approx. Cooling fan 25.5 wind direction Approx. 68 With MR-J3BAT Mass: 2.1 [kg] (4.63 [lb]) Mounting screw Terminal signal layout Screw size: M5 Tightening torque: 3.24 [N m] (28.7 [lb in] PE terminal Approx.
  • Page 188
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS (7) MR-J3-350B4 MR-J3-500B(4) [Unit: mm] Approx. 80 2- 6 mounting hole 131.5 68.5 Cooling fan Terminal layout wind direction (Terminal cover open) Cooling fan With MR-J3BAT CHARGE 20.5 3 places for ground (M4) Built-in regenerative resistor lead terminal fixing screw Mass: 4.6 [kg] (10.1 [lb]) Terminal signal layout…
  • Page 189
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS (8) MR-J3-700B(4) [Unit: mm] Approx.80 2- 6 mounting hole Cooling fan Terminal layout wind direction (Terminal cover open) Cooling fan With MR-J3BAT CHARGE 20.5 3 places for ground (M4) Built-in regenerative resistor lead terminal fixing screw Mass: 6.2 [kg] (13.7[lb]) Terminal signal layout Mounting screw Screw size: M5…
  • Page 190
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS (9) MR-J3-11KB(4) to 22KB(4) [Unit: mm] Approx. 80 Cooling fan 12mounting hole wind direction With MR-J3BAT Rating plate 123.5 6 26 Approx. 260 Approx. 12 Approx. 12 236 0.5 4-M10 screw Servo amplifier Mass[kg]([lb]) MR-J3-11KB(4) 18.0 (40) MR-J3-15KB(4) 18.0 (40) MR-J3-22KB(4)
  • Page 191
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS 9.2 Connector (1) CN1A CN1B connector [Unit: mm] F0-PF2D103 F0-PF2D103-S 17.6 17.6 20.9 20.9 (2) Miniature delta ribbon (MDR) system (3M) (a) One-touch lock type [Unit: mm] Logo etc, are indicated here. 12.7 Each type of dimension Connector Shell kit 10120-3000PE…
  • Page 192
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS (b) Jack screw M2.6 type This is not available as option. [Unit: mm] Logo etc, are indicated here. 12.7 Each type of dimension Connector Shell kit 10120-3000PE 10320-52F0-008 22.0 33.3 14.0 10.0 12.0 27.4 (3) SCR connector system (3M) Receptacle : 36210-0100PL Shell kit : 36310-3200-008…
  • Page 193
    9. OUTLINE DRAWINGS MEMO 9 — 12…
  • Page 194: Characteristics

    10. CHARACTERISTICS 10. CHARACTERISTICS 10.1 Overload protection characteristics An electronic thermal relay is built in the servo amplifier to protect the servo motor and servo amplifier from overloads. Overload 1 alarm (50) occurs if overload operation performed is above the electronic thermal relay protection curve shown in any of Figs 10.1.

  • Page 195
    10. CHARACTERISTICS 10000 1000 During operation During servo lock (Note) Load ratio [%] MR-J3-11KB(4) to MR-J3-22KB(4) Note. If operation that generates torque more than 100% of the rating is performed with an abnormally high frequency in a servo motor stop status (servo lock status) or in a 30r/min or less low-speed operation status, the servo amplifier may fail even when the electronic thermal relay protection is not activated.
  • Page 196: Power Supply Equipment Capacity And Generated Loss

    10. CHARACTERISTICS 10.2 Power supply equipment capacity and generated loss (1) Amount of heat generated by the servo amplifier Table 10.1 indicates servo amplifiers’ power supply capacities and losses generated under rated load. For thermal design of an enclosure, use the values in Table 10.1 in consideration for the worst operating conditions.

  • Page 197
    10. CHARACTERISTICS (Note 1) (Note 2) Area required for Servo amplifier Servo motor Power supply Servo amplifier-generated heat[W] heat dissipation capacity[kVA] At rated torque With servo off HF-SP702 (4) 10.0 HA-LP702 10.6 MR-J3-700B (4) HA-LP601 (4) 10.0 HA-LP701M (4) 11.0 HC-LP11K2 (4) 16.0 11.0…
  • Page 198
    10. CHARACTERISTICS (2) Heat dissipation area for enclosed servo amplifier The enclosed control box (hereafter called the control box) which will contain the servo amplifier should be designed to ensure that its temperature rise is within 10 at the ambient temperature of 40 . (With a 5 (41 ) safety margin, the system should operate within a maximum 55 (131 ) limit.) The necessary enclosure heat dissipation area can be calculated by Equation 10.1:…
  • Page 199: Dynamic Brake Characteristics

    10. CHARACTERISTICS 10.3 Dynamic brake characteristics 10.3.1 Dynamic brake operation (1) Calculation of coasting distance Fig. 10.3 shows the pattern in which the servo motor comes to a stop when the dynamic brake is operated. Use Equation 10.2 to calculate an approximate coasting distance to a stop. The dynamic brake time constant varies with the servo motor and machine operation speeds.

  • Page 200
    10. CHARACTERISTICS 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 1000 1500 2000 Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] HF-SP1000r/min series HF-SP2000r/min series 22K1M 20K1 11K1M 12K1 15K1 15K1M 701M 25K1 800 1000 1200 1000 1500 2000 Speed[r/min] Speed[r/min] HA-LP1000r/min series HA-LP1500r/min series 15K2 11K2 22K2 1000…
  • Page 201: The Dynamic Brake At The Load Inertia Moment

    If there is a possibility that the load inertia moment may exceed the value, contact Mitsubishi. The values of the load inertia moment ratio in the table are the values at the maximum rotation speed of the servo motor.

  • Page 202: Cable Flexing Life

    10. CHARACTERISTICS Servo motor Servo HA-LP amplifier HF-SP 4 HA-LP 14 HA-LP 24 MR-J3-60B4 5 (Note 1) MR-J3-100B4 5 (Note 1) MR-J3-200B4 MR-J3-350B4 5 (Note 1) MR-J3-500B4 5 (Note 1) MR-J3-700B4 5 (Note 1) MR-J3-11KB4 (Note 2) MR-J3-15KB4 (Note 2) MR-J3-22KB4 (Note 2) Note 1.

  • Page 203: Inrush Currents At Power-On Of Main Circuit And Control Circuit

    10. CHARACTERISTICS 10.5 Inrush currents at power-on of main circuit and control circuit The following table indicates the inrush currents (reference data) that will flow when the maximum permissible voltage (200V class: 253VAC, 400V class: 528VAC) is applied at the power supply capacity of 2500kVA and the wiring length of 1m (3.28ft).

  • Page 204: Cable/Connector Sets

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Before connecting any option or peripheral equipment, turn off the power and wait for 15 minutes or more until the charge lamp turns off. Then, confirm that the WARNING voltage between P( ) and N( ) is safe with a voltage tester and others. Otherwise, an electric shock may occur.

  • Page 205: Combinations Of Cable/Connector Sets

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.1.1 Combinations of cable/connector sets Servo system Cont Personal computer 32)33)34) Servo amplifier Servo amplifier 1)2) Note CNP1 CN1A CN1A 32)33)34) CNP2 CN1B CN1B CNP3 (Servo amplifier attachment) Direct connection type (cable length 10m or less, IP65) 15)16)17)18) Junction type (cable length more than 10m, IP20) 21)22)

  • Page 206
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT From previous page a) From previous page b) 24)25) Servo motor 30)39)40) HC-RP HC-UP HC-LP Power supply Encoder Brake connector connector connector 24)25) Servo motor HA-LP Terminal box Product Model Description Application 1) Servo Supplied with amplifier servo power supply…
  • Page 207
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Product Model Description Application 2) Servo Supplied with amplifier servo power supply amplifiers of connector 2kW and 3.5kW in 200V CNP1 connector: CNP2 connector: CNP3 connector: class PC4/6-STF-7.62- 54927-0510 PC4/3-STF-7.62- CRWH (Molex) CRWH (Phoenix Contact) (Phoenix Contact) <Applicable cable example>…
  • Page 208
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Product Model Description Application 9) Motor brake MR-BKS1CBL M-A1-L IP65 Brake connector cable Cable length: 2 5 10m Load side lead 10) Motor brake MR-BKS1CBL M-A1-H IP65 HF-MP series cable Cable length: 2 5 10m Load side lead HF-KP series Long flex life…
  • Page 209
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Product Model Description Application 21) Encoder MR-EKCBL IP20 cable Cable length: 20 30m 22) Encoder MR-EKCBL IP20 cable Cable length: Long flex life For HF-MP HF-KP series 20 30 40 50m Refer to section 11.1.2 (2) for details. 23) Encoder MR-ECNM IP20…
  • Page 210
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Product Model Description Application 32) SSCNET MR-J3BUS M Connector: PF-2D103 Connector: PF-2D103 Inside panel cable Cable length: 0.15 to 3m (Japan Aviation Electronics (Japan Aviation Electronics standard cord (Refer to section 11.1.5.) Industry, Ltd.) Industry, Ltd.) 33) SSCNET MR-J3BUS M-A Outside panel…
  • Page 211: Encoder Cable/Connector Sets

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.1.2 Encoder cable/connector sets (1) MR-J3ENCBL M-A1-L/H MR-J3ENCBL M-A2-L/H These cables are encoder cables for the HF-MP HF-KP series servo motors. The numerals in the Cable Length field of the table are the symbols entered in the part of the cable model.

  • Page 212
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) Cable internal wiring diagram MR-J3ENCBL2M-L/-H MR-J3ENCBL5M-L/-H MR-J3ENCBL10M-L/-H Encoder side Servo amplifier connector side connector Plate (2) MR-EKCBL M-L/H POINT The following encoder cables are of four-wire type. When using any of these encoder cables, set parameter No. PC04 to «1 «…
  • Page 213
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (a) Connection of servo amplifier and servo motor Servo amplifier MR-EKCBL M-L MR-J3JCBL03M-L MR-EKCBL M-H Cable length: 0.3m Servo motor HF-MP HF-KP Cable Model 1) For CN2 Connector 2) For Encoder Connector MR-EKCBL Connector set: 54599-1019(Molex) Housing: 1-172161-9 Receptacle: 36210-0100PL Crimping pin: 170359-1…
  • Page 214
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) Internal wiring diagram MR-EKCBL20M-L MR-EKCBL30M-L Servo amplifier side Encoder side Servo amplifier side Encoder side Plate (Note) CONT Plate (Note) MR-EKCBL20M-H MR-EKCBL30M-H MR-EKCBL40M-H Servo amplifier side Encoder side MR-EKCBL50M-H Servo amplifier side Encoder side Plate (Note) CONT…
  • Page 215
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (c) When fabricating the encoder cable When fabricating the cable, prepare the following parts and tool, and fabricate it according to the wiring diagram in (b). Refer to section 11.8 for the specifications of the used cable. Parts/Tool Description Connector set…
  • Page 216
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (a) Connection of servo amplifier and servo motor MR-J3JCBL03M-A1-L Servo amplifier Servo motor HF-MP HF-KP MR-EKCBL M-L/-H MR-J3JCBL03M-A2-L Servo motor HF-MP HF-KP Cable Model 1) Junction Connector 2) For Encoder Connector MR-J3JCBL03M-A1-L Housing: 1-172169-9 Connector: 1674320-1 Contact: 1473226-1 Crimping tool for ground clip: 1596970-1 Cable clamp: 316454-1…
  • Page 217
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (4) MR-J3ENSCBL M-L MR-J3ENSCBL These cables are detector cables for HF-SP Series servomotors. The number in the cable length column of the table indicates the symbol filling the square in the cable model. Cable lengths corresponding to the specified symbols are prepared.
  • Page 218
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) Internal wiring diagram MR-J3ENSCBL2M-L/H MR-J3ENSCBL20M-L MR-J3ENSCBL20M-H MR-J3ENSCBL5M-L/H MR-J3ENSCBL30M-L MR-J3ENSCBL30M-H MR-J3ENSCBL40M-H MR-J3ENSCBL10M-L/H Encoder side Servo amplifier MR-J3ENSCBL50M-H connector side connector Encoder side Servo amplifier Encoder side Servo amplifier connector side connector connector side connector Plate Plate Plate (c) When fabricating the encoder cable…
  • Page 219
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (5) MR-J3BTCBL03M This cable is a battery connection cable. Use this cable to retain the current position even if the detector cable is disconnected from the servo amplifier. Cable Cable Model Application Length MR-J3BTCBL03M 0.3m For HF-MP HF-KP HF-SP servo motor (a) Connection of servo amplifier and servo motor Servo amplifier…
  • Page 220: Motor Power Supply Cables

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.1.3 Motor power supply cables These cables are motor power supply cables for the HF-MP HF-KP series servo motors. The numerals in the Cable Length field of the table are the symbols entered in the part of the cable model.

  • Page 221: Motor Brake Cables

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.1.4 Motor brake cables These cables are motor brake cables for the HF-MP HF-KP series servo motors. The numerals in the Cable Length field of the table are the symbols entered in the part of the cable model. The cables of the lengths with the symbols are available.

  • Page 222: Sscnet Cable

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.1.5 SSCNET cable POINT Do not see directly the light generated from CN1A CN1B connector of servo amplifier or the end of SSCNET cable. When the light gets into eye, you may feel something is wrong for eye. (The light source of SSCNET complies with class1 defined in JIS C6802 or IEC60825-1.) (1) Model explanations Numeral in the column of cable length on the table is a symbol put in the…

  • Page 223
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (3) Outline drawings (a) MR-J3BUS015M [Unit: mm] (6.7) (15) (13.4) Protective tube (37.65) (20.9) (b) MR-J3BUS03M to MR-J3BUS3M Refer to the table shown in (1) of this section for cable length (L). [Unit: mm] Protective tube (Note) (100) (100)
  • Page 224: Regenerative Options

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.2 Regenerative options The specified combinations of regenerative options and servo amplifiers may only CAUTION be used. Otherwise, a fire may occur. (1) Combination and regenerative power The power values in the table are resistor-generated powers and not rated powers. Regenerative power[W] Built-in (Note 1)

  • Page 225
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (2) Selection of the regenerative option Use the following method when regeneration occurs continuously in vertical motion applications or when it is desired to make an in-depth selection of the regenerative option: (a) Regenerative energy calculation Use the following table to calculate the regenerative energy.
  • Page 226
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) Losses of servo motor and servo amplifier in regenerative mode The following table lists the efficiencies and other data of the servo motor and servo amplifier in the regenerative mode. Servo amplifier Inverse efficiency[%] Capacitor charging[J] Servo amplifier Inverse efficiency[%]…
  • Page 227
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT The following are setting values for regenerative resistor and regenerative brake option which are used with a servo amplifier of 11k to 22kW. Setting Regenerative resistor, regenerative brake option value Standard supplied regenerative resistor Standard supplied regenerative resistor (with a cooling fan to cool it) MR-RB5E MR-RB5E (with a cooling fan to cool it)
  • Page 228
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (a) MR-J3-350B or less MR-J3-200B4 or less Always remove the wiring from across P-D and fit the regenerative option across P-C. The G3 and G4 terminals act as a thermal sensor. G3-G4 is disconnected when the regenerative option overheats abnormally.
  • Page 229
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) MR-J3-350B4 MR-J3-500B(4) MR-J3-700B(4) Always remove the wiring (across P-C) of the servo amplifier built-in regenerative resistor and fit the regenerative option across P-C. The G3 and G4 terminals act as a thermal sensor. G3-G4 is opened when the regenerative option overheats abnormally.
  • Page 230
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT The drawing below shows the MR-J3-350B4 MR-J3-500B(4). Refer to section 9.1 (6) outline drawings for the position of the fixing screw for MR-J3-700B(4). Built-in regenerative resistor lead terminal fixing screw For the MR-RB51, MR-RB3G-4, MR-RB5G-4, MR-RB34-4 or MR-RB54-4 install the cooling fan as shown.
  • Page 231
    The detection level of the thermal sensor varies according to the settings of the resistor. Set the thermal sensor in the most appropriate position on your design basis or use the thermal sensor built-in regenerative option (MR- RB5E, 9P, 9F, 6B-4, 60-4 and 6K-4) provided by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Regenerative…
  • Page 232
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (d) MR-J3-11KB(4)-PX to MR-J3-22KB(4)-PX (when using the regenerative option) The MR-J3-11KB(4)-PX to MR-J3-22KB(4)-PX servo amplifiers are not supplied with regenerative resistors. When using any of these servo amplifiers, always use the MR-RB5E, 9P, 9F, 6B-4, 60-4 and 6K-4 regenerative option.
  • Page 233
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (5) Outline drawing (a) MR-RB032 MR-RB12 [Unit: mm (in)] Terminal block 6 mounting hole Terminal screw: M3 Tightening torque: 0.5 to 0.6 [N m] MR-RB (4.43 to 5.31 [lb in]) Mounting screw Screw size: M5 Tightening torque: 3.2 [N m] (28.32 [lb in]) Approx.
  • Page 234: Options

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) MR-RB30 MR-RB31 MR-RB32 MR-RB34-4 MR-RB3M-4 MR-RB3G-4 [Unit: mm (in)] Terminal block Cooling fan mounting screw (2-M4 screw) Terminal screw: M4 Tightening torque: 1.2 [N m] (10.62 [lb in]) Mounting screw 101.5 82.5 Screw size: M6 Tightening torque: 5.4 [N m] (47.79 [lb in]) Variable Wind blows in the…

  • Page 235
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (d) MR-RB5E MR-RB9P MR-RB9F MR-RB6B-4 MR-RB60-4 MR-RB6K-4 [Unit: mm (in)] Terminal block 2- 10 mounting hole Terminal screw: M5 Tightening torque: 2.0 [N m] (17.70 [lb in]) Mounting screw Screw size: M8 Tightening torque: 13.2 [N m] (116.83 [lb in]) Regenerative Mass option…
  • Page 236
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (f) MR-RB1H-4 [Unit: mm (in)] Terminal screw: M3 Tightening torque: 0.5 to 0.6 [N m] (4.43 to 5.31 [lb in]) 6 mounting hole Mounting screw Screw size: M5 Tightening torque: 3.24 [N m] (28.32 [lb in]) Regenerative Mass [kg] ([lb]) option…
  • Page 237: Fr-Bu2-(H) Brake Unit

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.3 FR-BU2-(H) Brake unit POINT Use a 200V class brake unit and a resistor unit with a 200V class servo amplifier, and a 400V class brake unit and a resistor unit with a 400V class servo amplifier.

  • Page 238: Selection

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.3.1 Selection Use a combination of servo amplifier, brake unit and resistor unit listed below. Number of Permissible Total Applicable servo Brake unit Resistor unit connected continuous resistance amplifier units power [kW] 200V FR-BU2-15K FR-BR-15K 0.99 MR-J3-500B (Note) class…

  • Page 239: Connection Example

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.3.3 Connection example POINT Connecting PR terminal of the brake unit to P terminal of the servo amplifier results in brake unit malfunction. Always connect the PR terminal of the brake unit to the PR terminal of the resistor unit. (1) Combination with FR-BR-(H) resistor unit (a) When connecting a brake unit to a servo amplifier (Note 8)

  • Page 240
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) When connecting two brake units to a servo amplifier POINT To use brake units with a parallel connection, use two sets of FR-BU2 brake unit. Combination with other brake unit results in alarm occurrence or malfunction.
  • Page 241
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (Note 7) Servo motor Controller thermal relay forced stop Servo amplifier (Note 1) Power DOCOM supply DC24V FR-BR DICOM (Note 5) (Note 3) FR-BU2-(H) (Note 11) (Note 10) (Note 4) (Note 8) (Note 6) (Note 9) Terminal block (Note 2)
  • Page 242
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (2) Combination with MT-BR5-(H) resistor unit Servo motor Controller thermal relay forced stop (Note 4) Servo amplifier (Note 1) Power DOCOM supply 24VDC MT-BR5-(H) DICOM (Note 5) FR-BU2-(H) (Note 9) (Note 2) P( ) (Note 3) (Note 7) N( ) (Note 6)
  • Page 243
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (3) Precautions for wiring The cables between the servo amplifier and the brake unit, and between the resistor unit and the brake unit should be as short as possible. Always twist the cable longer than 5m (twist five times or more per one meter).
  • Page 244
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 2) Control circuit terminal POINT Undertightening can cause a cable disconnection or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to damage to the screw or the brake unit. Sheath SD SD Core Jumper Terminal block Wire the stripped cable after twisting to prevent the cable…
  • Page 245
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (5) Crimping terminals for P and N terminals of servo amplifier (a) Recommended crimping terminals POINT Always use recommended crimping terminals or equivalent since some crimping terminals cannot be installed depending on the size. Number of (Note 1) Servo amplifier Brake unit…
  • Page 246: Outline Dimension Drawings

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.3.4 Outline dimension drawings (1) FR-BU2- (H) brake unit [Unit: mm] FR-BU2-15K 5 hole (Screw size: M4) Rating plate 18.5 132.5 FR-BU2-30K FR-BU2-H30K 2- 5 hole (Screw size: M4) Rating plate 18.5 129.5 FR-BU2-55K FR-BU2-H55K, H75K 2- 5 hole (Screw size: M4) Rating…

  • Page 247
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (2) FR-BR- (H) resistor unit [Unit: mm] 2 | C (Note) Control circuit (Note) terminal Main circuit terminal (35) (35) W1 1 For FR-BR-55K/FR-BR-H55K, a hanging bolt is placed on two locations (Indicated below). Hanging bolt Note.
  • Page 248: Power Regeneration Converter

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.4 Power regeneration converter When using the power regeneration converter, set » 01″ in parameter No.PA02. (1) Selection The converters can continuously return 75% of the nominal regenerative power. They are applied to the servo amplifiers of the 5k to 22kW. Nominal Power regeneration Regenerative…

  • Page 249
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (2) Connection example Servo amplifier Power factor improving reactor FR-BAL-(H) (Note 6) Power supply 24VDC Forced stop DOCOM DOCOM DICOM Trouble(Note 3) (Note 2) 5m or less (Note 4) (Note 5) Ready output Alarm output R R X (Note 1) Phase detection…
  • Page 250
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (3) Outside dimensions of the power regeneration converters [Unit : mm] Mounting foot (removable) 2- D hole Mounting foot movable Rating plate Display panel Front cover window Cooling fan Heat generation area outside mounting dimension Power Approx.
  • Page 251: Power Regeneration Common Converter

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.5 Power regeneration common converter POINT Use the FR-CV for the servo amplifier of 200V class and the FR-CV-H for that of 400V class. For details of the power regeneration common converter FR-CV-(H), refer to the FR-CV-(H) Installation Guide (IB(NA)0600075).

  • Page 252
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT The following table lists the restrictions. FR-CV- Item 7.5K Maximum number of connected servo amplifiers Total of connectable servo amplifier capacities [kW] 3.75 18.5 27.5 Total of connectable servo motor rated currents [A] Maximum servo amplifier capacity [kW] FR-CV-H Item Maximum number of connected servo amplifiers…
  • Page 253
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (3) Connection diagram (a) 200V class FR-CVL FR-CV Servo amplifier Servo motor R2/L R2/L 3-phase S2/L 200 to S2/L Thermal 230VAC T2/L (Note 7) relay T2/L OHS2 (Note 6) (Note 2) OHS1 (Note 1) (Note 5) T/MC1 DOCOM RESET…
  • Page 254
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) 400V class FR-CVL FR-CV-H Servo amplifier Servo motor R2/L R2/L 3-phase S2/L 380 to S2/L Thermal 480VAC T2/L (Note 7) relay T2/L (Note 6) OHS2 P( ) N( ) (Note 2) OHS1 (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 8) Stepdown…
  • Page 255
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (4) Wires used for wiring (a) Wire sizes 1) Across P-P( ), N-N( ) The following table indicates the connection wire sizes of the DC power supply (P( ), N( terminals) between the FR-CV and servo amplifier. The used wires are based on the 600V vinyl wires.
  • Page 256
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) Example of selecting the wire sizes When connecting multiple servo amplifiers, always use junction terminals for wiring the servo amplifier terminals P, N. Also, connect the servo amplifiers in the order of larger to smaller capacities. 1) 200V class Wire as short as possible.
  • Page 257
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 2) 400V class Wire as short as possible. Servo amplifier (15kW) FR-CV-H55K 22mm 22mm First unit: P/L+ R2/L 22mm assuming that the total of servo amplifier S2/L N/L- capacities is 30kW since 15kW + 7kW + 3.5kW + 2.0kW = 27.5kW.
  • Page 258
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (6) Specifications Power regeneration common converter FR-CV- 7.5K Item Total of connectable servo amplifier capacities [kW] 3.75 18.5 27.5 Maximum servo amplifier capacity [kW] Total of connectable servo motor rated currents Short-time Output Total capacity of applicable servo motors, 300% torque, 60s (Note1) Regenerative rating braking torque…
  • Page 259: External Dynamic Brake

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.6 External dynamic brake POINT Configure up a sequence which switches off the contact of the brake unit after (or as soon as) it has turned off the servo on signal at a power failure or failure.

  • Page 260
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (2) Connection example Operation-ready Servo amplifier Servo motor (Note 4) (Note 5) Power supply DICOM (Note 3) (Note 2) DICOM DOCOM (Note 1) Plate 13 U (Note 6) External dynamic brake Note 1. Terminals 13, 14 are normally open contact outputs. If the dynamic brake is seized, terminals 13, 14 will open. Therefore, configure up an external sequence to prevent servo-on.
  • Page 261
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Coasting Coasting Servo motor rotation Dynamic brake Dynamic brake Present Alarm Absent Base Invalid Dynamic brake Valid Short Forced stop (EM1) Open a. Timing chart at alarm occurrence b. Timing chart at forced stop (EM1) validity Coasting Dynamic brake Electro magnetic…
  • Page 262
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (3) Outline dimension drawing (a) DBU-11K DBU-15K DBU-22K [Unit: mm] Terminal block 13 14 (GND) Screw : M4 Screw : M3.5 Tightening torque: 1.2 [N m](10.6 [lb in]) Tightening torque: 0.8 [N m](7 [lb in]) Mass Connection Dynamic brake…
  • Page 263
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) DBU-11K-4 DBU-22K-4 [Unit: mm] 2- 7mounting hole 73.75 Mass: 6.7[kg] Terminal block Screw: M3.5 Screw: M4 Tightening torque: 0.8[N m](7[lb in]) Tightening torque: 1.2[N m](10.6[lb in]) Wire [mm Dynamic brake U V W DBU-11K DBU-15K, 22K 11 — 60…
  • Page 264: Junction Terminal Block Ps7Dw-20V14B-F (Recommended)

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.7 Junction terminal block PS7DW-20V14B-F (recommended) (1) How to use the junction terminal block Always use the junction terminal block (PS7W-20V14B-F(YOSHIDA ELECTRIC INDUSTRY)) with the option cable (MR-J2HBUS M) as a set. A connection example is shown below: Servo amplifier Cable clamp Junction terminal block…

  • Page 265
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (3) Outline drawings of junction terminal block [Unit : mm] 44.11 7.62 TB.E M3 5L 1.42 M3 6L 11 — 62…
  • Page 266: Mr Configurator

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.8 MR Configurator The MR Configurator (MRZJW3-SETUP221E) uses the communication function of the servo amplifier to perform parameter setting changes, graph display, test operation, etc. on a personal computer. (1) Specifications Item Description The following table shows MR Configurator software version for each servo amplifier. Compatible servo amplifier (Drive unit) Version 100V class 200V class…

  • Page 267: Battery Mr-J3Bat

    The year and month of manufacture are indicated by the last one digit of the year and 1 to 9, X(10), Y(11), Z(12). For October 2004, the Serial No. is like, «SERIAL «. MELSERVO MR-J3BAT 3.6V,2000mAh SERIAL MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN The year and month of manufacture 11 — 64…

  • Page 268: Heat Sink Outside Mounting Attachment (Mr-J3Acn)

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.10 Heat sink outside mounting attachment (MR-J3ACN) Use the heat sink outside mounting attachment to mount the heat generation area of the servo amplifier in the outside of the control box to dissipate servo amplifier-generated heat to the outside of the box and reduce the amount of heat generated in the box, thereby allowing a compact control box to be designed.

  • Page 269
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (3) Fitting method Attachment Punched hole Servo amplifier Servo Fit using the Control box amplifier assembling screws. Attachment a. Assembling the heat sink outside mounting attachment b. Installation to the control box (4) Outline dimension drawing Panel Servo amplifier…
  • Page 270: Recommended Wires

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.11 Recommended wires POINT Refer to section 11.1.5 for SSCNET cable. (1) Wires for power supply wiring The following diagram shows the wires used for wiring. Use the wires given in this section or equivalent. 1) Main circuit power supply lead 3) Motor power supply lead Servo amplifier…

  • Page 271
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Table 11.1 Recommended wires Wires [mm Servo amplifer 2) L 4) P C 5) B1 B2 U V W BU BV BW OHS1 OHS2 MR-J3-10B(1) MR-J3-20B(1) MR-J3-40B(1) 1.25(AWG16) MR-J3-60B 2(AWG14) 1.25(AWG16) 2(AWG14) MR-J3-70B MR-J3-100B 2(AWG14) MR-J3-200B MR-J3-350B 3.5(AWG12)
  • Page 272
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Table 11.2 Recommended crimping terminals Servo amplifier side crimping terminals (Note 2) Applicable tool Symbol Crimping Manufacturer Body Head Dice terminal FVD5.5-4 YNT-1210S (Note 1)b 8-4NS YHT-8S FVD14-6 DH-112 DH122 YF-1 E-4 YNE-38 FVD22-6 DH-113 DH123 YPT-60-21 (Note 1)e 38-6 TD-112 TD-124…
  • Page 273
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (2) Wires for cables When fabricating a cable, use the wire models given in the following table or equivalent: Table 11.3 Wires for option cables Characteristics of one core (Note 3) Insulation Length Core size Number Conductor Type…
  • Page 274: No-Fuse Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.12 No-fuse breakers, fuses, magnetic contactors Always use one no-fuse breaker and one magnetic contactor with one servo amplifier. When using a fuse instead of the no-fuse breaker, use the one having the specifications given in this section. No-fuse breaker Fuse Magnetic…

  • Page 275
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Rating plate Terminal box — screw size G Rating plate (Note 1)Terminal cover Screw size G Servo amplifier FR-BEL-(H) Servo amplifier FR-BEL-(H) (Note 2) (Note 3) (Note 2) 5m or less 5m or less A or less B or less L notch A or less…
  • Page 276: Power Factor Improving Ac Reactors

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.14 Power factor improving AC reactors The power factor improving AC reactors improve the phase factor by increasing the form factor of servo amplifier’s input current. It can reduce the power capacity. The input power factor is improved to be about 90%. For use with a 1-phase power supply, it may be slightly lower than 90%.

  • Page 277: Relays (Recommended)

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Dimensions [mm] Mounting Terminal Mass Servo amplifier Model screw size screw size [kg (lb)] 10B1 FR-BAL-0.4K MR-J3-10B M3.5 2.0 (4.41) -2.5 FR-BAL-0.75K MR-J3-40B 20B1 M3.5 2.8 (6.17) -2.5 40B1 FR-BAL-1.5K MR-J3-60B M3.5 3.7 (8.16) -2.5 FR-BAL-2.2K MR-J3-100B M3.5…

  • Page 278: Surge Absorbers (Recommended)

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.16 Surge absorbers (recommended) A surge absorber is required for the electromagnetic brake. Use the following surge absorber or equivalent. When using the surge absorber, perform insulation beforehand to prevent short-circuit. Maximum rating Static capacity Maximum Varistor voltage (reference…

  • Page 279
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (c) Techniques for noises radiated by the servo amplifier that cause peripheral devices to malfunction Noises produced by the servo amplifier are classified into those radiated from the cables connected to the servo amplifier and its main circuits (input and output circuits), those induced electromagnetically or statically by the signal cables of the peripheral devices located near the main circuit cables, and those transmitted through the power supply cables.
  • Page 280
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Noise transmission route Suppression techniques When measuring instruments, receivers, sensors, etc. which handle weak signals and may malfunction due to noise and/or their signal cables are contained in a control box together with the servo amplifier or run near the servo amplifier, such devices may malfunction due to noises transmitted through the air.
  • Page 281
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) Surge suppressor The recommended surge suppressor for installation to an AC relay, AC valve, AC electromagnetic brake or the like near the servo amplifier is shown below. Use this product or equivalent. Relay Surge suppressor Surge suppressor This distance should be short Surge suppressor…
  • Page 282
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Outline drawing [Unit: mm] Earth plate Clamp section diagram 2- 5 hole 17.5 installation hole L or less (Note)M4 screw Note. Screw hole for grounding. Connect it to the earth plate of the control box. Type Accessory fittings Clamp fitting…
  • Page 283: Line Noise Filter (Fr-Blf)

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (d) Line noise filter (FR-BSF01, FR-BLF) This filter is effective in suppressing noises radiated from the power supply side and output side of the servo amplifier and also in suppressing high-frequency leakage current (zero-phase current) especially within 0.5MHz to 5MHz band.

  • Page 284
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (f) Varistors for input power supply (Recommended) Varistors are effective to prevent exogenous noise and lightning surge from entering the servo amplifier. When using a varistor, connect it between each phase of the input power supply of the equipment. For varistors, the TND20V-431K, TND20V-471K and TND20V-102K, manufactured by NIPPON CHEMI- CON, are recommended.
  • Page 285: Leakage Current Breaker

    Make the input and output cables as short as possible, and also make the grounding cable as long as possible (about 30cm) to minimize leakage currents. Rated sensitivity current 10 {Ig1 Ign Iga K (Ig2 Igm)} [mA] (11.1) K: Constant considering the harmonic contents Cable Leakage current breaker Mitsubishi Type Noise products filter NV-SP Servo…

  • Page 286
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Table 11.4 Servo motor’s leakage current example (Igm) Table 11.5 Servo amplifier’s leakage current example (Iga) Servo motor power Leakage current Servo amplifier capacity Leakage current [kW] [mA] [kW] [mA] 0.05 to 1 0.1 to 0.6 0.75 to 3.5 (Note) 0.15 11 15…
  • Page 287: Emc Filter (Recommended)

    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 11.19 EMC filter (recommended) For compliance with the EMC directive of the EN Standard, it is recommended to use the following filter: Some EMC filters are large in leakage current. (1) Combination with the servo amplifier Recommended filter (Soshin Electric) Servo amplifier Mass [kg]([lb])

  • Page 288
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (3) Outline drawing (a) EMC filter HF3010A-UN [Unit: mm] 3-M4 4-5.5 7 3-M4 Approx.41 HF3030A-UN HF-3040A-UN Dimensions [mm] Model HF3030A-UN R3.25, length HF3040A-UN 11 — 85…
  • Page 289
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT HF3100A-UN 2- 6.5 2-6.5 380 1 400 5 TF3005C-TX TX3020C-TX TF3030C-TX [Unit: mm] 3-M4 6-R3.25 length8 3 M4 Approx.67.5 100 1 100 1 290 2 150 2 308 5 Approx.160 332 5 170 5 11 — 86…
  • Page 290
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT TF3040C-TX TF3060C-TX [Unit: mm] 3-M6 3-M6 Dimensions [mm] Model R3.25 TF3040C-TX Approx.190 Approx.91.5 length 8 TF3060C-TX (M6) 11 — 87…
  • Page 291
    11. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) Surge protector RAV-781BYZ-2 [Unit: mm] Black Black Black UL-1015AWG16 41 1.0 RAV-781BXZ-4 [Unit: mm] UL-1015AWG16 41 1.0 11 — 88…
  • Page 292: Features

    12. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM 12. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM If an absolute position erase alarm (25) or absolute position counter warning (E3) CAUTION has occurred, always perform home position setting again. Not doing so can cause runaway. 12.1 Features For normal operation, as shown below, the encoder consists of a detector designed to detect a position within one revolution and a cumulative revolution counter designed to detect the number of revolutions.

  • Page 293: Specifications

    12. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM 12.2 Specifications POINT Replace the battery with only the control circuit power ON. Removal of the battery with the control circuit power OFF will erase the absolute position data. (1) Specification list Item Description System Electronic battery backup system 1 piece of lithium battery ( primary battery, nominal 3.6V)

  • Page 294: Battery Installation Procedure

    12. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM 12.3 Battery installation procedure Before installing a battery, turn off the main circuit power while keeping the control circuit power on. Wait for 15 minutes or more (20 minutes or for drive unit 30kW or more) until the charge lamp turns off.

  • Page 295
    12. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM (2) For MR-J3-500B or more MR-J3-350B4 or more Insert connector into CN4. 12 — 4…
  • Page 296: Confirmation Of Absolute Position Detection Data

    12. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM 12.4 Confirmation of absolute position detection data You can confirm the absolute position data with MR Configurator. Choose «Diagnostics» and «Absolute Encoder Data» to open the absolute position data display screen. (1) Choosing «Diagnostics» in the menu opens the sub-menu as shown below: (2) By choosing «Absolute Encoder Data»…

  • Page 297
    12. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM MEMO 12 — 6…
  • Page 298: Functions And Menus

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) This chapter explains the MELSERVO-J3-B series AC servo featuring a large capacity of 200V (30k to 37kW)/400V (30k to 55kW). Explanation made in this chapter is exclusively for the MR-J3-CR (4) converter units and the MR-J3-DU B(4) drive units.

  • Page 299: Function Block Diagram

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.1.1 Function block diagram The function block diagram of this servo is shown below. Power factor Regenerative improving DC option Converter Diode Thyristor stak Power supply CHARGE Regenerative lamp Cooling fan Control power supply…

  • Page 300
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (Note) Power supply Drive unit Servo motor Current detector Cooling fan Control power supply Base amplifier Over Current current detection Encoder Cooling fan Virtual Position command encoder input Model position Model speed control control…
  • Page 301: Packing List

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.1.2 Packing list Unpack the product and check the rating plate to see if the converter unit, drive unit and servo motor are as you ordered. (1) Converter unit POINT Regenerative resistor and power factor improving DC reactors are option.

  • Page 302: Standard Specifications

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.1.3 Standard specifications (1) Converter unit Model MR-J3-CR55K MR-J3-CR55K4 Item Voltage/frequency 3-phase 200 to 230VAC, 50/60Hz 3-phase 380 to 480VAC, 50/60Hz Permissible voltage Main circuit power 3-phase 170 to 253VAC 3-phase 323 to 528VAC fluctuation supply…

  • Page 303
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) Drive unit (a) 200V class Model MR-J3-DU30KB MR-J3-DU37KB Item Voltage/frequency 1-phase 200 to 230VAC, 50/60Hz Permissible voltage 1-phase 170 to 253VAC Control power fluctuation supply Permissible frequency Within 5% fluctuation Power consumption Main circuit power supply…
  • Page 304
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (b) 400V class Model MR-J3-DU30KB4 MR-J3-DU37KB4 MR-J3-DU45KB4 MR-J3-DU55KB4 Item Voltage/frequency 1-phase 380 to 480VAC, 50/60Hz Permissible voltage 1-phase 323 to 528VAC Control power fluctuation supply Permissible frequency Within 5% fluctuation Power consumption Main circuit power supply The main circuit power of the drive unit is supplied by the converter unit.
  • Page 305: Model Definition

    POWER Applicable power supply INPUT : AC200V-230V 50/60Hz Rated output current OUTPUT SERIAL : A5******* Serial number PASSED MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN (2) Model (a) Converter unit Power supply Series Symbol Power supply None 3-phase 200 to 230VAC 3-phase 380 to 480VAC Indicates converter unit.

  • Page 306: Combinations Of Converter Units, Drive Unit And Servo Motors

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.1.5 Combinations of converter units, drive unit and servo motors The following tables indicate the combinations of the converter units, drive unit and servo motors. These servo motors may not be connected depending on the production time of the drive unit. Please refer to app 5. (1) 200V class Servo motor Converter unit…

  • Page 307: Parts Identification

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.1.6 Parts identification (1) Converter unit (MR-J3-CR55K(4)) POINT The servo amplifier is shown without the front cover. For removal of the front cover, refer to section 13.1.7. Detailed Name/Application Explanation Magnetic contactor control connector (CNP1) Connect to the operation coil of the magnetic contactor.

  • Page 308
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) Drive unit (MR-J3-DU30KB4 MR-J3-DU37KB4) POINT The servo amplifier is shown with the front cover opened. For removal of the front cover, refer to section 13.1.7. Detailed Name/Application Explanation Display Chapter 4 The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo status and alarm number.
  • Page 309
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (3) Drive unit (MR-J3-DU30KB MR-J3-DU37KB MR-J3-DU45KB4 MR-J3-DU55KB4) POINT This servo amplifier is shown without the front cover. For removal of the front cover, refer to section 13.1.7. Detailed Name/Application Explanation Display The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo Chapter 4…
  • Page 310: Removal And Reinstallation Of The Terminal Block Cover

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.1.7 Removal and reinstallation of the terminal block cover Before removing or installing the front cover, turn off the power and wait for 20 minutes or more until the charge lamp turns off. Then, confirm that the voltage between L and L is safe with a voltage tester and others.

  • Page 311
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (b) How to reinstall the terminal block cover 1) Put the terminal block cover on and match the screw holes of the cover fit with those of the main unit. 2) Install the installing screws into the screw holes (A), B), C), D)).
  • Page 312
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) MR-J3-DU30KB4 or MR-J3-DU37KB4 (a) Upper terminal block cover 1) How to open Pull up the cover using the axis A), A)’ as a support. When pulled up to the top, the cover is fixed. 13 — 15…
  • Page 313
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 2) How to close Close the cover using the axis A), A)’ as a support. Setting tab Press the cover against the terminal box until the installing knobs click. Setting tab 13 — 16…
  • Page 314
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (b) Lower terminal block cover 1) How to open Hold the bottom of the terminal block cover with both hands. Pull up the cover using the axis B), B)’ as a support.
  • Page 315
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 2) How to close Hold the bottom of the terminal block cover with both hands. Setting tab Setting tab Close the cover using the axis B), B)’ as a support. Press the cover against the terminal box until the installing knobs click.
  • Page 316: Servo System With Auxiliary Equipment

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.1.8 Servo system with auxiliary equipment R S T 3-phase AC power supply Personal MR Configurator computer No-fuse breaker(NFB) The MR Configurator is required for parameter setting. Converter unit Communication cable Magnetic contactor(MC)

  • Page 317: Installation

    Do not install or operate a faulty converter unit drive unit. When the product has been stored for an extended period of time, consult Mitsubishi. When treating the converter unit drive unit, be careful about the edged parts such as the corners of the converter unit drive unit.

  • Page 318: Installation Direction And Clearances

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.2.1 Installation direction and clearances Install the equipment in the specified direction. Not doing so can cause a failure. Leave the specified clearances between the converter unit/drive unit and the CAUTION control box inside walls or other equipment.

  • Page 319: Inspection

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.2.2 Inspection Before starting maintenance and/or inspection, turn off the power and wait for 20 minutes or more until the charge lamp turns off. Then, confirm that the voltage WARNING between L and L is safe with a voltage tester and others.

  • Page 320: Signals And Wiring

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.3 Signals and wiring Any person who is involved in wiring should be fully competent to do the work. Before wiring, turn off the power and wait for 20 minutes or more until the charge lamp turns off.

  • Page 321: Magnetic Contactor Control Connector (Cnp1)

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) POINT Explanations on the following item are the same as those for servo amplifiers with 22kW or less. Refer to the section below for details. I/O signal connection example Refer to section 3.2. Signal (device) explanations Refer to section 3.5.

  • Page 322
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (1) Enabling control function of magnetic contactor (parameter No.PA02 1 (initial value)) Connecting the magnetic contactor control connector (CNP1) to the operating coil of the magnetic contactor enables to control the magnetic contactor. Converter unit Power supply Control circuit…
  • Page 323: Input Power Supply Circuit

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.3.2 Input power supply circuit Insulate the connections of the power supply terminals. Not doing so can cause an electric shock. WARNING Magnetic contactor wiring connector on the converter unit CNP1. Unattached state may cause an electric shock.

  • Page 324
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (1) When magnetic contactor control connector (CNP1) is made valid (factory-set) POINT The converter unit controls the main circuit magnetic contactor. Refer to section 13.3.7 (1) for the power circuit timing chart, section 13.3.7 (2) for the alarm occurrence timing chart, section 13.3.7 (3) for the forced stop (EM1) timing chart.
  • Page 325
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (b) 400V class (MR-J3-DU30KB4 to MR-J3-DU55KB4) (Note 5) Power supply Converter unit Drive unit TE2-2 TE2-1 Dynamic Dynamic brake CN40 CN40A brake (Option) (Option) MR-J3CDL05M cable CN40B Termination 3-phase Servo motor connector 380 to 480VAC MR-J3-TM…
  • Page 326
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) When magnetic contactor control connector (CNP1) is made invalid POINT The converter unit controls the main circuit magnetic contactor. When making CNP1 invalid, set «0000» in parameter No.PA02. (Refer to section 13.5.) Always connect a protection coordination cable (MR-J3CDL05M) and a termination connector (MR-J3-TM).
  • Page 327
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (b) 400V class (MR-J3-DU30KB4 to MR-J3-DU55KB4) (Note 6) Power supply Converter unit Drive unit TE2-2 TE2-1 Dynamic brake CN40 CN40A (Option) MR-J3CDL05M cable CN40B Termination 3-phase Servo motor connector 380 to 480VAC MR-J3-TM 50/60Hz (Option)
  • Page 328: Terminal

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.3.3 Terminal Refer to section 13.7 for the terminal block arrangement and signal layout. (1) Converter unit Connection Target (Note) Description Abbreviation (Application) Terminal Block MR-J3-CR55K MR-J3-CR55K4 Connect 3-phase 200 to Connect 3-phase 380 to Main circuit power supply TE1-1…

  • Page 329: How To Use The Connection Bars

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.3.4 How to use the connection bars Make sure to use the supplied connection conductors and connect the L and L of the drive unit to those of the converter unit as shown below. Never use connection conductors other than the ones supplied with the drive unit.

  • Page 330: Connectors And Signal Arrangements

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.3.5 Connectors and signal arrangements POINT The pin configurations of the connectors are as viewed from the cable connector wiring section. (1) Converter unit CN1 (Digital I/O connector) CN6 Leave this open. Model: 17JE-23090-02 (D8A) K11-CG (D-sub 9 pin or equivalent) CN40 Connect to CN40A of the…

  • Page 331
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) Drive unit The drive unit front view shown is that of the MR-J3-DU30KB4, MR-J3-DU37KB4 or less. Refer to section 13.7 Outline Drawings for the appearances and connector layouts of the MR-J3-DU30KB, MR-J3-DU37KB, MR-J3-DU45KB4, MR-J3-DU55KB4.
  • Page 332: Converter Unit Signal (Device) Explanations

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.3.6 Converter unit signal (device) explanations POINT Explanations on the drive unit signals are the same as those for servo amplifiers with 22kW or less. Refer to section 3.5. (1) Signals For the I/O interfaces (symbols in I/O column in the table), refer to (b) of this section.

  • Page 333
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) I/O interfaces (a) Digital input interface (DI) Give a signal with a relay or open collector transistor. Refer to section 3.7.3 for the source input. Converter unit For transistor 5.6k Approx.
  • Page 334: Timing Chart

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.3.7 Timing chart (1) Power circuit timing chart Power-on procedure (a) Always wire the power supply as shown in above section 13.3.2 using the magnetic contactor with the main circuit power supply (3-phase: L ).

  • Page 335
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 3) When controlling magnetic contactor by external sequence When an alarm occurs, turn OFF the magnetic contactor by the external sequence and shut off the main circuit power supply. Drive unit control power supply Converter unit control power supply…
  • Page 336
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) Alarm occurrence timing chart When an alarm has occurred, remove its cause, make sure that the operation signal is not being input, ensure safety, and reset the alarm before restarting CAUTION operation.
  • Page 337
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 2) Drive unit When an alarm occurs on the drive unit, the base circuit is shut off and the servo motor coasts. When using a dynamic brake (option), the dynamic brake is activated to stop the servo motor. To deactivate the alarm, power the control circuit off, then on, turn the reset (RES) on or CPU reset command.
  • Page 338
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (b) When controlling magnetic contactor by external sequence 1) Converter unit When an alarm occurs on the converter unit, the servo-on turns OFF; however, the main circuit power supply is not shut off. Therefore, shut off the main circuit power supply by the external sequence. After cancelling the alarm on the converter unit (when an alarm is also occurring on the drive unit after cancelling the alarm on the drive unit as well), turning ON the reset command enables to operate again.
  • Page 339
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 2) Drive unit When an alarm occurs in the drive unit, the drive unit turns into the servo off but the main circuit power supply is not shut off. Therefore, shut off the main circuit power supply using the external sequence.
  • Page 340
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (3) Forced stop (EM1) ON/OFF timing chart (a) When control function of magnetic controller is enabled 1) Converter unit When the forced stop is made valid in the converter unit, the magnetic contactor is turned off and the main circuit power supply is shut off.
  • Page 341
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (b) Forced stop in the drive unit When the forced stop is made valid in the drive unit, the drive unit in operation stops, Main circuit off warning (E9) appears, and then the drive unit is forcedly stopped. Configure to activate the forced stop of the drive unit as the forced stop of the converter unit is activated, and to activate the forced stop of the converter unit as the forced stop of the drive unit is activated.
  • Page 342: Servo Motor Side Details

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.3.8 Servo motor side details Encoder connector signal arrangement Terminal box Encoder connector CM10-R10P CM10-R10P Terminal Signal HA-LP30K1 HA-LP37K2 HA-LP45K1M4 HA-LP37K1 HA-LP25K14 HA-LP50K1M4 HA-LP30K1M4 HA-LP30K24 HA-LP30K1M HA-LP30K14 HA-LP45K24 HA-LP37K24 HA-LP37K1M HA-LP37K14 HA-LP55K24 HA-LP30K2…

  • Page 343
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Signal name Abbreviation Description Connect to the motor power terminals (U, V, W) of the drive unit. During power-on, do not Servo motor U V W open or close the motor power line. power supply Otherwise, a malfunction or faulty may occur.
  • Page 344: Display Section And Operation Section Of The Converter Unit

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.4 Display section and operation section of the converter unit 13.4.1 Display flowchart Use the display (3-dight, 7-segment LED) on the front panel of the converter unit for status display, parameter setting, etc.

  • Page 345
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.4.2 Status display mode The servo status during operation is shown on the 3-digit, 7-segment LED display. Press the «UP» or «DOWN» button to change display data as desired. When the required data is selected, the corresponding symbol is displayed. Press the «SET» button to display that data.
  • Page 346
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.4.3 Diagnostic mode (1) Diagnostic list Name Display Unit Not ready. Initializing. An alarm occurred. External forced stop status. Sequence Bus voltage is not established. Ready Indicates that the servo was switched on after completion of initialization and the drive unit is ready to operate.
  • Page 347
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (b) Display definition The 7-segment LED segments and CN1 connector pins correspond as shown below. CN1-7: Forced stop (EM1) Input signals Output signals CN1-8: CN-2: Warning (WNG) Trouble (ALM) Lit: ON Extinguished: OFF The LED segment corresponding to the pin is lit to indicate ON, and is extinguished to indicate OFF.
  • Page 348
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.4.4 Alarm mode The current alarm, parameter error and point table error are displayed. The lower 2 digits on the display indicate the alarm number that has occurred or the parameter number in error. Display example are shown below.
  • Page 349: Parameter Mode

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Functions at occurrence of an alarm (1) Any mode screen displays the current alarm. (2) The other screen is visible during occurrence of an alarm. At this time, the decimal point in the third digit flickers.

  • Page 350: Parameters For Converter Unit

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.5. Parameters for converter unit Never adjust or change the parameter values extremely as it will make operation CAUTION instable. POINT Refer to chapter 5 for parameters for drive unit. Parameter whose symbol is preceded by * is made valid with the following conditions.

  • Page 351: List Of Details

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.5.2 List of details Initial Setting Symbol Name and function Unit value range PA01 *REG Regenerative option 0000h Refer to Used to select the regenerative option. Name function column. Select the regenerative option. 00: No used 01: MR-RB139 Only for MR-J3-CR55K…

  • Page 352: Troubleshooting

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Initial Setting Symbol Name and function Unit value range PA12 *DIF Input filter setting 0002h Refer to Select the input filter. Name function column. Input signal filter If external input signal causes chattering due to noise, etc., input filter is used to suppress it.

  • Page 353
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) Remedies for alarms When any alarm has occurred, eliminate its cause, ensure safety, then reset the CAUTION alarm, and restart operation. Otherwise, injury may occur. POINT When any of the following alarms has occurred, always remove its cause and allow about 30 minutes for cooling before resuming operation.
  • Page 354
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Display Name Definition Cause Action A.30 Regenerative Permissible regenerative 1. Wrong setting of parameter No. Set correctly. error power of regenerative PA01 option is exceeded. 2. Regenerative option is not Connect correctly.
  • Page 355
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Display Name Definition Cause Action A.38 MC drive circuit Magnetic contactor drive 1. Wrong connection of the magnetic Review the wiring. error circuit error contactor. (When the magnetic 2. Parameters specifying whether to Set parameter No.PA02 correctly.
  • Page 356
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (3) Remedies for warnings Continuing operation in an alarm occurrence status may result in an alarm or disable proper operation. Eliminate the cause of the warning according to this section. The warning displayed will disappear when the cause of its occurrence is resolved.
  • Page 357
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.6.2 Drive unit POINT Explanation made in this section is exclusively for the driver unit. Other troubleshooting is the same as that for servo amplifiers with 22kW or less. Refer to chapter 8. As soon as an alarm occurs, make the Servo off status and interrupt the main circuit power.
  • Page 358
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (3) Remedies for warnings Continuing operation in an alarm occurrence status may result in an alarm or disable proper operation. Eliminate the cause of the warning according to this section. The warning displayed will disappear when the cause of its occurrence is resolved.
  • Page 359: Outline Drawings

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.7 Outline drawings POINT Refer to section 13.2.1 for outline dimension drawing. 13.7.1 Converter unit (MR-J3-CR55K(4)) [Unit: mm] Cooling fan wind direction 2- 7 Installation hole Approx. 20 Approx. 200 Terminal block layout Approx.

  • Page 360
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.7.2 Drive unit (1) MR-J3-DU30KB MR-J3-DU37KB MR-J3-DU45KB4 MR-J3-DU55KB4 [Unit: mm] 2- 7 Installation hole Approx. 20 Approx. 200 Cooling fan Approx. 80 Terminal block layout wind direction (Terminal cover removed) For mounting TE2-1 TE2-1…
  • Page 361
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) MR-J3-DU30KB4 MR-J3-DU37KB4 [Unit: mm] 2- 6 Installation hole Approx. 60 Approx. 200 Cooling fan Approx. 80 Terminal block layout wind direction (Terminal cover removed) For mounting MR-J3BAT Approx. 200 219.2 Mass: 18[kg] (Approx.
  • Page 362: Overload Protection Characteristics

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.8 Characteristics 13.8.1 Overload protection characteristics An electronic thermal relay is built in the converter unit and drive unit to protect the servo motor, converter unit and drive unit from overloads. Overload 1 alarm (50) occurs if overload operation performed is above the electronic thermal relay protection curve shown below.

  • Page 363: Power Supply Equipment Capacity And Generated Loss

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.8.2 Power supply equipment capacity and generated loss POINT The calculation method of heat dissipation area for enclosed control panel is the same as that for servo amplifiers with 22kW or less. Refer to section 10.2 (2).

  • Page 364: Dynamic Brake Characteristics

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.8.3 Dynamic brake characteristics Fig. 13.2 shows the pattern in which the servo motor comes to a stop when the dynamic brake is operated. Use Equation 13.1 to calculate an approximate coasting distance to a stop. The dynamic brake time constant varies with the servo motor and machine operation speeds.

  • Page 365
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) HA-LP37K1M HA-LP37K1M4 HA-LP45K1M4 HA-LP50K1M4 HA-LP30K1M HA-LP30K1M4 1000 1500 2000 1000 1500 2000 Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] HA-LP1500r/min series 0.045 0.045 HA-LP45K24 0.04 0.04 HA-LP30K2 0.035 0.035 HA-LP37K2 HA-LP55K24 HA-LP37K24 0.03 0.03 HA-LP30K24 0.025…
  • Page 366: Inrush Currents At Power-On Of Main Circuit And Control Circuit

    Use the dynamic brake at the load inertia moment indicated in the following table. If the load inertia moment is higher than this value, the built-in dynamic brake may burn. If there is a possibility that the load inertia moment may exceed the value, contact Mitsubishi. Load inertia moment ratio…

  • Page 367: Options

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.9 Options Before connecting any option or peripheral equipment, turn off the power and wait for 20 minutes or more until the charge lamp turns off. Then, confirm that the voltage between L and L is safe with a voltage tester and others.

  • Page 368
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (1) Makeup of cables and like The following shows the cable makeup for connection with the servo motor and other model. Converter unit Drive unit CNP1 CN40 CN40A CN40B 4) 5) Servo motor HA-LP Terminal…
  • Page 369
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) MR-J3CDL05M(0.5m) Protection coordination cable Connect protection coordination cables correctly if they are fabricated. CAUTION Otherwise, misoperation or explosion may occur. When fabricating a protection coordination cable, use the recommended wires given in section 13.9.4, and fabricate a protection coordination cable as shown in the wiring diagram in this section.
  • Page 370
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.9.2 Regenerative option The specified combinations of regenerative options, converter unit and drive unit CAUTION may only be used. Otherwise, a fire may occur. POINT The calculation method of regenerative energy is the same as that for servo amplifiers with 22kW or less.
  • Page 371
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (4) Connection of the regenerative option Always supply 1-phase 200V and 400V respectively to the cooling fan. The cooling fan specifications are as follows. Table 13.3 Cooling fan Item 200V class 400V class Model MR-RB137 MR-RB139…
  • Page 372
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (b) MR-RB137 MR-RB138-4 POINT Three of MR-RB137 or MR-RB138-4 are required per converter unit. Please purchase three of MR-RB137 or MR-RB138-4. Converter unit Power factor improving DC reactor (Option) (Note 1) Servo motor 5m or less OHS1…
  • Page 373
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (5) Outline dimension drawings [Unit:mm] 2- 10 hole Mass Regenerative option [kg(lb)] MR-RB139 MR-RB136-4 10(22.05) Cooling fan (Note 1) MR-RB137 MR-RB138-4 11(24.25) Terminal block signal layout (Note 2) (Note 2) Terminal screw: M5 Tightening torque: 2.0 [N m] (17.7 [lb in]) Mounting screw…
  • Page 374: External Dynamic Brake

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.9.3 External dynamic brake POINT Configure up a sequence which switches off the contact of the brake unit after (or as soon as) it has turned off the servo on (signal) at a power failure or failure.

  • Page 375
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Converter unit Drive unit Servo motor (Note 4) Power supply DICOM DOCOM DICOM CNP1 (Note 3) DICOM (Note 3) DOCOM DICOM DOCOM Forced stop (Note 2) Plate (Note 5) Drive Controller (Note 5) Operation…
  • Page 376
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (3) Outline dimension drawing [Unit:mm] 2- 10 installation hole Terminal block Terminal screw: M5 Tightening torque: 2.0 [N m] (17.7 [lb in]) Terminal screw: M5 Tightening torque: 0.8 [N m] (7.1 [lb in]) a b 1314 U V W Mounting screw…
  • Page 377: Recommended Wires

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.9.4 Recommended wires The following diagram shows the wires used for wiring. Use the wires given in this paragraph or equivalent. Converter unit Drive unit Servo motor 3) Motor power supply lead Power factor improving DC reactor…

  • Page 378: No-Fuse Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Table 13.5 Recommended crimping terminals Servo amplifier side crimping terminals Symbol (Note 2) Applicable tool Manufacturer Crimping terminal Body Head Dice FVD5.5-10 YNT-1210S FVD22-10 YF-1 E-4 YNE-38 DH-123 DH113 Japan Solderless (Note 1) R38-8 YPT-60-21…

  • Page 379: Power Factor Improving Dc Reactor

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.9.6 Power factor improving DC reactor The input power factor is improved to about 95%. [Unit:mm] Power factor improving Terminal Mass Converter unit Drive unit DC reactor Screw [kg (lb)] MR-J3-DU30KB MR-DCL30K MR-J3-CR55K…

  • Page 380
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.9.7 Line noise filter (FR-BLF) POINT This section explains how to use the line noise filter unique to servo amplifiers with a large capacity. Other noise reduction products are the same as those for servo amplifiers with 22kW or less.
  • Page 381: Leakage Current Breaker

    (about 30cm) to minimize leakage currents. Rated sensitivity current 10 {Ig1 (Ig2 Igm)} [mA] ··········································· (13.2) K: Constant considering the harmonic contents Leakage current breaker Cable Noise filter Mitsubishi Type Cable Converter Drive products unit unit NV-SP Models provided with…

  • Page 382
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) Selection example Indicated below is an example of selecting a leakage current breaker under the following conditions: 30mm 22mm Converter Drive Servo motor unit unit Use a leakage current breaker designed for suppressing harmonics/surges. Find the terms of Equation (13.2) from the diagram: 95 ×…
  • Page 383: Emc Filter (Recommended)

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.9.9 EMC filter (recommended) For compliance with the EMC directive of the EN Standard, it is recommended to use the following filter: Some EMC filters are large in leakage current. (1) Converter unit Drive unit Recommended filter (Soshin Electric)

  • Page 384
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (3) Outline drawing HF3200A-UN [Unit: mm] 6.5 Length: 8 3-M10 TF3150C-TX [Unit: mm] 8-R 4.25 Length: 12 (for M8) 3-M8 3-M8 (227) 13 — 87…
  • Page 385: Fr-Bu2-(H) Brake Unit

    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 13.9.10 FR-BU2-(H) Brake Unit POINT Use a 200V class brake unit and a resistor unit with a 200V class converter unit, and a 400V class brake unit and a resistor unit with a 400V class converter unit.

  • Page 386
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (2) Brake unit parameter setting Normally, changing parameters of the FR-BU2-(H) is not necessary. Whether a parameter can be changed or not is listed below. Parameter Change Remarks possible/ Name impossible Brake mode switchover Impossible…
  • Page 387
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Converter unit Drive unit (Note 1) (Note 3) Power supply DICOM 24VDC DOCOM DICOM CNP1 DICOM 24VDC DICOM (Note 2) DOCOM DOCOM (Note 9) Forced stop (Note 2) Plate (Note 5) (Note 2) Drive Controller…
  • Page 388
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Note 1. For power supply specifications, refer to section 13.1.3. 2. Configure the circuit to turn OFF the forced stop (EM1) of the drive unit and the converter unit at the same time. 3.
  • Page 389
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (b) Combination with MT-BR5-(H) resistor unit 1) When connecting a brake unit to a converter unit Converter unit Drive unit (Note 1) Power supply (Note 3) DICOM 24VDC DOCOM DICOM CNP1 DICOM 24VDC…
  • Page 390
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) 2) When connecting two brake units to a converter unit POINT To use brake units with a parallel connection, use two sets of FR-BU2-(H) brake unit. Combination with other brake unit results in alarm occurrence or malfunction.
  • Page 391
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Converter unit Drive unit (Note 1) Power (Note 3) supply DICOM 24VDC DOCOM DICOM CNP1 DICOM 24VDC DICOM (Note 2) DOCOM DOCOM (Note 9) Forced stop (Note 2) Plate (Note 5) (Note 2) Controller Drive…
  • Page 392
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) Note 1. For power supply specifications, refer to section 13.1.3. 2. Configure the circuit to turn OFF the forced stop (EM1) of the drive unit and the converter unit at the same time. 3.
  • Page 393
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) b) Control circuit terminal POINT Undertightening can cause a cable disconnection or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to damage to the screw or the brake unit. Sheath SD SD Core…
  • Page 394
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (e) Crimping terminals for L and L terminals of TE2-1 of servo amplifier 1) Recommended crimping terminals POINT Always use recommended crimping terminals or equivalent since some crimping terminals cannot be installed depending on the size. Number of (Note 1) Converter unit…
  • Page 395
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (4) Outline dimension drawings (a) FR-BU2- (H) brake unit [Unit: mm] FR-BU2-55K FR-BU2-H55K, H75K 2- 5hole (Screw size: M4) Rating plate 18.5 142.5 (b) FR-BR- (H) resistor unit [Unit: mm] 2- C (Note) Control circuit…
  • Page 396
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) (c) MT-BR5- (H) resistor unit [Unit: mm] Approximate Resistance Resistor unit mass [kg] value 200V MT-BR5-55K class 400V MT-BR5-H75K class 4 15 mounting hole 13 — 99…
  • Page 397
    13. SERVO AMPLIFIERS WITH A LARGE CAPACITY (30k TO 55kW) MEMO 13 — 100…
  • Page 398: Appendix

    APPENDIX App 1. Parameter list POINT Parameter whose symbol is preceded by * is made valid with the following conditions. * : Set the parameter value, switch power off once after setting, and then switch it on again, or perform the controller reset. **: Set the parameter value, switch power off once, and then switch it on again.

  • Page 399
    APPENDIX Extension setting parameters (PC I/O setting parameters (PD Symbol Name Symbol Name PC01 *ERZ Error excessive alarm level PD01 For manufacturer setting PC02 Electromagnetic brake sequence output PD06 PC03 *ENRS Encoder output pulses selection PC04 **COP1 Function selection C-1 PD07 *DO1 Output signal device selection 1 (CN3-13)
  • Page 400: App 2. Signal Layout Recording Paper

    APPENDIX App 2. Signal layout recording paper DOCOM DICOM DICOM App 3. Twin type connector : Outline drawing for 721-2105/026-000(WAGO) [Unit: mm] Latch Coding finger Size [mm] Model 721-2105/026-000 5.25 721-2205/026-000 7.75 Detecting hole 26.45 2.75 15.1 4.75 Driver slot Wire inserting hole App — 3…

  • Page 401: App 4. Change Of Connector Sets To The Rohs Compatible Products

    APPENDIX App 4. Change of connector sets to the RoHS compatible products Connector sets (options) in the following table are changed to the RoHS compatible products after September, 2006 shipment. Please accept that the current products might be mixed with RoHS compatible products based on availability. Model Current Product RoHS Compatible Product…

  • Page 402
    REVISIONS *The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover. Print Data *Manual Number Revision May, 2005 SH(NA)030051-A First edition Jan., 2006 SH(NA)030051-B Addition of servo amplifier MR-J3-11KB(4), 15KB(4) and 22KB(4) Addition of servo motor HC-RP, HC-UP, HC-LP and HA-LP4 series Section 1.5 (2) : Addition of regeneration brake resistor-less specification Section 1.7.2…
  • Page 403
    Print Data *Manual Number Revision Jul., 2007 SH(NA)030051-C Section 1.2(1) : Unification of Note 3 to Note 2, addition of new Note 3 Section 1.3 : Addition of MR-J3-500B4 and 700B4 Section 1.3(2) : Addition of MR-J3-60B4 to 350B4 Section 1.5(2) : Addition of MR-J3-60B4 to 350B4 Section 1.6 : Addition of MR-J3-500B4 and 700B4…
  • Page 404
    Print Data *Manual Number Revision Jul., 2007 SH(NA)030051-C Section 3.10.2(3) : Change of Note1 and 3 in (a) 1) and 2), Addition and change of (b) Terminal box inside diagrams, Addition and change of corresponding motor models in the cooling fan power supply list Section 3.10.2(3) (b) : Change of servo motor diagram Section 3.11.3(1)
  • Page 405
    Print Data *Manual Number Revision Jul., 2007 SH(NA)030051-C Section 11.1.1 : Change of Application description for No.34 from “outside panel long distance cable” to “long distance cable” Change of connector model Addition of 2) Connector for 2kW and 3.5kW (400V) Section 11.1.2(1) : Deletion of 0.3m from table Section 11.1.2(1) (a)
  • Page 406
    Print Data *Manual Number Revision Jul., 2007 SH(NA)030051-C Section 11.11(1) : Addition of cable diameter for MR-J3-60B4 to 350B4, addition of Note 3: Cable 5) to 7) of MR-J3-700B(4) Section 11.12 : Addition of MR-J3-60B4 to 350B4 compliant products Addition of no-fuse breakers, fuses and magnetic contactors for MR-J3-500B4 and 700B4 Section 11.13 : Addition of MR-J3-60B4 to 350B4 compliant products,…
  • Page 407
    Print Data *Manual Number Revision Jul., 2007 SH(NA)030051-C Section 13.4.3(3) : Deletion Section 13.5.2 : Deletion of parameter No.PA08 name and initial value Section 13.6.1(3) : Deletion of «built-in regenerative register» from excessive regenerative load warning (A.E0) definition and cause Section 13.8.1 : Division of Load ratio graph for MR-J3- B(4) and MR- J3-CR55K(4)
  • Page 408
    MODEL MODEL CODE HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BLDG MARUNOUCHI TOKYO 100-8310 This Instruction Manual uses recycled paper. SH (NA) 030051-C (0707) MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Mitsubishi Electric Manuals
  4. Amplifier
  5. Melservo MR-J3-70B

Manuals and User Guides for Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-70B. We have 4 Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-70B manuals available for free PDF download: Handbook, Manual, Instruction Manual

Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-70B Handbook

Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-70B Handbook (590 pages)

Brand: Mitsubishi Electric
|
Category: Servo Drives
|
Size: 13.98 MB

Table of Contents
  • Table of Contents

    10

  • Summary of Mr-J3/Mr-J3W Replacement

    18

  • Major Replacement Target Model

    19

    • Servo Amplifier Replacement Target Model

      19

    • Servo Motor Replacement Target Model

      19

  • Flow of Replacement

    20

    • Summary

      20

      • Flow of Review on Replacement

        20

      • Configuration Diagram

        21

      • Changes from MR-J3 Series to MR-J4 Series

        22

      • Changes from MR-J3W Series to MR-J4 Series

        24

    • Review on Replacement

      26

      • Checking the System Prior to Replacement

        26

      • Determination of Base Replacement Model

        26

      • Attachment Compatibility Check

        32

      • Detailed Review on Replacement Model

        32

      • Peripheral Equipment Check

        32

      • Startup Procedure Check

        32

  • Related Materials

    32

    • Catalog

      32

    • Instruction Manual

      32

    • Replacement Tool for Replacing MR-J3 with MR-J4

      33

    • MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website

      33

  • Summary

    33

  • Case Study on Replacement of Mr-J3-_A

    35

    • Review on Replacement Method

      35

    • Replacement Method

      35

  • Differences between Mr-J3-_A_ and Mr-J4-_A

    37

    • Function Comparison Table

      37

    • Comparison of Standard Connection Diagrams

      39

    • List of Corresponding Connectors and Terminal Blocks

      41

    • Comparison of Peripheral Equipment

      46

    • Comparison of Parameters

      47

      • Setting Requisite Parameters Upon Replacement

        47

      • Parameter Comparison List

        49

      • Comparison of Parameter Details

        53

    • Important Points for Replacement

      96

  • Part 3: Review on Replacement of MR-J3-_B_ with MR-J4-_B_ 3- 1 to

    98

    • Case Study on Replacement of Mr-J3-_B

      99

      • Review on Replacement Method

        99

      • Replacement Method

        100

    • Differences between Mr-J3-_B_ and Mr-J4-_B

      103

      • Function Comparison Table

        103

      • Comparison of Networks

        105

      • Comparison of Standard Connection Diagrams

        105

      • List of Corresponding Connectors and Terminal Blocks

        106

      • Comparison of Peripheral Equipment

        109

      • Comparison of Parameters

        109

        • Setting Requisite Parameters Upon Replacement

          110

        • Parameter Comparison List

          111

        • Comparison of Parameter Details

          114

    • Application of Functions

      144

  • Part 4: Replacement of MR-J3W-_B with MR-J4W2-_B 4- 1 to

    146

    • Case Study on Replacement of Mr-J3W-_B

      147

      • Review on Replacement Method

        147

      • Servo Amplifier Replacement Model

        147

      • Replacement Method

        148

    • Differences between Mr-J3W-_B and Mr-J4W2-_B

      151

      • Function Comparison Table

        151

      • Configuration Including Auxiliary Equipment

        153

      • Comparison of Networks

        157

      • Comparison of Standard Connection Diagrams

        157

      • List of Corresponding Connectors and Terminal Blocks

        159

        • Class

          159

        • DC/24 V DC Class

          162

      • Comparison of Peripheral Equipment

        164

      • Comparison of Parameters

        165

        • Setting Requisite Parameters Upon Replacement

          166

        • Parameter Comparison List

          167

        • Comparison of Parameter Details

          171

    • Application of Functions

      194

  • Part 5: Review on Replacement of MR-J3-DU_ with MR-J4-DU_ 5- 1 to

    196

    • Functions and Configuration

      197

      • Differences between MR-J3-DU_ and MR-J4-DU

        197

      • Combination of Converter Unit, Drive Unit, and Servo Motor

        198

      • Configuration Including Peripheral Equipment

        200

    • Installation

      202

      • Installation Direction and Clearances

        202

      • Magnetic Contactor Control Connector (CNP1)

        204

    • Signals and Wiring

      206

      • Comparison of Standard Connection Diagrams

        206

        • When Magnetic Contactor Drive Output Is Enabled (Factory Setting)

          206

        • When Magnetic Contactor Control Connector (CNP1) Is Made Invalid

          211

      • Power-On Sequence

        216

      • List of Corresponding Connectors and Terminal Blocks

        224

      • Converter Unit

        224

        • Converter Unit Parameter Comparison List

          232

        • Converter Unit Comparison of Parameter Details

          233

      • Drive Unit

        236

        • Drive Unit Comparison of Parameter Details

          236

    • Characteristics

      238

      • Overload Protection Characteristics

        238

      • Power Supply Capacity and Generated Loss

        241

      • Inrush Currents at Power-On of Main Circuit/Control Circuit

        243

    • Options and Peripheral Equipment

      244

      • Comparison Table of Cable Option Combinations

        244

        • MR-J3CDL05M (0.5 M) Protection Coordination Cable

          245

      • Selection Example of Wires

        246

        • MR-J3 Series, Power Supply Wire Size

          246

        • MR-J4 Series, Power Supply Wire Size

          248

      • Selection of Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors (Example)

        250

        • MR-J3-DU_ Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors (Recommended)

          250

        • MR-J4-DU_ Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors (Recommended)

          250

      • BU2-(H) Brake Unit

        252

        • Selection

          252

        • Brake Unit Parameter Setting

          253

        • Connection Example

          253

        • Dimensions

          269

      • Regenerative Option

        271

        • Combination and Regenerative Power

          271

      • External Dynamic Brake

        272

        • MR-J3 Series

          272

        • MR-J4 Series

          273

      • Dimensions

        273

        • MR-J3 Series

          273

        • MR-J4 Series

          275

  • Part 6: Common Reference Material 6- 1 to

    278

    • Specification Differences

      279

      • Detailed Specification/Function Differences

        279

      • Servo Amplifier

        281

        • Main Circuit Terminal Block

          281

        • Comparison of Encoder Signals (CN2)

          286

        • Dynamic Brake: Coasting Distance

          287

        • Forced Stop Deceleration Function Selection

          297

        • Servo Setup Software: Setup Software (SETUP221E) => MR Configurator2

          299

        • Servo Amplifier Initializing Time

          300

        • The Pulse Width of the Encoder Z-Phase Pulse

          302

      • Overload Protection Characteristics

        303

      • Comparison of Networks

        310

        • Comparison of Servo System Network Specifications

          310

    • Servo Amplifier Dimensions/Attachment Differences

      312

      • MR-J3 Series => MR-J4 Series Comparison Table of Servo Amplifier Dimensions/Installation Differences

        312

        • General-Purpose Interface/Sscnet Interface 200 V/100 V Class (22 Kw or Less)

          312

        • General-Purpose Interface/Sscnet Interface 400 V Class (22 Kw or Less)

          317

        • General Purpose Interface/Sscnet Interface 200 V Class (30 Kw or More)

          321

        • General Purpose Interface/Sscnet Interface 400 V Class (30 Kw or More)

          323

        • SSCNET Interface (MR-J3W Series)

          325

      • Parameter Conversion

        326

        • Operation Procedure of Parameter Conversion

          326

        • MR-J3-_A_ Parameter Diversion Procedure

          327

        • Parameter Reading from the Servo Amplifier MR- J3-_A

          327

        • Converting the Parameters of MR-J3-_A_ and Writing Them to the MR-J4-_A

          327

        • Servo Amplifier

          327

        • Conversion Rules (MR-J3-_A_ => MR-J4-_A_)

          333

        • Parameters that Need to be Checked after Parameter Conversion

          337

      • MR-J3-_B_ and MR-J3W-_B Parameter Diversion Procedure

        338

        • Changing QD75MH to QD77MS/LD77MS

          339

        • Changing Q17Nhcpu/Q17Ndcpu/Q170Mcpu to Q17Ndscpu/Q170Mscpu(-S1)

          341

        • Conversion Rules (MR-J3-_B_ and MR-J3W-_B => MR-J4-_B_ and MR-J4W2-_B)

          343

        • Parameters that Need to be Checked after Parameter Conversion

          346

    • Common Points to Note

      348

      • Method for Checking the Software Version

        348

        • Checking with MR Configurator2 (SW1DNC-MRC2-E)

          348

    • Communication Function (Mitsubishi General-Purpose Ac Servo Protocol)

      349

      • Structure

        350

        • Configuration Diagram

          350

        • Precautions for Using RS-422/RS-232C/USB Communication Function

          352

      • Communication Specifications

        353

        • Outline of Communication

          353

        • Parameter Setting

          353

      • Protocol

        354

        • Transmission Data Configuration

          354

        • Character Codes

          355

        • Error Codes

          356

        • Checksum

          356

        • Time-Out Processing

          356

        • Retry Processing

          357

        • Initialization

          357

        • Communication Procedure Example

          358

      • Command and Data No. List

        359

        • Reading Command

          359

        • Writing Commands

          365

      • Detailed Explanations of Commands

        367

        • Data Processing

          367

        • Status Display Mode

          369

        • Parameter

          370

        • External I/O Signal Status (DIO Diagnosis)

          374

        • Input Device On/Off

          377

        • Disabling/Enabling I/O Devices (DIO)

          378

        • Input Devices On/Off (Test Operation)

          379

        • Test Operation Mode

          380

        • Output Signal Pin On/Off (Output Signal (DO) Forced Output)

          384

        • Alarm History

          385

        • Current Alarm

          386

        • Other Commands

          387

    • Hf-_P/Ha-_P/Hc-_P Motor Drive

      389

      • MR-J3 Series Motors Which Are Available with MR-J4-_A_ and MR-J4-_B

        389

      • MR-J3 Series Motors Which Are Available with MR-J4W2-_B

        394

    • Application of Functions

      395

      • J3 Compatibility Mode

        395

        • J3 Outline of J3 Compatibility Mode

          395

        • Operation Modes Supported by J3 Compatibility Mode

          395

        • J3 Compatibility Mode Supported Function List

          396

        • Distinguishing J3 Compatibility Mode

          398

        • How to Switch J4 Mode/J3 Compatibility Mode

          399

        • How to Use the J3 Compatibility Mode

          400

        • Cautions for Switching J4 Mode/J3 Compatibility Mode

          401

        • Cautions for the J3 Compatibility Mode

          401

        • Change of Specifications of «J3 Compatibility Mode» Switching Process

          402

        • J3 Extension Function

          405

      • Master-Slave Operation Function

        407

      • Scale Measurement Function

        411

        • Functions and Configuration

          411

        • Scale Measurement Encoder

          413

        • How to Use Scale Measurement Function

          416

  • Part 7: Review on Replacement of Motor 7- 1 to

    418

    • Servo Motor Replacement

      419

      • Servo Motor Substitute Model and Compatibility

        419

    • Comparison of Servo Motor Specifications

      430

      • Comparison of Servo Motor Mounting Dimensions

        430

      • Detailed Comparison of Servo Motor Mounting Dimensions

        436

      • Comparison of Mounting Dimensions for Geared Servo Motors

        439

      • Comparison of Actual Reduction Ratios for Geared Servo Motors

        442

      • Comparison of Moment of Inertia

        443

      • Comparison of Servo Motor Connector Specifications

        454

      • Comparison of Servo Motor Torque Characteristics

        475

  • Part 8: Review on Replacement of Optional Peripheral Equipment 8- 1 to

    486

    • Comparison Table of Regenerative Option Combinations

      487

      • Regenerative Options 200 V Class /100 V Class

        488

        • Combination and Regenerative Power for the MR-J3/MR-J3W Series

          488

        • Combination and Regenerative Power for MR-J4 Series (Replacement Model)

          489

        • External Form Comparison

          490

      • Regenerative Options 400 V Class

        491

        • Combination and Regenerative Power for the MR-J3 Series

          491

        • Combination and Regenerative Power for MR-J4 Series (Replacement Model)

          492

        • External Form Comparison

          493

    • Comparison Table of Dynamic Brake Option Combinations

      495

      • External Form Comparison

        496

    • Comparison Table of Cable Option Combinations

      497

      • Changes from MR-J3 Series to MR-J4 Series

        497

      • Changes from MR-J3W Series to MR-J4W2-_B Servo Amplifier

        499

    • Power Supply Wire Size

      500

      • Selection of Power Supply Wire Size (Example)

        500

        • MR-J3 Series Power Supply Wire Size

          500

        • MR-J4 Series Power Supply Wire Size

          504

        • MR-J3W Series Power Supply Wire Size

          506

        • MR-J4W2-_B Servo Amplifier, Power Supply Wire Size

          508

      • Selection Example of Crimp Terminals

        510

        • MR-J3 Series Crimp Terminal

          510

        • MR-J4 Series Crimp Terminal

          511

      • Selection of Molded-Case Circuit Breaker, Fuse, and Magnetic Contactor (Example)

        512

        • MR-J3 Series, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Fuses, and Magnetic Contactors

          512

        • MR-J4 Series, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Fuses, and Magnetic Contactors (Recommended)

          513

        • MR-J3W Series, No-Fuse Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors

          515

        • MR-J4W2-_B Servo Amplifier, No-Fuse Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors

          516

    • Battery

      518

      • Combinations of Batteries and the Servo Amplifier

        518

      • MR-J3 Series Battery

        519

      • MR-J4 Series Battery

        520

        • Battery Replacement Procedure

          520

        • When Using the MR-BAT6V1SET Battery

          521

        • When Using MR-BAT6V1BJ Battery for Junction Battery Cable

          522

        • When Using MR-BT6VCASE Battery Case

          523

      • MR-J3W Series Battery

        524

        • MR-BTCASE Battery Case and MR-BAT Battery

          524

      • MR-J4W2-_B Servo Amplifier, Battery

        525

        • MR-BT6VCASE Battery Case

          525

        • MR-BAT6V1 Battery

          531

        • MR-BAT6V1SET-A Battery (MR-J4W2-0303B6 Only)

          532

    • Emc Filter (Recommended)

      535

      • MR-J3/MR-J3W/MR-J4 Series EMC Filter (Recommended) (100 V/200 V/400 V Class)

        535

        • Connection Example

          536

        • Dimensions

          537

    • Power Factor Improving Ac Reactor/Power Factor Improving DC Reactor

      541

      • MR-J3 Series Power Factor Improving DC Reactor

        541

      • MR-J3/MR-J3W Series Power Factor Improving AC Reactor

        544

      • MR-J4 Series Power Factor Improving DC Reactors 200 V Class

        546

      • MR-J4 Series Power Factor Improving DC Reactors 400 V Class

        548

      • MR-J4 Series Power Factor Improving AC Reactors 200 V/100 V Class

        550

      • MR-J4 Series Power Factor Improving AC Reactors 400 V Class

        552

    • Setup Software (Setup221E)

      554

      • MR-J3/MR-J3W Series Setup Software (SETUP221E)

        554

        • Specifications

          554

      • MR-J4 Series MR Configurator2

        555

        • Specifications

          555

      • System Configuration

        556

        • Components

          556

        • Connection with Servo Amplifier

          557

        • Precautions for Using USB Communication Function

          557

    • Panel through Attachment

      558

      • MR-J3 Series (MR-J3ACN)

        558

      • MR-J4 Series (MR-J4ACN15K/MR-J3ACN)

        560

  • Part 9: Startup Procedure Manual

    564

Advertisement

Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-70B Manual

Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-70B Manual (500 pages)

Brand: Mitsubishi Electric
|
Category: Servo Drives
|
Size: 13.83 MB

Table of Contents
  • Table of Contents

    10

  • Part 1: Summary of MR-J3/MR-J3W Replacement 1- 1 to

    16

    • Summary of Mr-J3/Mr-J3W Replacement

      16

    • Major Replacement Target Model

      17

      • Servo Amplifier Replacement Target Model

        17

      • Servo Motor Replacement Target Model

        17

    • Flow of Replacement

      18

      • Summary

        18

        • Flow of Review on Replacement

          18

        • Configuration Diagram

          19

        • Changes from MR-J3 Series to MR-J4 Series

          20

        • Changes from MR-J3W Series to MR-J4 Series

          22

      • Review on Replacement

        24

        • Checking the System Prior to Replacement

          24

        • Determination of Base Replacement Model

          24

        • Attachment Compatibility Check

          28

        • Detailed Review on Replacement Model

          28

        • Peripheral Equipment Check

          28

        • Startup Procedure Check

          28

    • Related Materials

      28

      • Catalog

        28

      • Instruction Manual

        28

      • Replacement Tool for Replacing MR-J3 with MR-J4

        29

      • MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website

        29

    • Summary

      29

    • Case Study on Replacement of Mr-J3-_A

      31

      • Review on Replacement Method

        31

      • Replacement Method

        31

    • Differences between Mr-J3-_A_ and Mr-J4-_A

      33

      • Function Comparison Table

        33

      • Comparison of Standard Connection Diagrams

        35

      • List of Corresponding Connectors and Terminal Blocks

        37

      • Comparison of Peripheral Equipment

        42

      • Comparison of Parameters

        43

        • Setting Requisite Parameters Upon Replacement

          43

        • Parameter Comparison List

          45

        • Comparison of Parameter Details

          49

      • Important Points for Replacement

        92

  • Part 3: Review on Replacement of MR-J3-_B_ with MR-J4-_B_ 3- 1 to

    94

    • Case Study on Replacement of Mr-J3-_B

      95

      • Review on Replacement Method

        95

      • Replacement Method

        96

    • Differences between Mr-J3-_B_ and Mr-J4-_B

      99

      • Function Comparison Table

        99

      • Comparison of Networks

        101

      • Comparison of Standard Connection Diagrams

        101

      • List of Corresponding Connectors and Terminal Blocks

        102

      • Comparison of Peripheral Equipment

        105

      • Comparison of Parameters

        106

        • Setting Requisite Parameters Upon Replacement

          107

        • Parameter Comparison List

          108

        • Comparison of Parameter Details

          111

    • Application of Functions

      142

  • Part 4: Replacement of MR-J3W-_B with MR-J4W2-_B 4- 1 to

    144

    • Case Study on Replacement of Mr-J3W-_B

      145

      • Review on Replacement Method

        145

      • Servo Amplifier Replacement Model

        145

      • Replacement Method

        146

    • Differences between Mr-J3W-_B and Mr-J4W2-_B

      149

      • Function Comparison Table

        149

      • Configuration Including Auxiliary Equipment

        150

      • Comparison of Networks

        152

      • Comparison of Standard Connection Diagrams

        152

      • List of Corresponding Connectors and Terminal Blocks

        153

      • Main Circuit Terminal Block

        155

      • MR-J3W-_B => MR-J4W2-_B Comparison Table of Servo Amplifier Dimensions/Installation Differences

        156

        • MR-J3W-_B => MR-J4W2-_B Comparison Table of Servo Amplifier Dimensions

          156

          • Installation Differences

            156

        • Comparison Dimensions

          156

      • Comparison of Peripheral Equipment

        156

      • Comparison of Parameters

        157

        • Setting Requisite Parameters Upon Replacement

          158

        • Parameter Comparison List

          159

        • Comparison of Parameter Details

          163

    • Application of Functions

      185

  • Part 5: Common Reference Material 5- 1 to

    186

    • Specification Differences

      187

      • Detailed Specification/Function Differences

        187

      • Servo Amplifier

        189

        • Main Circuit Terminal Block

          189

        • Comparison of Encoder Signals (CN2)

          193

        • Dynamic Brake: Coasting Distance

          194

        • Forced Stop Deceleration Function Selection

          202

        • Servo Setup Software: Setup Software (SETUP221E) => MR Configurator2

          204

        • Servo Amplifier Initializing Time

          205

        • The Pulse Width of the Encoder Z-Phase Pulse

          207

      • Comparison of Networks

        208

        • Comparison of Servo System Network Specifications

          208

    • Servo Amplifier Dimensions/Attachment Differences

      210

      • MR-J3 Series => MR-J4 Series Comparison Table of Servo Amplifier Dimensions/Installation Differences

        210

        • General-Purpose Interface/Sscnet III Interface 200 V/100 V Class (22 Kw or Less)

          210

        • General-Purpose Interface/Sscnet III Interface 400 V Class (22 Kw or Less)

          215

      • Parameter Conversion

        219

        • Operation Procedure of Parameter Conversion

          219

        • MR-J3-_A_ Parameter Diversion Procedure

          220

        • Parameter Reading from the Servo Amplifier MR- J3-_A

          220

        • Converting the Parameters of MR-J3-_A_ and Writing Them to the MR-J4-_A

          220

          • Servo Amplifier

            220

        • Conversion Rules (MR-J3-_A_ => MR-J4-_A_)

          226

        • Parameters that Need to be Checked after Parameter Conversion

          230

      • MR-J3-_B_ and MR-J3W-_B Parameter Diversion Procedure

        231

        • Changing QD75MH to QD77MS/LD77MS

          232

        • Changing Q17Nhcpu/Q17Ndcpu/Q170Mcpu to Q17Ndscpu/Q170Mscpu(-S1)

          234

        • Conversion Rules (MR-J3-_B_ and MR-J3W-_B => MR-J4-_B_ and MR-J4W2-_B)

          236

        • Parameters that Need to be Checked after Parameter Conversion

          239

    • Common Points to Note

      241

      • Method for Checking the Software Version

        241

        • Checking with MR Configurator2 (SW1DNC-MRC2-E)

          241

    • Communication Function (Mitsubishi General-Purpose Ac Servo Protocol)

      242

      • Structure

        243

        • Configuration Diagram

          243

        • Precautions for Using RS-422/RS-232C/USB Communication Function

          245

      • Communication Specifications

        246

        • Outline of Communication

          246

        • Parameter Setting

          246

      • Protocol

        247

        • Transmission Data Configuration

          247

        • Character Codes

          248

        • Error Codes

          249

        • Checksum

          249

        • Time-Out Processing

          249

        • Retry Processing

          250

        • Initialization

          250

        • Communication Procedure Example

          251

      • Command and Data No. List

        252

        • Reading Command

          252

        • Writing Commands

          258

      • Detailed Explanations of Commands

        260

        • Data Processing

          260

        • Status Display Mode

          262

        • Parameter

          263

        • External I/O Signal Status (DIO Diagnosis)

          267

        • Input Device On/Off

          270

        • Disabling/Enabling I/O Devices (DIO)

          271

        • Input Devices On/Off (Test Operation)

          272

        • Test Operation Mode

          273

        • Output Signal Pin On/Off (Output Signal (DO) Forced Output)

          277

        • Alarm History

          278

        • Current Alarm

          279

        • Other Commands

          280

    • Hf-_P/Ha-_P/Hc-_P Motor Drive

      282

      • MR-J3 Series Motors Which Are Available with MR-J4-_A_ and MR-J4-_B

        282

    • Application of Functions

      285

      • J3 Compatibility Mode

        285

        • J3 Outline of J3 Compatibility Mode

          285

        • Operation Modes Supported by J3 Compatibility Mode

          285

        • J3 Compatibility Mode Supported Function List

          286

        • How to Switch J4 Mode/J3 Compatibility Mode

          288

        • How to Use the J3 Compatibility Mode

          289

        • Cautions for Switching J4 Mode/J3 Compatibility Mode

          290

        • Cautions for the J3 Compatibility Mode

          290

        • Change of Specifications of «J3 Compatibility Mode» Switching Process

          291

        • Extension Function

          294

      • Master-Slave Operation Function

        351

      • Scale Measurement Function

        355

        • Functions and Configuration

          355

        • Scale Measurement Encoder

          357

        • How to Use Scale Measurement Function

          360

    • Servo Motor Replacement

      363

      • Servo Motor Substitute Model and Compatibility

        363

    • Comparison of Servo Motor Specifications

      373

      • Comparison of Servo Motor Mounting Dimensions

        373

      • Detailed Comparison of Servo Motor Mounting Dimensions

        378

      • Comparison of Mounting Dimensions for Geared Servo Motors (for High Precision Applications: HC-RP_G5 → HG-SR_G5)

        379

      • Comparison of Actual Reduction Ratios for Geared Servo Motors

        381

      • Comparison of Moment of Inertia

        382

      • Comparison of Servo Motor Connector Specifications

        393

      • Comparison of Servo Motor Torque Characteristics

        414

    • Comparison Table of Regenerative Option Combinations

      425

      • Regenerative Options (200 V Class /100 V Class)

        426

        • Combination and Regenerative Power for the MR-J3/MR-J3W Series

          426

        • Combination and Regenerative Power for MR-J4 Series (Replacement Model)

          427

        • External Form Comparison

          428

      • Regenerative Options (400 V Class)

        429

        • Combination and Regenerative Power for the MR-J3 Series

          429

        • Combination and Regenerative Power for MR-J4 Series (Replacement Model)

          430

        • External Form Comparison

          431

    • Comparison Table of Dynamic Brake Option Combinations

      432

      • External Form Comparison

        432

    • Comparison Table of Cable Option Combinations

      433

      • Changes from MR-J3 Series to MR-J4 Series

        433

      • Changes from MR-J3W Series to MR-J4W2-_B Servo Amplifier

        435

    • Power Supply Wire Size

      436

      • Selection of Power Supply Wire Size (Example)

        436

        • MR-J3 Series Power Supply Wire Size

          436

        • MR-J4 Series Power Supply Wire Size

          440

        • MR-J3W Series Power Supply Wire Size

          442

        • MR-J4W2-_B Servo Amplifier, Power Supply Wire Size

          443

      • Selection Example of Crimp Terminals

        444

        • MR-J3 Series Crimp Terminal

          444

        • MR-J4 Series Crimp Terminal

          445

      • Selection of Molded-Case Circuit Breaker, Fuse, and Magnetic Contactor (Example)

        446

        • MR-J3 Series, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Fuses, and Magnetic Contactors

          446

        • MR-J4 Series, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Fuses, and Magnetic Contactors (Recommended)

          447

        • MR-J3W Series, No-Fuse Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors

          448

        • MR-J4W2-_B Servo Amplifier, No-Fuse Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors

          449

    • Battery

      450

      • Combinations of Batteries and the Servo Amplifier

        450

      • MR-J3 Series Battery

        451

      • MR-J4 Series Battery

        452

        • Battery Replacement Procedure

          452

        • When Using the MR-BAT6V1SET Battery

          453

        • When Using MR-BAT6V1BJ Battery for Junction Battery Cable

          454

        • When Using MR-BT6VCASE Battery Case

          455

      • MR-J3W Series Battery

        456

        • MR-BTCASE Battery Case and MR-BAT Battery

          456

      • MR-J4W2-_B Servo Amplifier, Battery

        457

        • MR-BT6VCASE Battery Case

          457

        • MR-BAT6V1 Battery

          463

    • Emc Filter (Recommended)

      464

      • MR-J3/MR-J3W/MR-J4 Series EMC Filter (Recommended) (100 V/200 V/400 V Class)

        464

        • Connection Example

          465

        • Dimensions

          466

    • Power Factor Improving Ac Reactor/Power Factor Improving DC Reactor

      470

      • MR-J3 Series Power Factor Improving DC Reactor

        470

      • MR-J3/MR-J3W Series Power Factor Improving AC Reactor

        472

      • MR-J4 Series Power Factor Improving DC Reactors (200 V Class)

        474

      • MR-J4 Series Power Factor Improving DC Reactors (400 V Class)

        476

      • MR-J4 Series Power Factor Improving AC Reactors (200 V/100 V Class)

        478

      • MR-J4 Series Power Factor Improving AC Reactors (400 V Class)

        480

    • Setup Software (Setup221E)

      482

      • MR-J3/MR-J3W Series Setup Software (SETUP221E)

        482

        • Specifications

          482

      • MR-J4 Series MR Configurator2

        483

        • Specifications

          483

      • System Configuration

        484

        • Components

          484

        • Connection with Servo Amplifier

          485

        • Precautions for Using USB Communication Function

          485

    • Panel through Attachment

      486

      • MR-J3 Series (MR-J3ACN)

        486

      • MR-J4 Series (MR-J4ACN15K/MR-J3ACN)

        488

Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-70B Instruction Manual

Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-70B Instruction Manual (408 pages)

Melservo J3 Series General-Purpose AC Servo SSCNET Compatible

Brand: Mitsubishi Electric
|
Category: Amplifier
|
Size: 17.73 MB

Table of Contents
  • Safety Instructions

    2

  • Table of Contents

    16

  • Functions and Configuration

    22

    • Introduction

      22

    • Function Block Diagram

      23

  • Servo Amplifier

    23

    • Servo Amplifier Standard Specifications

      26

    • Function List

      28

    • Model Code Definition

      29

    • Combination with Servo Motor

      31

    • Structure

      32

      • Parts Identification

        32

    • Connector

      32

      • Removal and Reinstallation of the

        39

    • Configuration Including Auxiliary Equipment

      42

    • Installation

      50

    • Installation Direction and Clearances

      50

    • Keep out Foreign Materials

      52

    • Cable Stress

      52

    • SSCNET Cable Laying

      53

    • Inspection Items

      55

    • Parts Having Service Lives

      55

  • Signals and Wiring

    56

    • Input Power Supply Circuit

      57

    • I/O Signal Connection Example

      65

    • Explanation of Power Supply System

      67

      • Signal Explanations

        67

      • Power-On Sequence

        68

      • CNP1, CNP2, CNP3 Wiring Method

        69

    • Connectors and Signal Arrangements

      78

    • Signal (Device) Explanations

      79

    • Alarm Occurrence Timing Chart

      82

    • Interfaces

      83

      • Internal Connection Diagram

        83

      • Detailed Description of Interfaces

        84

      • Source I/O Interfaces

        86

    • Treatment of Cable Shield External Conductor

      87

    • SSCNET Cable Connection

      88

    • Connection of Servo Amplifier and Servo Motor

      90

      • Connection Instructions

        90

      • Power Supply Cable Wiring Diagrams

        91

    • Servo Motor with Electromagnetic Brake

      101

      • Safety Precautions

        101

      • Timing Charts

        102

      • Wiring Diagrams (HF-MP Series HF-KP Series Servo Motor)

        104

    • Grounding

      105

    • Control Axis Selection

      106

    • Switching Power on for the First Time

      108

      • Startup Procedure

        108

      • Wiring Check

        109

      • Surrounding Environment

        110

    • Start up

      111

    • Servo Amplifier Display

      112

    • Test Operation

      114

    • Test Operation Mode

      115

      • Test Operation Mode in MR Configurator

        115

      • Motorless Operation in Controller

        117

      • Basic Setting Parameters (No.pa )

        118

      • Parameter List

        118

      • Parameter Write Inhibit

        119

      • Selection of Regenerative Option

        120

      • Using Absolute Position Detection System

        121

      • Forced Stop Input Selection

        121

    • Auto Tuning

      122

      • In-Position Range

        123

      • Selection of Servo Motor Rotation Direction

        124

      • Encoder Output Pulse

        124

        • Gain/Filter Parameters (No. PB )

          126

        • Parameter List

          126

      • Detail List

        127

      • Extension Setting Parameters (No. PC )

        134

      • Parameter List

        134

      • List of Details

        135

      • Analog Monitor

        138

      • Alarm History Clear

        140

      • I/O Setting Parameters (No. PD )

        141

      • Parameter List

        141

      • List of Details

        142

    • Different Adjustment Methods

      144

      • Adjustment on a Single Servo Amplifier

        144

      • Adjustment Using MR Configurator

        145

      • Auto Tuning Mode

        146

      • Auto Tuning Mode Operation

        147

      • Adjustment Procedure by Auto Tuning

        148

      • Response Level Setting in Auto Tuning Mode

        149

    • Manual Mode 1 (Simple Manual Adjustment)

      150

    • Interpolation Mode

      154

    • Differences between MELSERVO-J2-Super and MELSERVO-J3 in Auto Tuning

      155

    • Adaptive Filter

      156

    • Function Block Diagram

      156

    • Machine Resonance Suppression Filter

      159

    • Advanced Vibration Suppression Control

      161

    • Low-Pass Filter

      165

    • Gain Changing Function

      165

      • Applications

        165

      • Function Block Diagram

        166

      • Parameters

        167

      • Gain Changing Operation

        169

    • Troubleshooting

      172

    • Alarms and Warning List

      172

    • Remedies for Alarms

      173

  • Troubleshooting

    174

    • Remedies for Warnings

      179

    • Outline Drawings

      182

    • Characteristics

      194

      • Overload Protection Characteristics

        194

    • Power Supply Equipment Capacity and Generated Loss

      196

      • Dynamic Brake Characteristics

        199

      • Dynamic Brake Operation

        199

      • The Dynamic Brake at the Load Inertia Moment

        201

    • Cable Flexing Life

      202

      • Inrush Currents at Power-On of Main Circuit and Control Circuit

        203

    • Cable/Connector Sets

      204

      • Combinations of Cable/Connector Sets

        205

      • Encoder Cable/Connector Sets

        211

      • Motor Power Supply Cables

        220

      • Motor Brake Cables

        221

      • SSCNET Cable

        222

    • Regenerative Options

      224

    • Options

      234

      • FR-BU2-(H) Brake Unit

        237

      • Brake Unit Parameter Setting

        238

      • Selection

        238

      • Connection Example

        239

      • Outline Dimension Drawings

        246

    • Power Regeneration Converter

      248

    • Power Regeneration Common Converter

      251

      • External Dynamic Brake

        259

    • Junction Terminal Block PS7DW-20V14B-F (Recommended)

      264

    • MR Configurator

      266

    • Battery MR-J3BAT

      267

    • Heat Sink Outside Mounting Attachment (MR-J3ACN)

      268

      • Recommended Wires

        270

    • No-Fuse Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors

      274

      • Power Factor Improving DC Reactor

        274

    • Power Factor Improving AC Reactors

      276

    • Relays (Recommended)

      277

    • Surge Absorbers (Recommended)

      278

    • Noise Reduction Techniques

      278

      • Line Noise Filter (FR-BLF)

        283

      • Leakage Current Breaker

        285

      • EMC Filter (Recommended)

        287

    • Features

      292

    • Specifications

      293

    • Battery Installation Procedure

      294

    • Confirmation of Absolute Position Detection Data

      296

    • Functions and Menus

      298

      • Function Block Diagram

        299

      • Packing List

        301

      • Standard Specifications

        302

      • Model Definition

        305

      • Combinations of Converter Units, Drive Unit and Servo Motors

        306

      • Parts Identification

        307

      • Removal and Reinstallation of the Terminal Block Cover

        310

      • Servo System with Auxiliary Equipment

        316

  • Installation

    317

    • Installation Direction and Clearances

      318

      • Inspection

        319

      • Signals and Wiring

        320

    • Magnetic Contactor Control Connector (CNP1)

      321

    • Input Power Supply Circuit

      323

    • Terminal

      328

    • How to Use the Connection Bars

      329

      • Connectors and Signal Arrangements

        330

      • Converter Unit Signal (Device) Explanations

        332

      • Timing Chart

        334

    • Servo Motor Side Details

      342

    • Display Section and Operation Section of the Converter Unit

      344

      • Parameter Mode

        349

    • Parameters for Converter Unit

      350

      • Parameter List

        350

      • List of Details

        351

      • Converter Unit

        352

        • Troubleshooting

          352

        • Outline Drawings

          359

        • Overload Protection Characteristics

          362

        • Power Supply Equipment Capacity and Generated Loss

          363

        • Dynamic Brake Characteristics

          364

        • Inrush Currents at Power-On of Main Circuit and Control Circuit

          366

    • Options

      367

      • External Dynamic Brake

        374

      • Recommended Wires

        377

      • No-Fuse Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors

        378

      • Power Factor Improving DC Reactor

        379

      • Leakage Current Breaker

        381

      • EMC Filter (Recommended)

        383

      • FR-BU2-(H) Brake Unit

        385

  • Appendix

    398

    • App 1. Parameter List

      398

    • App 2. Signal Layout Recording Paper

      400

    • App 3. Twin Type Connector : Outline Drawing for 721-2105/026-000(WAGO)

      400

    • App 4. Change of Connector Sets to the Rohs Compatible Products

      401

Advertisement

Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-70B Instruction Manual

Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-70B Instruction Manual (225 pages)

General-Purpose SSCNET III Compatible

Brand: Mitsubishi Electric
|
Category: Controller
|
Size: 8.22 MB

Table of Contents
  • Table of Contents

    14

  • Functions and Configuration

    18

  • Introduction

    18

  • Function Block Diagram

    19

  • Servo Amplifier Standard Specifications

    21

  • Function List

    22

  • Model Code Definition

    23

  • Combination with Servo Motor

    24

  • Structure

    25

  • Parts Identification

    25

  • Removal and Reinstallation of the

    29

  • Configuration Including Auxiliary Equipment

    31

  • Installation

    36

  • Installation Direction and Clearances

    36

  • Keep out Foreign Materials

    37

  • Cable Stress

    37

  • SSCNET Cable Laying

    38

  • Inspection Items

    40

  • Parts Having Service Lives

    40

  • Signals and Wiring

    42

  • Input Power Supply Circuit

    43

  • I/O Signal Connection Example

    47

  • Explanation of Power Supply System

    49

  • Signal Explanations

    49

  • Power-On Sequence

    50

  • CNP1, CNP2, CNP3 Wiring Method

    51

  • Connectors and Signal Arrangements

    57

  • Signal (Device) Explanations

    58

  • Alarm Occurrence Timing Chart

    61

  • Interfaces

    62

  • Internal Connection Diagram

    62

  • Detailed Description of Interfaces

    63

  • Source I/O Interfaces

    65

  • Instructions for the 3M Connector

    66

  • SSCNET Cable Connection

    67

  • Connection of Servo Amplifier and Servo Motor

    69

  • Connection Instructions

    69

  • Power Supply Cable Wiring Diagrams

    70

  • Servo Motor with Electromagnetic Brake

    72

  • Safety Precautions

    72

  • Timing Charts

    73

  • Wiring Diagrams (HF-MP Series HF-KP Series Servo Motor)

    75

  • Grounding

    76

  • Control Axis Selection

    77

  • Startup

    78

  • Switching Power on for the First Time

    78

  • Startup Procedure

    78

  • Wiring Check

    78

  • Surrounding Environment

    78

  • Startup

    79

  • Servo Amplifier Display

    81

  • Test Operation

    84

  • Test Operation Mode

    85

  • Test Operation Mode in MR Configurator

    85

  • Motorless Operation in Controller

    87

  • Parameters

    88

  • Basic Setting Parameters (No.pa )

    88

  • Parameter List

    88

  • Parameter Write Inhibit

    89

  • Selection of Regenerative Brake Option

    90

  • Using Absolute Position Detection System

    90

  • Forced Stop Input Selection

    91

  • Auto Tuning

    92

  • In-Position Range

    93

  • Selection of Servo Motor Rotation Direction

    94

  • Encoder Output Pulse

    94

  • Gain/Filter Parameters (No. PB )

    96

  • Parameter List

    96

  • Detail List

    97

  • Extension Setting Parameters (No. PC )

    104

  • Parameter List

    104

  • List of Details

    105

  • Analog Monitor

    108

  • Alarm History Clear

    110

  • I/O Setting Parameters (No. PD )

    111

  • Parameter List

    111

  • List of Details

    112

  • General Gain Adjustment

    114

  • Different Adjustment Methods

    114

  • Adjustment on a Single Servo Amplifier

    114

  • Adjustment Using Servo Configuration Software

    115

  • Auto Tuning

    116

  • Auto Tuning Mode

    116

  • Auto Tuning Mode Operation

    117

  • Adjustment Procedure by Auto Tuning

    118

  • Response Level Setting in Auto Tuning Mode

    119

  • Manual Mode 1 (Simple Manual Adjustment)

    120

  • Interpolation Mode

    124

  • Differences in Auto Tuning between MELSERVO-J2 and MELSERVO-J2-Super

    125

  • Special Adjustment Functions

    126

  • Function Block Diagram

    126

  • Adaptive Filter

    126

  • Machine Resonance Suppression Filter

    129

  • Advanced Vibration Suppression Control

    131

  • Low-Pass Filter

    135

  • Gain Changing Function

    135

  • Function Block Diagram

    136

  • Parameters

    137

  • Gain Changing Operation

    139

  • Troubleshooting

    142

  • Alarms and Warning List

    142

  • Remedies for Alarms

    143

  • Remedies for Warnings

    148

  • Outline Drawings

    150

  • Servo Amplifier

    150

  • Connector

    156

  • Characteristics

    158

  • Overload Protection Characteristics

    158

  • Power Supply Equipment Capacity and Generated Loss

    159

  • Dynamic Brake Characteristics

    161

  • Cable Flexing Life

    163

  • Inrush Currents at Power-On of Main Circuit and Control Circuit

    163

  • Options and Auxiliary Equipment

    164

  • Cable/Connector Sets

    164

  • Combinations of Cable/Connector Sets

    165

  • Encoder Cable/Connector Sets

    170

  • Motor Power Supply Cables

    179

  • Motor Brake Cables

    180

  • SSCNET Cable

    182

  • Regenerative Brake Options

    183

  • Brake Unit

    190

  • Power Regeneration Converter

    192

  • Junction Terminal Block PS7DW-20V14B-F (Recommended)

    195

  • MR Configurator

    197

  • Battery Unit MR-J3BAT

    198

  • Recommended Wires

    199

  • Fuse Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors

    202

  • Power Factor Improving DC Reactor

    203

  • Power Factor Improving Reactors

    204

  • Relays (Recommended)

    204

  • Surge Absorbers (Recommended)

    205

  • Noise Reduction Techniques

    205

  • Leakage Current Breaker

    211

  • EMC Filter (Recommended)

    213

  • Absolute Position Detection System

    216

  • Features

    216

  • Specifications

    217

  • Battery Installation Procedure

    218

  • Confirmation of Absolute Position Detection Data

    219

  • Appendix

    220

  • App 1. Parameter List

    220

  • App 2. Signal Layout Recording Paper

    221

  • App 3. Twin Type Connector : Outline Drawing for 721-2105/026-000(WAGO)

    222

  • App 4. Combination of Servo Amplifier and Servo Motor

    223

Advertisement

Related Products

  • Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-700B

  • Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-700B4

  • Mitsubishi Electric MR-J3-700T

  • Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-A

  • Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-10B

  • Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-60B

  • Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-10B1

  • Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-200B4

  • Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-500B4

  • Mitsubishi Electric MR-J3W-1010B

Mitsubishi Electric Categories

Air Conditioner
Air Conditioner

Controller

Projector
Projector

Inverter

Heat Pump

More Mitsubishi Electric Manuals

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Mitsubishi Electric Manuals
  4. Amplifier
  5. Melservo MR-J3-70B

Manuals and User Guides for Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-70B. We have 4 Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-70B manuals available for free PDF download: Handbook, Manual, Instruction Manual

Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-70B Handbook

Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-70B Handbook (590 pages)

Brand: Mitsubishi Electric
|
Category: Servo Drives
|
Size: 13.98 MB

Table of Contents
  • Table of Contents

    10

  • Summary of Mr-J3/Mr-J3W Replacement

    18

  • Major Replacement Target Model

    19

    • Servo Amplifier Replacement Target Model

      19

    • Servo Motor Replacement Target Model

      19

  • Flow of Replacement

    20

    • Summary

      20

      • Flow of Review on Replacement

        20

      • Configuration Diagram

        21

      • Changes from MR-J3 Series to MR-J4 Series

        22

      • Changes from MR-J3W Series to MR-J4 Series

        24

    • Review on Replacement

      26

      • Checking the System Prior to Replacement

        26

      • Determination of Base Replacement Model

        26

      • Attachment Compatibility Check

        32

      • Detailed Review on Replacement Model

        32

      • Peripheral Equipment Check

        32

      • Startup Procedure Check

        32

  • Related Materials

    32

    • Catalog

      32

    • Instruction Manual

      32

    • Replacement Tool for Replacing MR-J3 with MR-J4

      33

    • MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website

      33

  • Summary

    33

  • Case Study on Replacement of Mr-J3-_A

    35

    • Review on Replacement Method

      35

    • Replacement Method

      35

  • Differences between Mr-J3-_A_ and Mr-J4-_A

    37

    • Function Comparison Table

      37

    • Comparison of Standard Connection Diagrams

      39

    • List of Corresponding Connectors and Terminal Blocks

      41

    • Comparison of Peripheral Equipment

      46

    • Comparison of Parameters

      47

      • Setting Requisite Parameters Upon Replacement

        47

      • Parameter Comparison List

        49

      • Comparison of Parameter Details

        53

    • Important Points for Replacement

      96

  • Part 3: Review on Replacement of MR-J3-_B_ with MR-J4-_B_ 3- 1 to

    98

    • Case Study on Replacement of Mr-J3-_B

      99

      • Review on Replacement Method

        99

      • Replacement Method

        100

    • Differences between Mr-J3-_B_ and Mr-J4-_B

      103

      • Function Comparison Table

        103

      • Comparison of Networks

        105

      • Comparison of Standard Connection Diagrams

        105

      • List of Corresponding Connectors and Terminal Blocks

        106

      • Comparison of Peripheral Equipment

        109

      • Comparison of Parameters

        109

        • Setting Requisite Parameters Upon Replacement

          110

        • Parameter Comparison List

          111

        • Comparison of Parameter Details

          114

    • Application of Functions

      144

  • Part 4: Replacement of MR-J3W-_B with MR-J4W2-_B 4- 1 to

    146

    • Case Study on Replacement of Mr-J3W-_B

      147

      • Review on Replacement Method

        147

      • Servo Amplifier Replacement Model

        147

      • Replacement Method

        148

    • Differences between Mr-J3W-_B and Mr-J4W2-_B

      151

      • Function Comparison Table

        151

      • Configuration Including Auxiliary Equipment

        153

      • Comparison of Networks

        157

      • Comparison of Standard Connection Diagrams

        157

      • List of Corresponding Connectors and Terminal Blocks

        159

        • Class

          159

        • DC/24 V DC Class

          162

      • Comparison of Peripheral Equipment

        164

      • Comparison of Parameters

        165

        • Setting Requisite Parameters Upon Replacement

          166

        • Parameter Comparison List

          167

        • Comparison of Parameter Details

          171

    • Application of Functions

      194

  • Part 5: Review on Replacement of MR-J3-DU_ with MR-J4-DU_ 5- 1 to

    196

    • Functions and Configuration

      197

      • Differences between MR-J3-DU_ and MR-J4-DU

        197

      • Combination of Converter Unit, Drive Unit, and Servo Motor

        198

      • Configuration Including Peripheral Equipment

        200

    • Installation

      202

      • Installation Direction and Clearances

        202

      • Magnetic Contactor Control Connector (CNP1)

        204

    • Signals and Wiring

      206

      • Comparison of Standard Connection Diagrams

        206

        • When Magnetic Contactor Drive Output Is Enabled (Factory Setting)

          206

        • When Magnetic Contactor Control Connector (CNP1) Is Made Invalid

          211

      • Power-On Sequence

        216

      • List of Corresponding Connectors and Terminal Blocks

        224

      • Converter Unit

        224

        • Converter Unit Parameter Comparison List

          232

        • Converter Unit Comparison of Parameter Details

          233

      • Drive Unit

        236

        • Drive Unit Comparison of Parameter Details

          236

    • Characteristics

      238

      • Overload Protection Characteristics

        238

      • Power Supply Capacity and Generated Loss

        241

      • Inrush Currents at Power-On of Main Circuit/Control Circuit

        243

    • Options and Peripheral Equipment

      244

      • Comparison Table of Cable Option Combinations

        244

        • MR-J3CDL05M (0.5 M) Protection Coordination Cable

          245

      • Selection Example of Wires

        246

        • MR-J3 Series, Power Supply Wire Size

          246

        • MR-J4 Series, Power Supply Wire Size

          248

      • Selection of Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors (Example)

        250

        • MR-J3-DU_ Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors (Recommended)

          250

        • MR-J4-DU_ Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors (Recommended)

          250

      • BU2-(H) Brake Unit

        252

        • Selection

          252

        • Brake Unit Parameter Setting

          253

        • Connection Example

          253

        • Dimensions

          269

      • Regenerative Option

        271

        • Combination and Regenerative Power

          271

      • External Dynamic Brake

        272

        • MR-J3 Series

          272

        • MR-J4 Series

          273

      • Dimensions

        273

        • MR-J3 Series

          273

        • MR-J4 Series

          275

  • Part 6: Common Reference Material 6- 1 to

    278

    • Specification Differences

      279

      • Detailed Specification/Function Differences

        279

      • Servo Amplifier

        281

        • Main Circuit Terminal Block

          281

        • Comparison of Encoder Signals (CN2)

          286

        • Dynamic Brake: Coasting Distance

          287

        • Forced Stop Deceleration Function Selection

          297

        • Servo Setup Software: Setup Software (SETUP221E) => MR Configurator2

          299

        • Servo Amplifier Initializing Time

          300

        • The Pulse Width of the Encoder Z-Phase Pulse

          302

      • Overload Protection Characteristics

        303

      • Comparison of Networks

        310

        • Comparison of Servo System Network Specifications

          310

    • Servo Amplifier Dimensions/Attachment Differences

      312

      • MR-J3 Series => MR-J4 Series Comparison Table of Servo Amplifier Dimensions/Installation Differences

        312

        • General-Purpose Interface/Sscnet Interface 200 V/100 V Class (22 Kw or Less)

          312

        • General-Purpose Interface/Sscnet Interface 400 V Class (22 Kw or Less)

          317

        • General Purpose Interface/Sscnet Interface 200 V Class (30 Kw or More)

          321

        • General Purpose Interface/Sscnet Interface 400 V Class (30 Kw or More)

          323

        • SSCNET Interface (MR-J3W Series)

          325

      • Parameter Conversion

        326

        • Operation Procedure of Parameter Conversion

          326

        • MR-J3-_A_ Parameter Diversion Procedure

          327

        • Parameter Reading from the Servo Amplifier MR- J3-_A

          327

        • Converting the Parameters of MR-J3-_A_ and Writing Them to the MR-J4-_A

          327

        • Servo Amplifier

          327

        • Conversion Rules (MR-J3-_A_ => MR-J4-_A_)

          333

        • Parameters that Need to be Checked after Parameter Conversion

          337

      • MR-J3-_B_ and MR-J3W-_B Parameter Diversion Procedure

        338

        • Changing QD75MH to QD77MS/LD77MS

          339

        • Changing Q17Nhcpu/Q17Ndcpu/Q170Mcpu to Q17Ndscpu/Q170Mscpu(-S1)

          341

        • Conversion Rules (MR-J3-_B_ and MR-J3W-_B => MR-J4-_B_ and MR-J4W2-_B)

          343

        • Parameters that Need to be Checked after Parameter Conversion

          346

    • Common Points to Note

      348

      • Method for Checking the Software Version

        348

        • Checking with MR Configurator2 (SW1DNC-MRC2-E)

          348

    • Communication Function (Mitsubishi General-Purpose Ac Servo Protocol)

      349

      • Structure

        350

        • Configuration Diagram

          350

        • Precautions for Using RS-422/RS-232C/USB Communication Function

          352

      • Communication Specifications

        353

        • Outline of Communication

          353

        • Parameter Setting

          353

      • Protocol

        354

        • Transmission Data Configuration

          354

        • Character Codes

          355

        • Error Codes

          356

        • Checksum

          356

        • Time-Out Processing

          356

        • Retry Processing

          357

        • Initialization

          357

        • Communication Procedure Example

          358

      • Command and Data No. List

        359

        • Reading Command

          359

        • Writing Commands

          365

      • Detailed Explanations of Commands

        367

        • Data Processing

          367

        • Status Display Mode

          369

        • Parameter

          370

        • External I/O Signal Status (DIO Diagnosis)

          374

        • Input Device On/Off

          377

        • Disabling/Enabling I/O Devices (DIO)

          378

        • Input Devices On/Off (Test Operation)

          379

        • Test Operation Mode

          380

        • Output Signal Pin On/Off (Output Signal (DO) Forced Output)

          384

        • Alarm History

          385

        • Current Alarm

          386

        • Other Commands

          387

    • Hf-_P/Ha-_P/Hc-_P Motor Drive

      389

      • MR-J3 Series Motors Which Are Available with MR-J4-_A_ and MR-J4-_B

        389

      • MR-J3 Series Motors Which Are Available with MR-J4W2-_B

        394

    • Application of Functions

      395

      • J3 Compatibility Mode

        395

        • J3 Outline of J3 Compatibility Mode

          395

        • Operation Modes Supported by J3 Compatibility Mode

          395

        • J3 Compatibility Mode Supported Function List

          396

        • Distinguishing J3 Compatibility Mode

          398

        • How to Switch J4 Mode/J3 Compatibility Mode

          399

        • How to Use the J3 Compatibility Mode

          400

        • Cautions for Switching J4 Mode/J3 Compatibility Mode

          401

        • Cautions for the J3 Compatibility Mode

          401

        • Change of Specifications of «J3 Compatibility Mode» Switching Process

          402

        • J3 Extension Function

          405

      • Master-Slave Operation Function

        407

      • Scale Measurement Function

        411

        • Functions and Configuration

          411

        • Scale Measurement Encoder

          413

        • How to Use Scale Measurement Function

          416

  • Part 7: Review on Replacement of Motor 7- 1 to

    418

    • Servo Motor Replacement

      419

      • Servo Motor Substitute Model and Compatibility

        419

    • Comparison of Servo Motor Specifications

      430

      • Comparison of Servo Motor Mounting Dimensions

        430

      • Detailed Comparison of Servo Motor Mounting Dimensions

        436

      • Comparison of Mounting Dimensions for Geared Servo Motors

        439

      • Comparison of Actual Reduction Ratios for Geared Servo Motors

        442

      • Comparison of Moment of Inertia

        443

      • Comparison of Servo Motor Connector Specifications

        454

      • Comparison of Servo Motor Torque Characteristics

        475

  • Part 8: Review on Replacement of Optional Peripheral Equipment 8- 1 to

    486

    • Comparison Table of Regenerative Option Combinations

      487

      • Regenerative Options 200 V Class /100 V Class

        488

        • Combination and Regenerative Power for the MR-J3/MR-J3W Series

          488

        • Combination and Regenerative Power for MR-J4 Series (Replacement Model)

          489

        • External Form Comparison

          490

      • Regenerative Options 400 V Class

        491

        • Combination and Regenerative Power for the MR-J3 Series

          491

        • Combination and Regenerative Power for MR-J4 Series (Replacement Model)

          492

        • External Form Comparison

          493

    • Comparison Table of Dynamic Brake Option Combinations

      495

      • External Form Comparison

        496

    • Comparison Table of Cable Option Combinations

      497

      • Changes from MR-J3 Series to MR-J4 Series

        497

      • Changes from MR-J3W Series to MR-J4W2-_B Servo Amplifier

        499

    • Power Supply Wire Size

      500

      • Selection of Power Supply Wire Size (Example)

        500

        • MR-J3 Series Power Supply Wire Size

          500

        • MR-J4 Series Power Supply Wire Size

          504

        • MR-J3W Series Power Supply Wire Size

          506

        • MR-J4W2-_B Servo Amplifier, Power Supply Wire Size

          508

      • Selection Example of Crimp Terminals

        510

        • MR-J3 Series Crimp Terminal

          510

        • MR-J4 Series Crimp Terminal

          511

      • Selection of Molded-Case Circuit Breaker, Fuse, and Magnetic Contactor (Example)

        512

        • MR-J3 Series, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Fuses, and Magnetic Contactors

          512

        • MR-J4 Series, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Fuses, and Magnetic Contactors (Recommended)

          513

        • MR-J3W Series, No-Fuse Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors

          515

        • MR-J4W2-_B Servo Amplifier, No-Fuse Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors

          516

    • Battery

      518

      • Combinations of Batteries and the Servo Amplifier

        518

      • MR-J3 Series Battery

        519

      • MR-J4 Series Battery

        520

        • Battery Replacement Procedure

          520

        • When Using the MR-BAT6V1SET Battery

          521

        • When Using MR-BAT6V1BJ Battery for Junction Battery Cable

          522

        • When Using MR-BT6VCASE Battery Case

          523

      • MR-J3W Series Battery

        524

        • MR-BTCASE Battery Case and MR-BAT Battery

          524

      • MR-J4W2-_B Servo Amplifier, Battery

        525

        • MR-BT6VCASE Battery Case

          525

        • MR-BAT6V1 Battery

          531

        • MR-BAT6V1SET-A Battery (MR-J4W2-0303B6 Only)

          532

    • Emc Filter (Recommended)

      535

      • MR-J3/MR-J3W/MR-J4 Series EMC Filter (Recommended) (100 V/200 V/400 V Class)

        535

        • Connection Example

          536

        • Dimensions

          537

    • Power Factor Improving Ac Reactor/Power Factor Improving DC Reactor

      541

      • MR-J3 Series Power Factor Improving DC Reactor

        541

      • MR-J3/MR-J3W Series Power Factor Improving AC Reactor

        544

      • MR-J4 Series Power Factor Improving DC Reactors 200 V Class

        546

      • MR-J4 Series Power Factor Improving DC Reactors 400 V Class

        548

      • MR-J4 Series Power Factor Improving AC Reactors 200 V/100 V Class

        550

      • MR-J4 Series Power Factor Improving AC Reactors 400 V Class

        552

    • Setup Software (Setup221E)

      554

      • MR-J3/MR-J3W Series Setup Software (SETUP221E)

        554

        • Specifications

          554

      • MR-J4 Series MR Configurator2

        555

        • Specifications

          555

      • System Configuration

        556

        • Components

          556

        • Connection with Servo Amplifier

          557

        • Precautions for Using USB Communication Function

          557

    • Panel through Attachment

      558

      • MR-J3 Series (MR-J3ACN)

        558

      • MR-J4 Series (MR-J4ACN15K/MR-J3ACN)

        560

  • Part 9: Startup Procedure Manual

    564

Advertisement

Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-70B Manual

Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-70B Manual (500 pages)

Brand: Mitsubishi Electric
|
Category: Servo Drives
|
Size: 13.83 MB

Table of Contents
  • Table of Contents

    10

  • Part 1: Summary of MR-J3/MR-J3W Replacement 1- 1 to

    16

    • Summary of Mr-J3/Mr-J3W Replacement

      16

    • Major Replacement Target Model

      17

      • Servo Amplifier Replacement Target Model

        17

      • Servo Motor Replacement Target Model

        17

    • Flow of Replacement

      18

      • Summary

        18

        • Flow of Review on Replacement

          18

        • Configuration Diagram

          19

        • Changes from MR-J3 Series to MR-J4 Series

          20

        • Changes from MR-J3W Series to MR-J4 Series

          22

      • Review on Replacement

        24

        • Checking the System Prior to Replacement

          24

        • Determination of Base Replacement Model

          24

        • Attachment Compatibility Check

          28

        • Detailed Review on Replacement Model

          28

        • Peripheral Equipment Check

          28

        • Startup Procedure Check

          28

    • Related Materials

      28

      • Catalog

        28

      • Instruction Manual

        28

      • Replacement Tool for Replacing MR-J3 with MR-J4

        29

      • MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website

        29

    • Summary

      29

    • Case Study on Replacement of Mr-J3-_A

      31

      • Review on Replacement Method

        31

      • Replacement Method

        31

    • Differences between Mr-J3-_A_ and Mr-J4-_A

      33

      • Function Comparison Table

        33

      • Comparison of Standard Connection Diagrams

        35

      • List of Corresponding Connectors and Terminal Blocks

        37

      • Comparison of Peripheral Equipment

        42

      • Comparison of Parameters

        43

        • Setting Requisite Parameters Upon Replacement

          43

        • Parameter Comparison List

          45

        • Comparison of Parameter Details

          49

      • Important Points for Replacement

        92

  • Part 3: Review on Replacement of MR-J3-_B_ with MR-J4-_B_ 3- 1 to

    94

    • Case Study on Replacement of Mr-J3-_B

      95

      • Review on Replacement Method

        95

      • Replacement Method

        96

    • Differences between Mr-J3-_B_ and Mr-J4-_B

      99

      • Function Comparison Table

        99

      • Comparison of Networks

        101

      • Comparison of Standard Connection Diagrams

        101

      • List of Corresponding Connectors and Terminal Blocks

        102

      • Comparison of Peripheral Equipment

        105

      • Comparison of Parameters

        106

        • Setting Requisite Parameters Upon Replacement

          107

        • Parameter Comparison List

          108

        • Comparison of Parameter Details

          111

    • Application of Functions

      142

  • Part 4: Replacement of MR-J3W-_B with MR-J4W2-_B 4- 1 to

    144

    • Case Study on Replacement of Mr-J3W-_B

      145

      • Review on Replacement Method

        145

      • Servo Amplifier Replacement Model

        145

      • Replacement Method

        146

    • Differences between Mr-J3W-_B and Mr-J4W2-_B

      149

      • Function Comparison Table

        149

      • Configuration Including Auxiliary Equipment

        150

      • Comparison of Networks

        152

      • Comparison of Standard Connection Diagrams

        152

      • List of Corresponding Connectors and Terminal Blocks

        153

      • Main Circuit Terminal Block

        155

      • MR-J3W-_B => MR-J4W2-_B Comparison Table of Servo Amplifier Dimensions/Installation Differences

        156

        • MR-J3W-_B => MR-J4W2-_B Comparison Table of Servo Amplifier Dimensions

          156

          • Installation Differences

            156

        • Comparison Dimensions

          156

      • Comparison of Peripheral Equipment

        156

      • Comparison of Parameters

        157

        • Setting Requisite Parameters Upon Replacement

          158

        • Parameter Comparison List

          159

        • Comparison of Parameter Details

          163

    • Application of Functions

      185

  • Part 5: Common Reference Material 5- 1 to

    186

    • Specification Differences

      187

      • Detailed Specification/Function Differences

        187

      • Servo Amplifier

        189

        • Main Circuit Terminal Block

          189

        • Comparison of Encoder Signals (CN2)

          193

        • Dynamic Brake: Coasting Distance

          194

        • Forced Stop Deceleration Function Selection

          202

        • Servo Setup Software: Setup Software (SETUP221E) => MR Configurator2

          204

        • Servo Amplifier Initializing Time

          205

        • The Pulse Width of the Encoder Z-Phase Pulse

          207

      • Comparison of Networks

        208

        • Comparison of Servo System Network Specifications

          208

    • Servo Amplifier Dimensions/Attachment Differences

      210

      • MR-J3 Series => MR-J4 Series Comparison Table of Servo Amplifier Dimensions/Installation Differences

        210

        • General-Purpose Interface/Sscnet III Interface 200 V/100 V Class (22 Kw or Less)

          210

        • General-Purpose Interface/Sscnet III Interface 400 V Class (22 Kw or Less)

          215

      • Parameter Conversion

        219

        • Operation Procedure of Parameter Conversion

          219

        • MR-J3-_A_ Parameter Diversion Procedure

          220

        • Parameter Reading from the Servo Amplifier MR- J3-_A

          220

        • Converting the Parameters of MR-J3-_A_ and Writing Them to the MR-J4-_A

          220

          • Servo Amplifier

            220

        • Conversion Rules (MR-J3-_A_ => MR-J4-_A_)

          226

        • Parameters that Need to be Checked after Parameter Conversion

          230

      • MR-J3-_B_ and MR-J3W-_B Parameter Diversion Procedure

        231

        • Changing QD75MH to QD77MS/LD77MS

          232

        • Changing Q17Nhcpu/Q17Ndcpu/Q170Mcpu to Q17Ndscpu/Q170Mscpu(-S1)

          234

        • Conversion Rules (MR-J3-_B_ and MR-J3W-_B => MR-J4-_B_ and MR-J4W2-_B)

          236

        • Parameters that Need to be Checked after Parameter Conversion

          239

    • Common Points to Note

      241

      • Method for Checking the Software Version

        241

        • Checking with MR Configurator2 (SW1DNC-MRC2-E)

          241

    • Communication Function (Mitsubishi General-Purpose Ac Servo Protocol)

      242

      • Structure

        243

        • Configuration Diagram

          243

        • Precautions for Using RS-422/RS-232C/USB Communication Function

          245

      • Communication Specifications

        246

        • Outline of Communication

          246

        • Parameter Setting

          246

      • Protocol

        247

        • Transmission Data Configuration

          247

        • Character Codes

          248

        • Error Codes

          249

        • Checksum

          249

        • Time-Out Processing

          249

        • Retry Processing

          250

        • Initialization

          250

        • Communication Procedure Example

          251

      • Command and Data No. List

        252

        • Reading Command

          252

        • Writing Commands

          258

      • Detailed Explanations of Commands

        260

        • Data Processing

          260

        • Status Display Mode

          262

        • Parameter

          263

        • External I/O Signal Status (DIO Diagnosis)

          267

        • Input Device On/Off

          270

        • Disabling/Enabling I/O Devices (DIO)

          271

        • Input Devices On/Off (Test Operation)

          272

        • Test Operation Mode

          273

        • Output Signal Pin On/Off (Output Signal (DO) Forced Output)

          277

        • Alarm History

          278

        • Current Alarm

          279

        • Other Commands

          280

    • Hf-_P/Ha-_P/Hc-_P Motor Drive

      282

      • MR-J3 Series Motors Which Are Available with MR-J4-_A_ and MR-J4-_B

        282

    • Application of Functions

      285

      • J3 Compatibility Mode

        285

        • J3 Outline of J3 Compatibility Mode

          285

        • Operation Modes Supported by J3 Compatibility Mode

          285

        • J3 Compatibility Mode Supported Function List

          286

        • How to Switch J4 Mode/J3 Compatibility Mode

          288

        • How to Use the J3 Compatibility Mode

          289

        • Cautions for Switching J4 Mode/J3 Compatibility Mode

          290

        • Cautions for the J3 Compatibility Mode

          290

        • Change of Specifications of «J3 Compatibility Mode» Switching Process

          291

        • Extension Function

          294

      • Master-Slave Operation Function

        351

      • Scale Measurement Function

        355

        • Functions and Configuration

          355

        • Scale Measurement Encoder

          357

        • How to Use Scale Measurement Function

          360

    • Servo Motor Replacement

      363

      • Servo Motor Substitute Model and Compatibility

        363

    • Comparison of Servo Motor Specifications

      373

      • Comparison of Servo Motor Mounting Dimensions

        373

      • Detailed Comparison of Servo Motor Mounting Dimensions

        378

      • Comparison of Mounting Dimensions for Geared Servo Motors (for High Precision Applications: HC-RP_G5 → HG-SR_G5)

        379

      • Comparison of Actual Reduction Ratios for Geared Servo Motors

        381

      • Comparison of Moment of Inertia

        382

      • Comparison of Servo Motor Connector Specifications

        393

      • Comparison of Servo Motor Torque Characteristics

        414

    • Comparison Table of Regenerative Option Combinations

      425

      • Regenerative Options (200 V Class /100 V Class)

        426

        • Combination and Regenerative Power for the MR-J3/MR-J3W Series

          426

        • Combination and Regenerative Power for MR-J4 Series (Replacement Model)

          427

        • External Form Comparison

          428

      • Regenerative Options (400 V Class)

        429

        • Combination and Regenerative Power for the MR-J3 Series

          429

        • Combination and Regenerative Power for MR-J4 Series (Replacement Model)

          430

        • External Form Comparison

          431

    • Comparison Table of Dynamic Brake Option Combinations

      432

      • External Form Comparison

        432

    • Comparison Table of Cable Option Combinations

      433

      • Changes from MR-J3 Series to MR-J4 Series

        433

      • Changes from MR-J3W Series to MR-J4W2-_B Servo Amplifier

        435

    • Power Supply Wire Size

      436

      • Selection of Power Supply Wire Size (Example)

        436

        • MR-J3 Series Power Supply Wire Size

          436

        • MR-J4 Series Power Supply Wire Size

          440

        • MR-J3W Series Power Supply Wire Size

          442

        • MR-J4W2-_B Servo Amplifier, Power Supply Wire Size

          443

      • Selection Example of Crimp Terminals

        444

        • MR-J3 Series Crimp Terminal

          444

        • MR-J4 Series Crimp Terminal

          445

      • Selection of Molded-Case Circuit Breaker, Fuse, and Magnetic Contactor (Example)

        446

        • MR-J3 Series, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Fuses, and Magnetic Contactors

          446

        • MR-J4 Series, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Fuses, and Magnetic Contactors (Recommended)

          447

        • MR-J3W Series, No-Fuse Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors

          448

        • MR-J4W2-_B Servo Amplifier, No-Fuse Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors

          449

    • Battery

      450

      • Combinations of Batteries and the Servo Amplifier

        450

      • MR-J3 Series Battery

        451

      • MR-J4 Series Battery

        452

        • Battery Replacement Procedure

          452

        • When Using the MR-BAT6V1SET Battery

          453

        • When Using MR-BAT6V1BJ Battery for Junction Battery Cable

          454

        • When Using MR-BT6VCASE Battery Case

          455

      • MR-J3W Series Battery

        456

        • MR-BTCASE Battery Case and MR-BAT Battery

          456

      • MR-J4W2-_B Servo Amplifier, Battery

        457

        • MR-BT6VCASE Battery Case

          457

        • MR-BAT6V1 Battery

          463

    • Emc Filter (Recommended)

      464

      • MR-J3/MR-J3W/MR-J4 Series EMC Filter (Recommended) (100 V/200 V/400 V Class)

        464

        • Connection Example

          465

        • Dimensions

          466

    • Power Factor Improving Ac Reactor/Power Factor Improving DC Reactor

      470

      • MR-J3 Series Power Factor Improving DC Reactor

        470

      • MR-J3/MR-J3W Series Power Factor Improving AC Reactor

        472

      • MR-J4 Series Power Factor Improving DC Reactors (200 V Class)

        474

      • MR-J4 Series Power Factor Improving DC Reactors (400 V Class)

        476

      • MR-J4 Series Power Factor Improving AC Reactors (200 V/100 V Class)

        478

      • MR-J4 Series Power Factor Improving AC Reactors (400 V Class)

        480

    • Setup Software (Setup221E)

      482

      • MR-J3/MR-J3W Series Setup Software (SETUP221E)

        482

        • Specifications

          482

      • MR-J4 Series MR Configurator2

        483

        • Specifications

          483

      • System Configuration

        484

        • Components

          484

        • Connection with Servo Amplifier

          485

        • Precautions for Using USB Communication Function

          485

    • Panel through Attachment

      486

      • MR-J3 Series (MR-J3ACN)

        486

      • MR-J4 Series (MR-J4ACN15K/MR-J3ACN)

        488

Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-70B Instruction Manual

Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-70B Instruction Manual (408 pages)

Melservo J3 Series General-Purpose AC Servo SSCNET Compatible

Brand: Mitsubishi Electric
|
Category: Amplifier
|
Size: 17.73 MB

Table of Contents
  • Safety Instructions

    2

  • Table of Contents

    16

  • Functions and Configuration

    22

    • Introduction

      22

    • Function Block Diagram

      23

  • Servo Amplifier

    23

    • Servo Amplifier Standard Specifications

      26

    • Function List

      28

    • Model Code Definition

      29

    • Combination with Servo Motor

      31

    • Structure

      32

      • Parts Identification

        32

    • Connector

      32

      • Removal and Reinstallation of the

        39

    • Configuration Including Auxiliary Equipment

      42

    • Installation

      50

    • Installation Direction and Clearances

      50

    • Keep out Foreign Materials

      52

    • Cable Stress

      52

    • SSCNET Cable Laying

      53

    • Inspection Items

      55

    • Parts Having Service Lives

      55

  • Signals and Wiring

    56

    • Input Power Supply Circuit

      57

    • I/O Signal Connection Example

      65

    • Explanation of Power Supply System

      67

      • Signal Explanations

        67

      • Power-On Sequence

        68

      • CNP1, CNP2, CNP3 Wiring Method

        69

    • Connectors and Signal Arrangements

      78

    • Signal (Device) Explanations

      79

    • Alarm Occurrence Timing Chart

      82

    • Interfaces

      83

      • Internal Connection Diagram

        83

      • Detailed Description of Interfaces

        84

      • Source I/O Interfaces

        86

    • Treatment of Cable Shield External Conductor

      87

    • SSCNET Cable Connection

      88

    • Connection of Servo Amplifier and Servo Motor

      90

      • Connection Instructions

        90

      • Power Supply Cable Wiring Diagrams

        91

    • Servo Motor with Electromagnetic Brake

      101

      • Safety Precautions

        101

      • Timing Charts

        102

      • Wiring Diagrams (HF-MP Series HF-KP Series Servo Motor)

        104

    • Grounding

      105

    • Control Axis Selection

      106

    • Switching Power on for the First Time

      108

      • Startup Procedure

        108

      • Wiring Check

        109

      • Surrounding Environment

        110

    • Start up

      111

    • Servo Amplifier Display

      112

    • Test Operation

      114

    • Test Operation Mode

      115

      • Test Operation Mode in MR Configurator

        115

      • Motorless Operation in Controller

        117

      • Basic Setting Parameters (No.pa )

        118

      • Parameter List

        118

      • Parameter Write Inhibit

        119

      • Selection of Regenerative Option

        120

      • Using Absolute Position Detection System

        121

      • Forced Stop Input Selection

        121

    • Auto Tuning

      122

      • In-Position Range

        123

      • Selection of Servo Motor Rotation Direction

        124

      • Encoder Output Pulse

        124

        • Gain/Filter Parameters (No. PB )

          126

        • Parameter List

          126

      • Detail List

        127

      • Extension Setting Parameters (No. PC )

        134

      • Parameter List

        134

      • List of Details

        135

      • Analog Monitor

        138

      • Alarm History Clear

        140

      • I/O Setting Parameters (No. PD )

        141

      • Parameter List

        141

      • List of Details

        142

    • Different Adjustment Methods

      144

      • Adjustment on a Single Servo Amplifier

        144

      • Adjustment Using MR Configurator

        145

      • Auto Tuning Mode

        146

      • Auto Tuning Mode Operation

        147

      • Adjustment Procedure by Auto Tuning

        148

      • Response Level Setting in Auto Tuning Mode

        149

    • Manual Mode 1 (Simple Manual Adjustment)

      150

    • Interpolation Mode

      154

    • Differences between MELSERVO-J2-Super and MELSERVO-J3 in Auto Tuning

      155

    • Adaptive Filter

      156

    • Function Block Diagram

      156

    • Machine Resonance Suppression Filter

      159

    • Advanced Vibration Suppression Control

      161

    • Low-Pass Filter

      165

    • Gain Changing Function

      165

      • Applications

        165

      • Function Block Diagram

        166

      • Parameters

        167

      • Gain Changing Operation

        169

    • Troubleshooting

      172

    • Alarms and Warning List

      172

    • Remedies for Alarms

      173

  • Troubleshooting

    174

    • Remedies for Warnings

      179

    • Outline Drawings

      182

    • Characteristics

      194

      • Overload Protection Characteristics

        194

    • Power Supply Equipment Capacity and Generated Loss

      196

      • Dynamic Brake Characteristics

        199

      • Dynamic Brake Operation

        199

      • The Dynamic Brake at the Load Inertia Moment

        201

    • Cable Flexing Life

      202

      • Inrush Currents at Power-On of Main Circuit and Control Circuit

        203

    • Cable/Connector Sets

      204

      • Combinations of Cable/Connector Sets

        205

      • Encoder Cable/Connector Sets

        211

      • Motor Power Supply Cables

        220

      • Motor Brake Cables

        221

      • SSCNET Cable

        222

    • Regenerative Options

      224

    • Options

      234

      • FR-BU2-(H) Brake Unit

        237

      • Brake Unit Parameter Setting

        238

      • Selection

        238

      • Connection Example

        239

      • Outline Dimension Drawings

        246

    • Power Regeneration Converter

      248

    • Power Regeneration Common Converter

      251

      • External Dynamic Brake

        259

    • Junction Terminal Block PS7DW-20V14B-F (Recommended)

      264

    • MR Configurator

      266

    • Battery MR-J3BAT

      267

    • Heat Sink Outside Mounting Attachment (MR-J3ACN)

      268

      • Recommended Wires

        270

    • No-Fuse Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors

      274

      • Power Factor Improving DC Reactor

        274

    • Power Factor Improving AC Reactors

      276

    • Relays (Recommended)

      277

    • Surge Absorbers (Recommended)

      278

    • Noise Reduction Techniques

      278

      • Line Noise Filter (FR-BLF)

        283

      • Leakage Current Breaker

        285

      • EMC Filter (Recommended)

        287

    • Features

      292

    • Specifications

      293

    • Battery Installation Procedure

      294

    • Confirmation of Absolute Position Detection Data

      296

    • Functions and Menus

      298

      • Function Block Diagram

        299

      • Packing List

        301

      • Standard Specifications

        302

      • Model Definition

        305

      • Combinations of Converter Units, Drive Unit and Servo Motors

        306

      • Parts Identification

        307

      • Removal and Reinstallation of the Terminal Block Cover

        310

      • Servo System with Auxiliary Equipment

        316

  • Installation

    317

    • Installation Direction and Clearances

      318

      • Inspection

        319

      • Signals and Wiring

        320

    • Magnetic Contactor Control Connector (CNP1)

      321

    • Input Power Supply Circuit

      323

    • Terminal

      328

    • How to Use the Connection Bars

      329

      • Connectors and Signal Arrangements

        330

      • Converter Unit Signal (Device) Explanations

        332

      • Timing Chart

        334

    • Servo Motor Side Details

      342

    • Display Section and Operation Section of the Converter Unit

      344

      • Parameter Mode

        349

    • Parameters for Converter Unit

      350

      • Parameter List

        350

      • List of Details

        351

      • Converter Unit

        352

        • Troubleshooting

          352

        • Outline Drawings

          359

        • Overload Protection Characteristics

          362

        • Power Supply Equipment Capacity and Generated Loss

          363

        • Dynamic Brake Characteristics

          364

        • Inrush Currents at Power-On of Main Circuit and Control Circuit

          366

    • Options

      367

      • External Dynamic Brake

        374

      • Recommended Wires

        377

      • No-Fuse Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors

        378

      • Power Factor Improving DC Reactor

        379

      • Leakage Current Breaker

        381

      • EMC Filter (Recommended)

        383

      • FR-BU2-(H) Brake Unit

        385

  • Appendix

    398

    • App 1. Parameter List

      398

    • App 2. Signal Layout Recording Paper

      400

    • App 3. Twin Type Connector : Outline Drawing for 721-2105/026-000(WAGO)

      400

    • App 4. Change of Connector Sets to the Rohs Compatible Products

      401

Advertisement

Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-70B Instruction Manual

Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-70B Instruction Manual (225 pages)

General-Purpose SSCNET III Compatible

Brand: Mitsubishi Electric
|
Category: Controller
|
Size: 8.22 MB

Table of Contents
  • Table of Contents

    14

  • Functions and Configuration

    18

  • Introduction

    18

  • Function Block Diagram

    19

  • Servo Amplifier Standard Specifications

    21

  • Function List

    22

  • Model Code Definition

    23

  • Combination with Servo Motor

    24

  • Structure

    25

  • Parts Identification

    25

  • Removal and Reinstallation of the

    29

  • Configuration Including Auxiliary Equipment

    31

  • Installation

    36

  • Installation Direction and Clearances

    36

  • Keep out Foreign Materials

    37

  • Cable Stress

    37

  • SSCNET Cable Laying

    38

  • Inspection Items

    40

  • Parts Having Service Lives

    40

  • Signals and Wiring

    42

  • Input Power Supply Circuit

    43

  • I/O Signal Connection Example

    47

  • Explanation of Power Supply System

    49

  • Signal Explanations

    49

  • Power-On Sequence

    50

  • CNP1, CNP2, CNP3 Wiring Method

    51

  • Connectors and Signal Arrangements

    57

  • Signal (Device) Explanations

    58

  • Alarm Occurrence Timing Chart

    61

  • Interfaces

    62

  • Internal Connection Diagram

    62

  • Detailed Description of Interfaces

    63

  • Source I/O Interfaces

    65

  • Instructions for the 3M Connector

    66

  • SSCNET Cable Connection

    67

  • Connection of Servo Amplifier and Servo Motor

    69

  • Connection Instructions

    69

  • Power Supply Cable Wiring Diagrams

    70

  • Servo Motor with Electromagnetic Brake

    72

  • Safety Precautions

    72

  • Timing Charts

    73

  • Wiring Diagrams (HF-MP Series HF-KP Series Servo Motor)

    75

  • Grounding

    76

  • Control Axis Selection

    77

  • Startup

    78

  • Switching Power on for the First Time

    78

  • Startup Procedure

    78

  • Wiring Check

    78

  • Surrounding Environment

    78

  • Startup

    79

  • Servo Amplifier Display

    81

  • Test Operation

    84

  • Test Operation Mode

    85

  • Test Operation Mode in MR Configurator

    85

  • Motorless Operation in Controller

    87

  • Parameters

    88

  • Basic Setting Parameters (No.pa )

    88

  • Parameter List

    88

  • Parameter Write Inhibit

    89

  • Selection of Regenerative Brake Option

    90

  • Using Absolute Position Detection System

    90

  • Forced Stop Input Selection

    91

  • Auto Tuning

    92

  • In-Position Range

    93

  • Selection of Servo Motor Rotation Direction

    94

  • Encoder Output Pulse

    94

  • Gain/Filter Parameters (No. PB )

    96

  • Parameter List

    96

  • Detail List

    97

  • Extension Setting Parameters (No. PC )

    104

  • Parameter List

    104

  • List of Details

    105

  • Analog Monitor

    108

  • Alarm History Clear

    110

  • I/O Setting Parameters (No. PD )

    111

  • Parameter List

    111

  • List of Details

    112

  • General Gain Adjustment

    114

  • Different Adjustment Methods

    114

  • Adjustment on a Single Servo Amplifier

    114

  • Adjustment Using Servo Configuration Software

    115

  • Auto Tuning

    116

  • Auto Tuning Mode

    116

  • Auto Tuning Mode Operation

    117

  • Adjustment Procedure by Auto Tuning

    118

  • Response Level Setting in Auto Tuning Mode

    119

  • Manual Mode 1 (Simple Manual Adjustment)

    120

  • Interpolation Mode

    124

  • Differences in Auto Tuning between MELSERVO-J2 and MELSERVO-J2-Super

    125

  • Special Adjustment Functions

    126

  • Function Block Diagram

    126

  • Adaptive Filter

    126

  • Machine Resonance Suppression Filter

    129

  • Advanced Vibration Suppression Control

    131

  • Low-Pass Filter

    135

  • Gain Changing Function

    135

  • Function Block Diagram

    136

  • Parameters

    137

  • Gain Changing Operation

    139

  • Troubleshooting

    142

  • Alarms and Warning List

    142

  • Remedies for Alarms

    143

  • Remedies for Warnings

    148

  • Outline Drawings

    150

  • Servo Amplifier

    150

  • Connector

    156

  • Characteristics

    158

  • Overload Protection Characteristics

    158

  • Power Supply Equipment Capacity and Generated Loss

    159

  • Dynamic Brake Characteristics

    161

  • Cable Flexing Life

    163

  • Inrush Currents at Power-On of Main Circuit and Control Circuit

    163

  • Options and Auxiliary Equipment

    164

  • Cable/Connector Sets

    164

  • Combinations of Cable/Connector Sets

    165

  • Encoder Cable/Connector Sets

    170

  • Motor Power Supply Cables

    179

  • Motor Brake Cables

    180

  • SSCNET Cable

    182

  • Regenerative Brake Options

    183

  • Brake Unit

    190

  • Power Regeneration Converter

    192

  • Junction Terminal Block PS7DW-20V14B-F (Recommended)

    195

  • MR Configurator

    197

  • Battery Unit MR-J3BAT

    198

  • Recommended Wires

    199

  • Fuse Breakers, Fuses, Magnetic Contactors

    202

  • Power Factor Improving DC Reactor

    203

  • Power Factor Improving Reactors

    204

  • Relays (Recommended)

    204

  • Surge Absorbers (Recommended)

    205

  • Noise Reduction Techniques

    205

  • Leakage Current Breaker

    211

  • EMC Filter (Recommended)

    213

  • Absolute Position Detection System

    216

  • Features

    216

  • Specifications

    217

  • Battery Installation Procedure

    218

  • Confirmation of Absolute Position Detection Data

    219

  • Appendix

    220

  • App 1. Parameter List

    220

  • App 2. Signal Layout Recording Paper

    221

  • App 3. Twin Type Connector : Outline Drawing for 721-2105/026-000(WAGO)

    222

  • App 4. Combination of Servo Amplifier and Servo Motor

    223

Advertisement

Related Products

  • Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-700B

  • Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-700B4

  • Mitsubishi Electric MR-J3-700T

  • Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-A

  • Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-10B

  • Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-60B

  • Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-10B1

  • Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-200B4

  • Mitsubishi Electric Melservo MR-J3-500B4

  • Mitsubishi Electric MR-J3W-1010B

Mitsubishi Electric Categories

Air Conditioner
Air Conditioner

Controller

Projector
Projector

Inverter

Heat Pump

More Mitsubishi Electric Manuals

doza писал(а):

TEB писал(а):, я не понял вопроса.

Мне кажется что вы не то используете.
HF-SP202 работает с MR-J3-200 HF-SP или MR-J3-350 HC-UP
Моё суждение основано на таблицу в инструкции.
Изображение

Вы не верно поняли таблицу. MR-J3-200 HF-SP — такого нет вообще.
HF-SP202 — это двигатель.
MR-J3-200 — это сервоусилитель. М.б. MR-J3-200А, MR-J3-200В, MR-J3-200S, MR-J3-200A-EtherCAT, MR-J3-200T в зависимости от типа управления.

Если возвращаться к вашей таблице. Находите столбец HF-SP — это тип двигателя. В нём находите строку с указанием мощности двигателя (202). По этой строке двигаетесь в первый столбец и берёте от туда номер в обозначении для сервопривода (200), подходящего для двигателя . Получаете обозначение привода MR-J3-200…. (дальше буквы в зависимости от требуемого типа управления и напряжения питания).

doza, вы вообще работали с сервоприводами Митсубиси?

TEB писал(а):в режиме задания (если честно, другие режимы не проверялись, нужен только этот). Сигнал приходит, счетчик импульсов бежит, но не обрабатывается. Вообще сервоусилитель себя странно ведёт. Обычно он в режиме задания ведёт себя так как описал (импульсы видит, но не реагирует на них), два раза картина стала обратная: импульсы не видит (сервисный софт не показывает что счётчик инкрементируется, значение не меняется), но вал при этом выставляется в нужное положение. Один раз это произошло на ровном месте когда привод никто не трогал (отошли от стола совсем, вернулись — видим что вал-то перемещается), второй раз после снятия и подачи питания. Какие именно действия к этому привели — совершенно неясно, повторить не удалось.

Так не бывает. Чтобы привод ехал сам по себе без команды. Проверяете ли вы сигнал RD? Что со входами EMG, LSP, LSN? (правда при их срабатывании серво без RST никуда не поедет). TL?
У нас тут была ситуация — даётся команда — не едет. Не поворачивается и всё тут. Выяснилось — давали маленькое задание (на пробных то движениях, первых), а электронная редукция его ещё больше убивало. То есть он ехал на самом деле, всё как просили. Отрабатывал. Только глазом это было не заметно. Может и вы так «отходили от стола»?
Или другой случай: Аааа, заказчик кричит, говно никуда не едет, целый день возились и так и не запустили, всё менять (действительно целый день периферию ихнею подключали, только под вечер попробовали команду дать). На следующий день пришли, три параметра прописали, JOG дали- всё поехало. Минут 15. Аааа, заказчик кричит, едет, ура

Евгений, что вы имеет под «в режиме задания (если честно, другие режимы не проверялись, нужен только этот)». Что это за режим? И какие другие?

Вообще, Евгений, железка то простая — 3 входа, 4 выхода, 5 параметров. Кто её вам подбирал? Кто покупал? Кто продумывал как подключать? Или как обычно «с импортным оборудованием пришла»?

Alex.

Loading…

General-Purpose AC Servo

J3 Series

Built-in Positioning Function

MODEL

MR-J3-T

SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL (CC-Link)

E

Safety Instructions

(Always read these instructions before using the equipment.)

Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the servo amplifier and servo motor until you have read through this Instruction Manual, Installation guide, Servo motor Instruction Manual (Vol.2) and appended documents carefully and can use the equipment correctly. Do not use the servo amplifier and servo motor until you have a full knowledge of the equipment, safety information and instructions.

In this Instruction Manual, the safety instruction levels are classified into «WARNING» and «CAUTION».

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight injury to personnel or may cause physical

damage.

Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to conditions. Please follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personnel safety.

What must not be done and what must be done are indicated by the following diagrammatic symbols.

: Indicates what must not be done. For example, «No Fire» is indicated by . : Indicates what must be done. For example, grounding is indicated by .

In this Instruction Manual, instructions at a lower level than the above, instructions for other functions, and so on are classified into «POINT».

After reading this installation guide, always keep it accessible to the operator.

A — 1

1. To prevent electric shock, note the following

WARNING

Before wiring or inspection, turn off the power and wait for 15 minutes or more until the charge lamp turns off. Then, confirm that the voltage between P( ) and N( ) is safe with a voltage tester and others. Otherwise, an electric shock may occur. In addition, always confirm from the front of the servo amplifier, whether the charge lamp is off or not.

Connect the servo amplifier and servo motor to ground.

Any person who is involved in wiring and inspection should be fully competent to do the work.

Do not attempt to wire the servo amplifier and servo motor until they have been installed. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.

Operate the switches with dry hand to prevent an electric shock.

The cables should not be damaged, stressed, loaded, or pinched. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.

During power-on or operation, do not open the front cover of the servo amplifier. You may get an electric shock.

Do not operate the servo amplifier with the front cover removed. High-voltage terminals and charging area are exposed and you may get an electric shock.

Except for wiring or periodic inspection, do not remove the front cover even of the servo amplifier if the power is off. The servo amplifier is charged and you may get an electric shock.

2. To prevent fire, note the following

CAUTION

Install the servo amplifier, servo motor and regenerative resistor on incombustible material. Installing them directly or close to combustibles will lead to a fire.

Always connect a magnetic contactor (MC) between the main circuit power supply and L1, L2, and L3 of the servo amplifier, and configure the wiring to be able to shut down the power supply on the side of the servo amplifier’s power supply. If a magnetic contactor (MC) is not connected, continuous flow of a large current may cause a fire when the servo amplifier malfunctions.

When a regenerative resistor is used, use an alarm signal to switch main power off. Otherwise, a regenerative transistor fault or the like may overheat the regenerative resistor, causing a fire.

3. To prevent injury, note the follow

CAUTION

Only the voltage specified in the Instruction Manual should be applied to each terminal, Otherwise, a burst, damage, etc. may occur.

Connect the terminals correctly to prevent a burst, damage, etc.

Ensure that polarity ( , ) is correct. Otherwise, a burst, damage, etc. may occur.

Take safety measures, e.g. provide covers, to prevent accidental contact of hands and parts (cables, etc.) with the servo amplifier heat sink, regenerative resistor, servo motor, etc. since they may be hot while power is on or for some time after power-off. Their temperatures may be high and you may get burnt or a parts may damaged.

During operation, never touch the rotating parts of the servo motor. Doing so can cause injury.

A — 2

4. Additional instructions

The following instructions should also be fully noted. Incorrect handling may cause a fault, injury, electric shock, etc.

(1) Transportation and installation

CAUTION

Transport the products correctly according to their weights.

Stacking in excess of the specified number of products is not allowed. Do not carry the servo motor by the cables, shaft or encoder.

Do not hold the front cover to transport the servo amplifier. The servo amplifier may drop. Install the servo amplifier in a load-bearing place in accordance with the Instruction Manual. Do not climb or stand on servo equipment. Do not put heavy objects on equipment.

The servo amplifier and servo motor must be installed in the specified direction.

Leave specified clearances between the servo amplifier and control enclosure walls or other equipment.

Do not install or operate the servo amplifier and servo motor which has been damaged or has any parts missing.

Provide adequate protection to prevent screws and other conductive matter, oil and other combustible matter from entering the servo amplifier and servo motor.

Do not drop or strike servo amplifier or servo motor. Isolate from all impact loads. When you keep or use it, please fulfill the following environmental conditions.

Environment

Conditions

Servo amplifier

Servo motor

Ambient

In operation

[

]

0 to 55 (non-freezing)

0 to

40 (non-freezing)

[

]

32 to 131 (non-freezing)

32 to 104 (non-freezing)

temperature

In storage

[

]

20 to 65 (non-freezing)

15 to 70 (non-freezing)

[

]

4 to 149 (non-freezing)

5 to 158 (non-freezing)

Ambient

In operation

90%RH or less (non-condensing)

80%RH or less (non-condensing)

humidity

In storage

90%RH or less (non-condensing)

Ambience

Indoors (no direct sunlight) Free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt

Altitude

Max. 1000m (3280 ft) above sea level

HF-MP series

HF-KP series

X

Y: 49

HF-SP51

81

HF-SP52 to 152

X

Y: 24.5

HF-SP524 to 1524

HC-RP Series

HC-UP72

152

HF-SP121

201

HF-SP202 352

X: 24.5 Y: 49

HF-SP2024

3524

HC-UP202 to 502

(Note)

HF-SP301

421

HF-SP502 702

X: 24.5 Y: 29.4

[m/s2]

5.9 or less

HF-SP5024

7024

Vibration

HC-LP52 to 152

X: 9.8 Y: 24.5

HC-LP202 to 302

X: 19.6 Y: 49

HA-LP601 to 12K1

HA-LP701M to 15K1M

HA-LP502 to 22K2

HA-LP6014 to 12K14

X: 11.7 Y: 29.4

HA-LP701M4 to 15K1M4

HA-LP11K24 to 22K24

HA-LP15K1 to 25K1

HA-LP37K1M

X

Y: 9.8

HA-LP15K14 to 20K14

HA-LP22K1M4

Note. Except the servo motor with a reduction gear.

Securely attach the servo motor to the machine. If attach insecurely, the servo motor may come off during operation.

The servo motor with a reduction gear must be installed in the specified direction to prevent oil leakage.

Take safety measures, e.g. provide covers, to prevent accidental access to the rotating parts of the servo motor during operation.

Never hit the servo motor or shaft, especially when coupling the servo motor to the machine. The encoder may become faulty.

Do not subject the servo motor shaft to more than the permissible load. Otherwise, the shaft may break. When the equipment has been stored for an extended period of time, consult Mitsubishi.

A — 3

(2) Wiring

CAUTION

Wire the equipment correctly and securely. Otherwise, the servo motor may operate unexpectedly.

Do not install a power capacitor, surge absorber or radio noise filter (FR-BIF-(H) option) between the servo motor and servo amplifier.

Connect the wires to the correct phase terminals (U, V, W) of the servo amplifier and servo motor. Not doing so may cause unexpected operation.

Connect the servo motor power terminal (U, V, W) to the servo motor power input terminal (U, V, W) directly. Do not let a magnetic contactor, etc. intervene.

Servo amplifier

U

Servo motor

Servo amplifier

U

Servo motor

U

U

V

V

V

M

V

M

W

W

W

W

Do not connect AC power directly to the servo motor. Otherwise, a fault may occur.

The surge absorbing diode installed on the DC output signal relay of the servo amplifier must be wired in the specified direction. Otherwise, the forced stop (EMG) and other protective circuits may not operate.

Servo amplifier

Servo amplifier

24VDC

24VDC

DOCOM

DOCOM

DICOM

DICOM

RA

RA

When the cable is not tightened enough to the terminal block (connector), the cable or terminal block (connector) may generate heat because of the poor contact. Be sure to tighten the cable with specified torque.

(3) Test run adjustment

CAUTION

Before operation, check the parameter settings. Improper settings may cause some machines to perform unexpected operation.

The parameter settings must not be changed excessively. Operation will be insatiable.

A — 4

(4) Usage

CAUTION

Provide an external emergency stop circuit to ensure that operation can be stopped and power switched off immediately.

Any person who is involved in disassembly and repair should be fully competent to do the work.

Before resetting an alarm, make sure that the run signal of the servo amplifier is off to prevent an accident. A sudden restart is made if an alarm is reset with the run signal on.

Do not modify the equipment.

Use a noise filter, etc. to minimize the influence of electromagnetic interference, which may be caused by electronic equipment used near the servo amplifier.

Burning or breaking a servo amplifier may cause a toxic gas. Do not burn or break a servo amplifier. Use the servo amplifier with the specified servo motor.

The electromagnetic brake on the servo motor is designed to hold the motor shaft and should not be used for ordinary braking.

For such reasons as service life and mechanical structure (e.g. where a ball screw and the servo motor are coupled via a timing belt), the electromagnetic brake may not hold the motor shaft. To ensure safety, install a stopper on the machine side.

(5) Corrective actions

CAUTION

When it is assumed that a hazardous condition may take place at the occur due to a power failure or a product fault, use a servo motor with an electromagnetic brake or an external brake mechanism for the purpose of prevention.

Configure the electromagnetic brake circuit so that it is activated not only by the servo amplifier signals but also by an external forced stop (EMG).

Contacts must be open when servo-off, when an trouble (ALM) and when an electromagnetic brake interlock (MBR).

Circuit must be opened during forced stop (EMG).

SON RA EMG

24VDC

Electromagnetic brake

When any alarm has occurred, eliminate its cause, ensure safety, and deactivate the alarm before restarting operation.

When power is restored after an instantaneous power failure, keep away from the machine because the machine may be restarted suddenly (design the machine so that it is secured against hazard if restarted).

(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement

CAUTION

With age, the electrolytic capacitor of the servo amplifier will deteriorate. To prevent a secondary accident due to a fault, it is recommended to replace the electrolytic capacitor every 10 years when used in general environment. Please consult our sales representative.

A — 5

(7) General instruction

To illustrate details, the equipment in the diagrams of this Specifications and Instruction Manual may have been drawn without covers and safety guards. When the equipment is operated, the covers and safety guards must be installed as specified. Operation must be performed in accordance with this Specifications and Instruction Manual.

About processing of waste

When you discard servo amplifier, a battery (primary battery), and other option articles, please follow the law of each country (area).

FOR MAXIMUM SAFETY

These products have been manufactured as a general-purpose part for general industries, and have not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life.

Before using the products for special purposes such as nuclear power, electric power, aerospace, medicine, passenger movement vehicles or under water relays, contact Mitsubishi.

These products have been manufactured under strict quality control. However, when installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails, install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system.

EEP-ROM life

The number of write times to the EEP-ROM, which stores parameter settings, etc., is limited to 100,000. If the total number of the following operations exceeds 100,000, the servo amplifier and/or converter unit may fail when the EEP-ROM reaches the end of its useful life.

Write to the EEP-ROM due to parameter setting changes Home position setting in the absolute position detection system Write to the EEP-ROM due to device changes

Write to the EEP-ROM due to point table changes

Precautions for Choosing the Products

Mitsubishi will not be held liable for damage caused by factors found not to be the cause of Mitsubishi; machine damage or lost profits caused by faults in the Mitsubishi products; damage, secondary damage, accident compensation caused by special factors unpredictable by Mitsubishi; damages to products other than Mitsubishi products; and to other duties.

A — 6

COMPLIANCE WITH EC DIRECTIVES

1. WHAT ARE EC DIRECTIVES?

The EC directives were issued to standardize the regulations of the EU countries and ensure smooth distribution of safety-guaranteed products. In the EU countries, the machinery directive (effective in January, 1995), EMC directive (effective in January, 1996) and low voltage directive (effective in January, 1997) of the EC directives require that products to be sold should meet their fundamental safety requirements and carry the CE marks (CE marking). CE marking applies to machines and equipment into which servo amplifiers have been installed.

(1)EMC directive

The EMC directive applies not to the servo units alone but to servo-incorporated machines and equipment. This requires the EMC filters to be used with the servo-incorporated machines and equipment to comply with the EMC directive. For specific EMC directive conforming methods, refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines (IB(NA)67310).

(2)Low voltage directive

The low voltage directive applies also to servo units alone. Hence, they are designed to comply with the low voltage directive.

This servo is certified by TUV, third-party assessment organization, to comply with the low voltage directive.

(3)Machine directive

Not being machines, the servo amplifiers need not comply with this directive.

2. PRECAUTIONS FOR COMPLIANCE

(1)Servo amplifiers and servo motors used

Use the servo amplifiers and servo motors which comply with the standard model.

Servo amplifier

:MR-J3-10T to MR-J3-22KT

MR-J3-10T1 to MR-J3-40T1

MR-J3-60T4 to MR-J3-22KT4

Servo motor

:HF-MP

HF-KP

HF-SP

(Note)

HF-SP

4 (Note)

HC-RP

HC-UP

HC-LP

HA-LP

(Note)

HA-LP

4 (Note)

Note. For the latest information of compliance, contact Mitsubishi.

A — 7

(2)Configuration

The control circuit provide safe separation to the main circuit in the servo amplifier.

Control box

Reinforced

insulating type

24VDC

No-fuse

Magnetic

power

supply

Servo

breaker

contactor

motor

Servo

M

NFB

MC

amplifier

(3)Environment

Operate the servo amplifier at or above the contamination level 2 set forth in IEC60664-1. For this purpose, install the servo amplifier in a control box which is protected against water, oil, carbon, dust, dirt, etc. (IP54).

(4)Power supply

(a)This servo amplifier can be supplied from star-connected supply with earthed neutral point of overvoltage category III set forth in IEC60664-1. However, when using the neutral point of 400V class for single-phase supply, a reinforced insulating transformer is required in the power input section.

(b)When supplying interface power from external, use a 24VDC power supply which has been insulationreinforced in I/O.

(5)Grounding

(a)To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminals (marked ) of the servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box.

(b)Do not connect two ground cables to the same protective earth (PE) terminal (marked ). Always connect the cables to the terminals one-to-one.

PE terminals

PE terminals

(c)If a leakage current breaker is used to prevent an electric shock, the protective earth (PE) terminals (marked ) of the servo amplifier must be connected to the corresponding earth terminals.

A — 8

(6)Wiring

(a)The cables to be connected to the terminal block of the servo amplifier must have crimping terminals provided with insulating tubes to prevent contact with adjacent terminals.

Crimping terminal

Insulating tube

Cable

(b)Use the servo motor side power connector which complies with the EN Standard. The EN Standard compliant power connector sets are available from us as options. (Refer to section 14.1)

(7)Auxiliary equipment and options

(a)The no-fuse breaker and magnetic contactor used should be the EN or IEC standard-compliant products of the models described in section 14.10.

Use a type B (Note) breaker. When it is not used, provide insulation between the servo amplifier and other device by double insulation or reinforced insulation, or install a transformer between the main power supply and servo amplifier.

Note. Type A: AC and pulse detectable Type B: Both AC and DC detectable

(b)The sizes of the cables described in section 14.9 meet the following requirements. To meet the other requirements, follow Table 5 and Appendix C in EN60204-1.

Ambient temperature: 40 (104) [°C (°F)] Sheath: PVC (polyvinyl chloride)

Installed on wall surface or open table tray

(c)Use the EMC filter for noise reduction.

(8)Performing EMC tests

When EMC tests are run on a machine/device into which the servo amplifier has been installed, it must conform to the electromagnetic compatibility (immunity/emission) standards after it has satisfied the operating environment/electrical equipment specifications.

For the other EMC directive guidelines on the servo amplifier, refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines (IB(NA)67310).

A — 9

CONFORMANCE WITH UL/C-UL STANDARD

(1)Servo amplifiers and servo motors used

Use the servo amplifiers and servo motors which comply with the standard model.

Servo amplifier

:MR-J3-10T to MR-J3-22KT

MR-J3-10T1 to MR-J3-40T1

MR-J3-60T4 to MR-J3-22KT4

Servo motor

:HF-MP

HF-KP

HF-SP

(Note)

HF-SP

4 (Note)

HC-RP

HC-UP

HC-LP

HA-LP

(Note)

HA-LP

4 (Note)

Note. For the latest information of compliance, contact Mitsubishi.

(2)Installation

Install a fan of 100CFM (2.8m3/min) air flow 4[in] (10.16[cm]) above the servo amplifier or provide cooling of at least equivalent capability to ensure that the ambient temperature conforms to the environment conditions (55 or less).

(3)Short circuit rating (SCCR: Short Circuit Current Rating)

Suitable For Use In A Circuit Capable Of Delivering Not More Than 100 kA rms Symmetrical Amperes, 500 Volts Maximum.

(4)Capacitor discharge time

The capacitor discharge time is as listed below. To ensure safety, do not touch the charging section for 15 minutes after power-off.

Servo amplifier

Discharge time

[min]

MR-J3-10T 20T

1

MR-J3-40T 60T(4) 10T1 20T1

2

MR-J3-70T

3

MR-J3-40T1

4

MR-J3-100T(4)

5

MR-J3-200T(4) 350T

9

MR-J3-350T4 500T(4) 700T(4)

10

MR-J3-11KT(4)

4

MR-J3-15KT(4)

6

MR-J3-22KT(4)

8

A — 10

(5)Options and auxiliary equipment

Use UL/C-UL standard-compliant products.

(6)Attachment of a servo motor

For the flange size of the machine side where the servo motor is installed, refer to “CONFORMANCE WITH UL/C-UL STANDARD” in the Servo Motor Instruction Manual (Vol.2).

(7)About wiring protection

For installation in United States, branch circuit protection must be provided, in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any applicable local codes.

For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided, in accordance with the Canada Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes.

<<About the manuals>>

This Instruction Manual and the MELSERVO Servo Motor Instruction Manual (Vol.2) are required if you use the General-Purpose AC servo MR-J3-T for the first time. Always purchase them and use the MR-J3-T safely.

Relevant manuals

Manual name

Manual No.

MELSERVO-J3 Series Instructions and Cautions for Safe Use of AC Servos

IB(NA)0300077

MELSERVO Servo Motor Instruction Manual (Vol.2)

SH(NA)030041

EMC Installation Guidelines

IB(NA)67310

<<About the wires used for wiring>>

Wiring wires mentioned in this instruction manual are selected based on the ambient temperature of 40°C (104).

A — 11

MEMO

A — 12

CONTENTS

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

1 — 1 to 1 -36

1.1 Introduction……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

1 — 1

1.1.1 Features of CC-Link communication functions ……………………………………………………………………..

1 — 1

1.1.2 Function block diagram………………………………………………………………………………………………………

1 — 2

1.1.3 System configuration………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

1 — 5

1.2 Servo amplifier standard specifications………………………………………………………………………………………

1 — 7

1.3

Function list ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

1

-13

1.4

Model code definition ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

1

-15

1.5

Combination with servo motor ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

1

-16

1.6

Structure ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

1

-17

1.6.1 Parts identification …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

1

-17

1.6.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover……………………………………………………………………….

1

-23

1.7

Configuration including auxiliary equipment ………………………………………………………………………………

1

-26

1.8

Selection of operation method………………………………………………………………………………………………….

1

-34

2. INSTALLATION

2 — 1 to 2 — 4

2.1

Installation direction and clearances ………………………………………………………………………………………….

2 — 1

2.2

Keep out foreign materials………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

2 — 3

2.3

Cable stress ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

2 — 3

2.4

Inspection items ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

2 — 4

2.5

Parts having service lives …………………………………………………………………………………………………………

2 — 4

3. CC-LINK COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS

3 — 1 to 3 -60

3.1

Communication specifications …………………………………………………………………………………………………..

3 — 1

3.2

System configuration ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

3 — 2

3.2.1 Configuration example ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….

3 — 2

3.2.2 Wiring method …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

3 — 3

3.2.3 Station number setting ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….

3 — 5

3.2.4 Communication baud rate setting………………………………………………………………………………………..

3 — 6

3.2.5 Occupied station count setting…………………………………………………………………………………………….

3 — 6

3.3

Functions ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

3 — 7

3.3.1 Function block diagram………………………………………………………………………………………………………

3 — 7

3.3.2 Functions ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

3 — 7

3.4

Servo amplifier setting ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

3 — 8

3.5

I/O signals (I/O devices) transferred to/from the programmable controller CPU……………………………..

3 — 9

3.5.1 I/O signals (I/O devices)……………………………………………………………………………………………………..

3 — 9

3.5.2 Detailed explanation of I/O signals ……………………………………………………………………………………..

3 -12

3.5.3 Monitor codes…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

3 -22

3.5.4 Instruction codes (RWwn+2 RWwn+3) ……………………………………………………………………………..

3 -23

3.5.5 Respond codes (RWrn+2) …………………………………………………………………………………………………

3 -31

3.5.6 Setting the CN6 external input signals ………………………………………………………………………………..

3 -32

3.6

Data communication timing charts ……………………………………………………………………………………………

3 -34

3.6.1 Monitor codes…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

3 -34

3.6.2 Instruction codes ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

3 -36

1

3.6.3 Remote register-based position/speed setting……………………………………………………………………..

3

-38

3.7

Function-by-function programming examples…………………………………………………………………………….

3

-41

3.7.1 System configuration example……………………………………………………………………………………………

3

-41

3.7.2 Reading the servo amplifier status ……………………………………………………………………………………..

3

-44

3.7.3 Writing the operation commands………………………………………………………………………………………..

3

-45

3.7.4 Reading the data………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

3

-46

3.7.5 Writing the data ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

3

-49

3.7.6 Operation…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

3

-52

3.8

Continuous operation program example……………………………………………………………………………………

3

-55

3.8.1 System configuration example when 1 station is occupied ……………………………………………………

3

-55

3.8.2 Program example when 1 station is occupied ……………………………………………………………………..

3

-56

3.8.3 System configuration example when 2 stations are occupied………………………………………………..

3

-58

3.8.4 Program example when 2 stations are occupied………………………………………………………………….

3

-59

4. SIGNALS AND WIRING

4 — 1 to 4 -54

4.1

Input power supply circuit …………………………………………………………………………………………………………

4 — 2

4.2

I/O signal connection diagram ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

4 -10

4.3

Explanation of power supply system…………………………………………………………………………………………

4 -11

4.3.1 Signal explanations …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

4 -11

4.3.2 Power-on sequence ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

4 -12

4.3.3 CNP1, CNP2, CNP3 wiring method ……………………………………………………………………………………

4 -14

4.4

Connectors and signal arrangements ……………………………………………………………………………………….

4 -22

4.5

Signal (device) explanation………………………………………………………………………………………………………

4 -23

4.5.1 I/O devices……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

4 -23

4.5.2 Input signals …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

4 -26

4.5.3 Output signals…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

4 -26

4.5.4 Power supply……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

4 -27

4.6

Detailed description of signals (devices)……………………………………………………………………………………

4 -27

4.6.1 Forward rotation start

reverse rotation start temporary stop/restart…………………………………….

4 -27

4.6.2 Movement completion

rough match in position ………………………………………………………………..

4 -28

4.6.3 Torque limit………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

4 -30

4.7

Alarm occurrence timing chart………………………………………………………………………………………………….

4 -31

4.8

Interface…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

4 -32

4.8.1 Internal connection diagram ………………………………………………………………………………………………

4 -32

4.8.2 Detailed description of interfaces………………………………………………………………………………………..

4 -33

4.8.3 Source I/O interfaces ………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

4 -35

4.9

Treatment of cable shield external conductor …………………………………………………………………………….

4 -36

4.10 Connection of servo amplifier and servo motor ………………………………………………………………………..

4 -37

4.10.1 Connection instructions……………………………………………………………………………………………………

4 -37

4.10.2 Power supply cable wiring diagrams…………………………………………………………………………………

4 -38

4.11 Servo motor with an electromagnetic brake……………………………………………………………………………..

4 -48

4.11.1 Safety precautions ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

4 -48

4.11.2 Timing charts………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

4 -49

4.11.3 Wiring diagrams (HF-MP series HF-KP series servo motor) ……………………………………………..

4 -52

4.12 Grounding…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

4 -53

2

5. OPERATION

5 — 1 to 5 -60

5.1 Switching power on for the first time ………………………………………………………………………………………….

5 — 1

5.1.1 Startup procedure………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

5 — 1

5.1.2 Wiring check ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

5 — 2

5.1.3 Surrounding environment……………………………………………………………………………………………………

5 — 3

5.2 Startup ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

5 — 4

5.2.1 Power on and off procedures………………………………………………………………………………………………

5 — 4

5.2.2 Stop………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

5 — 4

5.2.3 Test operation……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

5 — 5

5.2.4 Parameter setting………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

5 — 6

5.2.5 Point table setting………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

5 — 7

5.2.6 Actual operation ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

5 — 7

5.3 Servo amplifier display……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

5 — 8

5.4 Automatic operation mode……………………………………………………………………………………………………….

5

-10

5.4.1 What is automatic operation mode?……………………………………………………………………………………

5

-10

5.4.2 Automatic operation using point table …………………………………………………………………………………

5

-12

5.4.3 Remote register-based position/speed setting……………………………………………………………………..

5

-22

5.5 Manual operation mode …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

5

-28

5.5.1 JOG operation ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

5

-28

5.5.2 Manual pulse generator …………………………………………………………………………………………………….

5

-29

5.6 Manual home position return mode…………………………………………………………………………………………..

5

-31

5.6.1 Outline of home position return…………………………………………………………………………………………..

5

-31

5.6.2 Dog type home position return……………………………………………………………………………………………

5

-34

5.6.3 Count type home position return ………………………………………………………………………………………..

5

-36

5.6.4 Data setting type home position return………………………………………………………………………………..

5

-38

5.6.5 Stopper type home position return ……………………………………………………………………………………..

5

-39

5.6.6 Home position ignorance (servo-on position defined as home position) …………………………………

5

-41

5.6.7 Dog type rear end reference home position return ……………………………………………………………….

5

-42

5.6.8 Count type front end reference home position return ……………………………………………………………

5

-44

5.6.9 Dog cradle type home position return …………………………………………………………………………………

5

-46

5.6.10 Dog type first Z-phase reference home position return ……………………………………………………….

5

-48

5.6.11 Dog type front end reference home position return method…………………………………………………

5

-50

5.6.12 Dogless Z-phase reference home position return method …………………………………………………..

5

-52

5.6.13 Home position return automatic return function………………………………………………………………….

5

-54

5.6.14 Automatic positioning function to the home position……………………………………………………………

5

-55

5.7 Roll feed display function in roll feed mode………………………………………………………………………………..

5

-56

5.8 Absolute position detection system …………………………………………………………………………………………..

5

-57

6. PARAMETERS

6 — 1 to 6 -40

6.1 Basic setting parameters (No.PA

)………………………………………………………………………………………

6 — 1

6.1.1 Parameter list ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

6 — 1

6.1.2 Parameter write inhibit ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….

6 — 2

6.1.3 Selection of command system…………………………………………………………………………………………….

6 — 3

6.1.4 Selection of regenerative option ………………………………………………………………………………………….

6 — 3

6.1.5 Using absolute position detection system …………………………………………………………………………….

6 — 4

6.1.6 Follow-up for absolute value command system in incremental system……………………………………

6 — 4

6.1.7 Feeding function selection ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

6 — 5

3

6.1.8 Electronic gear…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

6 — 6

6.1.9 Auto tuning ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

6 — 7

6.1.10 In-position range………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

6 — 8

6.1.11 Torque limit……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

6 — 9

6.1.12 Selection of servo motor rotation direction…………………………………………………………………………

6

-10

6.1.13 Encoder output pulse ………………………………………………………………………………………………………

6

-10

6.2

Gain/filter parameters (No. PB

)…………………………………………………………………………………………

6

-12

6.2.1 Parameter list …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

6

-12

6.2.2 Detail list ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

6

-13

6.3

Extension setting parameters (No. PC

) ……………………………………………………………………………..

6

-20

6.3.1 Parameter list …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

6

-20

6.3.2 Detail list ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

6

-21

6.3.3 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration…………………………………………………………………………………….

6

-27

6.3.4 Alarm history clear…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

6

-27

6.3.5 Rough match output………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

6

-27

6.3.6 Software limit ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

6

-28

6.4

I/O setting parameters (No. PD

)………………………………………………………………………………………..

6

-29

6.4.1 Parameter list …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

6

-29

6.4.2 Detail list ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

6

-30

6.4.3 Stopping method when the forward stroke end (LSP) or reverse stroke end (LSN) is valid………

6

-38

6.4.4 Stopping method when a software limit is detected………………………………………………………………

6

-39

7. MR Configurator

7 — 1 to 7 -26

7.1

Specifications ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

7 — 1

7.2

System configuration ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

7 — 2

7.3

Station selection………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

7 — 4

7.4

Parameters……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

7 — 5

7.5

Point table……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

7 — 7

7.6

Device assignment method ………………………………………………………………………………………………………

7 — 9

7.7

Test operation ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

7

-13

7.7.1 Jog operation……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

7

-13

7.7.2 Positioning operation…………………………………………………………………………………………………………

7

-15

7.7.3 Motor-less operation …………………………………………………………………………………………………………

7

-18

7.7.4 Output signal (DO) forced output………………………………………………………………………………………..

7

-19

7.7.5 Single-step feed ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

7

-20

7.8

Alarm …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

7

-23

7.8.1 Alarm display……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

7

-23

7.8.2 Batch display of data at alarm occurrence …………………………………………………………………………..

7

-24

7.8.3 Alarm history…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

7

-26

8. PARAMETER UNIT (MR-PRU03)

8 — 1 to 8 -20

8.1

External appearance and key explanations ………………………………………………………………………………..

8 — 2

8.2

Specifications ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

8 — 3

8.3

Outline dimension drawings………………………………………………………………………………………………………

8 — 3

8.4

Connection with servo amplifier…………………………………………………………………………………………………

8 — 4

8.4.1 Single axis ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

8 — 4

8.4.2 Multidrop connection ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

8 — 5

4

8.5 Display……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

8 — 7

8.5.1 Outline of screen transition …………………………………………………………………………………………………

8 — 7

8.5.2 MR-PRU03 parameter unit setting ………………………………………………………………………………………

8 — 8

8.5.3 Monitor mode (status display)……………………………………………………………………………………………..

8 — 9

8.5.4 Alarm/diagnostic mode ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..

8 -11

8.5.5 Parameter mode……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

8 -13

8.5.6 Point table mode ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

8 -14

8.5.7 Test operation mode …………………………………………………………………………………………………………

8 -15

8.6 Error message list …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

8 -19

9. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT

9 — 1 to 9 -12

9.1 Different adjustment methods……………………………………………………………………………………………………

9 — 1

9.1.1 Adjustment on a single servo amplifier…………………………………………………………………………………

9 — 1

9.1.2 Adjustment using MR Configurator………………………………………………………………………………………

9 — 2

9.2 Auto tuning ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

9 — 3

9.2.1 Auto tuning mode ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

9 — 3

9.2.2 Auto tuning mode operation………………………………………………………………………………………………..

9 — 4

9.2.3 Adjustment procedure by auto tuning…………………………………………………………………………………..

9 — 5

9.2.4 Response level setting in auto tuning mode …………………………………………………………………………

9 — 6

9.3 Manual mode 1 (simple manual adjustment)………………………………………………………………………………

9 — 7

9.4 Interpolation mode ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

9 -11

9.5 Differences between MELSERVO-J2-Super and MELSERVO-J3 in auto tuning…………………………..

9 -12

10. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS

10- 1 to 10-16

10.1

Function block diagram………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

10- 1

10.2

Adaptive filter ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

10- 1

10.3

Machine resonance suppression filter……………………………………………………………………………………..

10- 4

10.4

Advanced vibration suppression control ………………………………………………………………………………….

10- 6

10.5

Low-pass filter ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

10-10

10.6

Gain changing function …………………………………………………………………………………………………………

10-10

10.6.1 Applications …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

10-10

10.6.2 Function block diagram…………………………………………………………………………………………………..

10-11

10.6.3 Parameters……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

10-12

10.6.4 Gain changing operation…………………………………………………………………………………………………

10-14

11. TROUBLESHOOTING

11- 1 to 11-14

11.1

Trouble at start-up…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

11- 1

11.2

Operation at error occurrence ………………………………………………………………………………………………..

11- 2

11.3

CC-Link communication error…………………………………………………………………………………………………

11- 2

11.4 When alarm or warning has occurred ……………………………………………………………………………………..

11- 3

11.4.1 Alarms and warning list……………………………………………………………………………………………………

11- 3

11.4.2 Remedies for alarms……………………………………………………………………………………………………….

11- 4

11.4.3 Remedies for warnings …………………………………………………………………………………………………..

11-11

11.5

Point table error……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

11-13

5

12. OUTLINE DRAWINGS

12- 1 to 12-12

12.1

Servo amplifier ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

12- 1

12.2

Connector……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

12-10

13. CHARACTERISTICS

13- 1 to 13-10

13.1

Overload protection characteristics …………………………………………………………………………………………

13- 1

13.2

Power supply equipment capacity and generated loss ……………………………………………………………..

13- 3

13.3

Dynamic brake characteristics………………………………………………………………………………………………..

13- 6

13.3.1 Dynamic brake operation…………………………………………………………………………………………………

13- 6

13.3.2 The dynamic brake at the load inertia moment…………………………………………………………………..

13- 9

13.4

Cable flexing life…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

13-10

13.5

Inrush currents at power-on of main circuit and control circuit…………………………………………………..

13-10

14. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT

14- 1 to 14-90

14.1

Cable/connector sets …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

14- 1

14.1.1 Combinations of cable/connector sets ………………………………………………………………………………

14- 2

14.1.2 Encoder cable/connector sets ………………………………………………………………………………………….

14- 8

14.1.3 Motor power supply cables ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

14-17

14.1.4 Motor brake cables…………………………………………………………………………………………………………

14-18

14.2

Regenerative options ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

14-19

14.3

FR-BU2-(H) brake unit………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

14-32

14.3.1 Selection……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

14-33

14.3.2 Brake unit parameter setting……………………………………………………………………………………………

14-33

14.3.3 Connection example ………………………………………………………………………………………………………

14-34

14.3.4 Outline dimension drawings…………………………………………………………………………………………….

14-41

14.4

Power regeneration converter ……………………………………………………………………………………………….

14-43

14.5

Power regeneration common converter………………………………………………………………………………….

14-46

14.6

External dynamic brake ………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

14-54

14.7

Battery MR-J3BAT ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

14-59

14.8

Heat sink outside mounting attachment (MR-J3ACN)………………………………………………………………

14-60

14.9

Selection example of wires……………………………………………………………………………………………………

14-62

14.10

No-fuse breakers, fuses, magnetic contactors ………………………………………………………………………

14-68

14.11

Power factor improving DC reactor ………………………………………………………………………………………

14-69

14.12

Power factor improving reactors…………………………………………………………………………………………..

14-71

14.13

Relays (recommended) ………………………………………………………………………………………………………

14-73

14.14

Surge absorbers (recommended) ………………………………………………………………………………………..

14-73

14.15

Noise reduction techniques …………………………………………………………………………………………………

14-74

14.16

Leakage current breaker……………………………………………………………………………………………………..

14-81

14.17

EMC filter (recommended) ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

14-83

14.18

MR-HDP01 manual pulse generator…………………………………………………………………………………….

14-88

15. COMMUNICATION FUNCTION

15- 1 to 15-46

15.1

Configuration………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

15- 1

15.2

Communication specifications ………………………………………………………………………………………………..

15- 3

15.2.1 Communication overview…………………………………………………………………………………………………

15- 3

15.2.2 Parameter setting……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

15- 4

6

15.3 Protocol ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

15- 5

15.3.1 Transmission data configuration……………………………………………………………………………………….

15- 5

15.3.2 Character codes……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

15- 6

15.3.3 Error codes …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

15- 7

15.3.4 Checksum………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

15- 7

15.3.5 Time-out operation ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

15- 8

15.3.6 Retry operation……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

15- 8

15.3.7 Initialization…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

15- 9

15.3.8 Communication procedure example………………………………………………………………………………….

15- 9

15.4 Command and data No. list …………………………………………………………………………………………………..

15-10

15.4.1 Read commands ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

15-10

15.4.2 Write commands ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

15-14

15.5 Detailed explanations of commands ………………………………………………………………………………………

15-17

15.5.1 Data processing …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

15-17

15.5.2 Status display ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

15-19

15.5.3 Parameters……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

15-20

15.5.4 External I/O signal statuses (DIO diagnosis) …………………………………………………………………….

15-23

15.5.5 Device ON/OFF……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

15-28

15.5.6 Disable/enable of I/O devices (DIO)…………………………………………………………………………………

15-29

15.5.7 Input devices ON/OFF (test operation) …………………………………………………………………………….

15-30

15.5.8 Test operation mode ………………………………………………………………………………………………………

15-31

15.5.9 Alarm history………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

15-37

15.5.10 Current alarm ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

15-38

15.5.11 Point table……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

15-39

15.5.12 Servo amplifier group designation………………………………………………………………………………….

15-45

15.5.13 Other commands………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

15-46

16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION

16- 1 to 16-112

16.1 Function……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

16- 1

16.1.1 Overview………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

16- 1

16.1.2 Servo amplifier standard specifications (functions only)………………………………………………………

16- 1

16.1.3 Function list ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

16- 2

16.2 I/O signals (I/O devices) transferred to/from the programmable controller CPU…………………………..

16- 3

16.2.1 I/O signals (I/O devices)…………………………………………………………………………………………………..

16- 3

16.2.2 Detailed explanation of I/O signals ……………………………………………………………………………………

16- 5

16.2.3 Monitor codes………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

16-14

16.2.4 Instruction codes (RWwn

2 RWwn 3)………………………………………………………………………..

16-15

16.2.5 Respond codes (RWrn

2) …………………………………………………………………………………………….

16-22

16.3 Signal………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

16-23

16.3.1 Signal (device) explanation……………………………………………………………………………………………..

16-23

16.3.2 Detailed description of signals (devices)…………………………………………………………………………..

16-26

16.4 Switching power on for the first time ………………………………………………………………………………………

16-29

16.4.1 Startup procedure ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

16-29

16.4.2 Wiring check………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

16-30

16.4.3 Surrounding environment ……………………………………………………………………………………………….

16-31

16.5 Startup ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

16-32

16.5.1 Power on and off procedures…………………………………………………………………………………………..

16-32

16.5.2 Stop………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

16-32

7

16.5.3 Test operation ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

16-33

16.5.4 Parameter setting…………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

16-34

16.5.5 Point table setting…………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

16-35

16.5.6 Actual operation …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

16-35

16.6 Servo amplifier display………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

16-36

16.7 Automatic operation mode…………………………………………………………………………………………………….

16-38

16.7.1 What is automatic operation mode?…………………………………………………………………………………

16-38

16.7.2 Automatic operation mode 1 (Rotation direction specifying indexer)……………………………………

16-39

16.7.3 Automatic operation mode 2 (Shortest rotating indexer) …………………………………………………….

16-49

16.8 Manual operation mode………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

16-58

16.8.1 Indexer JOG operation……………………………………………………………………………………………………

16-58

16.8.2 JOG operation ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

16-60

16.9 Home position return mode …………………………………………………………………………………………………..

16-61

16.9.1 Outline of home position return………………………………………………………………………………………..

16-61

16.9.2 Torque limit changing dog type home position return…………………………………………………………

16-63

16.9.3 Torque limit changing data setting type home position return……………………………………………..

16-65

16.9.4 Home position return automatic return function…………………………………………………………………

16-66

16.10 Absolute position detection system………………………………………………………………………………………

16-67

16.11 Parameters………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

16-70

16.11.1 Basic setting parameters (No.PA

)……………………………………………………………………………

16-70

16.11.2 Gain/filter parameters (No.PB

)………………………………………………………………………………..

16-79

16.11.3 Extension setting parameters (No.PC

) …………………………………………………………………….

16-87

16.11.4 I/O setting parameters (No.PD

)……………………………………………………………………………

16-93

16.12 TROUBLESHOOTING ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….

16-98

16.12.1 Trouble at start-up………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

16-98

16.12.2 Operation at error occurrence………………………………………………………………………………………..

16-99

16.12.3 CC-Link communication error………………………………………………………………………………………..

16-99

16.12.4 When alarm or warning has occurred …………………………………………………………………………..

16-100

16.12.5 Point table error………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

16-112

APPENDIX

App.- 1 to App.-30

App. 1 Parameter list………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

App.- 1

App. 2 Signal layout recording paper …………………………………………………………………………………………..

App.- 3

App. 3 Twin type connector: outline drawing for 721-2105/026-000(WAGO) …………………………………..

App.- 4

App. 4 Change of connector sets to the RoHS compatible products……………………………………………….

App.- 5

App. 5 MR-J3-200T-RT servo amplifier………………………………………………………………………………………..

App.- 6

App. 6 Selection example of servo motor power cable …………………………………………………………………

App.-10

App. 7 Parameter list…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

App.-11

App. 8 Program example with MELSEC-A series programmable controllers

(point table positioning operation)

……………..App.-13

8

1.FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

1.FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

1.1 Introduction

The MR-J3-T CC-Link compatible servo amplifier can support the CC-Link communication functions. Up to 42 axes of servo amplifiers can be controlled/monitored from the programmable controller side.

As the servo, it has the function to perform positioning operation by merely setting the position data (target positions), servo motor speeds, acceleration and deceleration time constants, etc. to point tables as if setting them in parameters. The servo amplifier is the most appropriate to configure a program-free, simple positioning system or to simplify a system, for example.

There are 31 points of point tables to be used when 1 station is occupied and 255 points when 2 stations are occupied.

All servo motors are equipped with an absolute position encoder as standard. An absolute position detection system can be configured by merely adding a battery to the servo amplifier. Once the home position has been set, home position return is not required at power on, alarm occurrence, etc.

The MR-J3-T is made easier to use and higher in function by using it with the MR Configurator.

1.1.1 Features of CC-Link communication functions

(1)Fast communication

Fast communication can be made by cyclic transmission of not only bit data but also word data.

(a)The highest communication speed is 10Mbps.

(b)The broadcast polling system ensures as high as 3.9ms to 6.7ms even at the maximum link scan (10Mbps).

(2)Variable communication speed/distance system

Selection of speed/distance allows use in a wide range of areas from a system requiring high speed to a system requiring long distance.

(3)System fault prevention (station separating function)

Because of connection in the bus system, any remote or local station that has become faulty due to poweroff or the like does not affect communications with normal remote and local stations.

In addition, use of the two-piece terminal block allows the unit to be changed during data link.

(4)Factory Automation compatible

As the remote device stations of CC-Link, the servo amplifiers share a link system and can be controlled/monitored with programmable controller user programs.

From the programmable controller side, the running speed, acceleration/deceleration time constant and other settings of servo motors can be changed/checked and the servo motors started and stopped.

1 — 1

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

1.1.2 Function block diagram

The function block diagram of this servo is shown below.

(1) MR-J3-350T or less MR-J3-200T4 or less

Power factor

Regenerative

improving DC

reactor

option

Servo amplifier P1

P2

P( ) C D N(

)

Servo motor

Diode

Relay

(Note 1)

NFB

MC

stack

U

U

L1

(Note 2)

L2

Current

V

V

Power

M

detector

supply

L3

CHARGE

W

W

Regene-

lamp

rative

TR

(Note 4) Cooling fan

Dynamic

L11

Control

brake

RA

Electro-

circuit

24VDC B1

magnetic

L21

power

B2

brake

supply

Model adaptive control

Base

Voltage

Overcurrent

Current

CN2

amplifier

detection

protection

detection

Encoder

Current

control

Point table

No.

Position

Speed

Acceleration

Deceleration

Dwell

Auxiliary

data

time

time

constant

constant

1

1000

1000

80

80

0

0

Speed

2

2000

2000

100

100

0

0

control

3

4000

2000

70

60

500

1

4

500

2000

60

70

1000

1

5

1000

2000

80

80

0

0

Position

6

2000

1000

80

80

0

0

7

1000

1000

80

80

0

0

control

8

1000

1000

100

100

0

0

MR-J3BAT

(Note 3)

1000

1000

100

100

0

0

CN4

Position

255

2000

2000

80

80

0

0

command

Optional battery

creation

(for absolute position

detection system)

USB

RS-422

CN6

CN1

Personal

CN5

CN3

computer

DI/O Control

USB

Servo on

Controller

Start

CC-Link

RS-422

Failure, etc

Note 1. The built-in regenerative resistor is not provided for the MR-J3-10T (1).

2.For 1-phase 200 to 230VAC, connect the power supply to L1, L2 and leave L3 open.

There is no L3 for 1-phase 100 to 120VAC power supply. Refer to section 1.2 for the power supply specification.

3.For the case when 2 stations are occupied. When 1 station is occupied, the point table ends at No.31.

4.Servo amplifiers MR-J3-70T or greater have a cooling fan.

1 — 2

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

(2) MR-J3-350T4 MR-J3-500T(4)

MR-J3-700T(4)

Power factor

improving DC Regenerative

reactor

option

C N

Servo amplifier P1

P2 P

Servo motor

Diode

Relay

NFB

MC

stack

U

U

L1

(Note 1)

L2

Current

V

V

Power

M

detector

supply

L3

CHARGE

W

W

Regene-

lamp

rative

TR

Cooling fan

Dynamic

L11

Control

brake

RA

Electro-

circuit

24VDC B1

magnetic

L21

power

B2

brake

supply

Model adaptive control

Base

Voltage

Overcurrent

Current

CN2

amplifier

detection

protection

detection

Encoder

Current

control

Point table

No.

Position

Speed

Acceleration

Deceleration

Dwell

Auxiliary

data

time

time

constant

constant

1

1000

1000

80

80

0

0

Speed

2

2000

2000

100

100

0

0

control

3

4000

2000

70

60

500

1

4

500

2000

60

70

1000

1

5

1000

2000

80

80

0

0

Position

6

2000

1000

80

80

0

0

7

1000

1000

80

80

0

0

control

8

1000

1000

100

100

0

0

MR-J3BAT

(Note 2)

1000

1000

100

100

0

0

CN4

Position

255

2000

2000

80

80

0

0

command

Optional battery

creation

(for absolute position

detection system)

USB

RS-422

CN6

DI/O Control

Servo on

Start

Failure, etc

Note 1. Refer to section 1.2 for the power supply specification.

CN1

Personal

CN5

CN3

computer

USB

Controller

CC-Link

RS-422

2. For the case when 2 stations are occupied. When 1 station is occupied, the point table ends at No.31.

1 — 3

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

(3) MR-J3-11KT(4) to 22KT(4)

Power factor

improving DC Regenerative reactor option

Servo amplifier

P1

P

C

N

Servo motor

Diode Thyristor

NFB

MC

stack

U

U

L1

(Note 1)

L2

Current

V

V

Power

M

detector

supply

L3

CHARGE

W

W

Regene-

lamp

rative

TR

Cooling fan

L11

Control

RA

Electro-

circuit

24VDC B1

magnetic

L21

power

B2

brake

supply

Model adaptive control

Base

Voltage

Overcurrent

Current

CN2

amplifier

detection

protection

detection

Encoder

Current

control

Point table

No.

Position

Speed

Acceleration

Deceleration

Dwell

Auxiliary

data

time

time

constant

constant

1

1000

1000

80

80

0

0

Speed

2

2000

2000

100

100

0

0

control

3

4000

2000

70

60

500

1

4

500

2000

60

70

1000

1

5

1000

2000

80

80

0

0

Position

6

2000

1000

80

80

0

0

7

1000

1000

80

80

0

0

control

8

1000

1000

100

100

0

0

MR-J3BAT

(Note 2)

1000

1000

100

100

0

0

CN4

Position

255

2000

2000

80

80

0

0

command

Optional battery

creation

(for absolute position

detection system)

USB

RS-422

CN6

DI/O Control

Servo on

Start

Failure, etc

Note 1. Refer to section 1.2 for the power supply specification.

CN1

Personal

CN5

CN3

computer

USB

Controller

CC-Link

RS-422

2. For the case when 2 stations are occupied. When 1 station is occupied, the point table ends at No.31.

1 — 4

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

1.1.3 System configuration

This section provides operations using this servo.

Use of CC-Link enables you to freely configure any system from a single-axis system to an up to 42-axis system.

Set the following values to the point table.

Name

Setting range

Unit

0.001[mm]

Position data

999999 to 999999

0.01[mm]

0.1[mm]

1[mm]

Servo motor speed

0 to max. speed

[r/min]

Acceleration time constant

0 to 20000

[ms]

Deceleration time constant

0 to 20000

[ms]

Dwell

0 to 20000

[ms]

Auxiliary function

0 to 3

(Refer to section 4.2)

There are 31 points of point tables to be used when 1 station is occupied and 255 points when 2 stations are occupied.

(1)Operation using CC-Link communication functions

(a)Operation

All devices can be controlled by CC-Link communication. Also, each point table setting, point table selection, parameter value change, setting, monitor, servo motor operation and others can be performed.

(b)Configuration

Programmable controller

To the next axis

CC-Link master unit

Servo amplifier

Servo amplifier

(Axis 1)

(Axis 2)

CN1

CN1

CN6

CN6

CNP3

CNP3

CN2

CN2

1 — 5

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

(2)Operation using CC-Link communication functions and external input signals

(a)Operation

Using parameter No.PD06 to PD08 and parameter No.PD12, PD14, input devices can be assigned to the external input devices of CN1A and CN1B. The signals assigned to the external input signals cannot be used with the CC-Link communication functions. Output devices can be used with the CN6 connectors and CC-Link communication functions simultaneously.

(b)Configuration

Programmable controller

To the next axis

CC-Link master unit

Servo amplifier

Servo amplifier

(Axis 1)

(Axis 2)

CN1

CN1

CN6

CN6

CNP3

CNP3

CN2

CN2

External I/O

External I/O

signal

signal

1 — 6

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

1.2 Servo amplifier standard specifications

(1) 200V class, 100V class

Servo amplifier

MR-J3-

10T

20T

40T

60T

70T

100T

200T

350T

500T

700T

11KT

15KT

22KT

10T1

20T1

40T1

Item

Voltage/frequency

3-phase or 1-phase 200 to

3-phase 200 to 230VAC, 50/60Hz

1-phase 100V to

230VAC, 50/60Hz

120VAC, 50/60Hz

supply

230VAC: 170 to 253VAC

132VAC

Permissible voltage fluctuation

3-phase or 1-phase 200 to

3-phase 170 to 253VAC

1-phase 85 to

Power

Permissible frequency

Within

5%

fluctuation

Power supply capacity

Refer to section 13.2

Inrush current

Refer to section 13.5

Voltage,

1-phase 200 to 230VAC, 50/60Hz

1-phase 100 to

frequency

120VAC, 50/60Hz

Permissible

1-phase 170 to 253VAC

1-phase 85 to

voltage fluctuation

132VAC

Control circuit

Permissible

power supply

frequency

Within

5%

fluctuation

Input

30W

45W

30W

Inrush current

Refer to section 13.5

Interface power

Voltage

24VDC 10%

Power supply

supply

(Note 1) 150mA

capacity

Control System

Sine-wave PWM control, current control system

Dynamic brake

Built-in

External option

Built-in

Overcurrent shut-off, regenerative overvoltage shut-off, overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay),

Protective functions

servo motor overheat protection, encoder error protection, regenerative brake error protection,

undervoltage, instantaneous power failure protection, overspeed protection, excessive error

protection

Operational

Positioning by specifying the point table No. (255 points)

specifications

Point table

Position command

Set in point table. 1-point feed length setting range:

1[ m] to 999.999[mm]

input

number

Speed command

Set in point table. Acceleration/deceleration time is set in point table.

input

input

S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant is set in parameter No.PC13.

system

System

Signed absolute value command system, incremental value command system, signed absolute

value command/incremental value command specifying system

Command

Operational

Remote register setting is used for positioning.

Position

specifications

Position command

Remote register is used to set position command data.

command

input

Feed length input setting range:

1 m to 999.999m

data input

Remote register is used to make selection from point table.

(when 2

Speed command

Remote register is used to set speed command data (speed).

stations are

input

S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant is set in parameter No.PC13.

occupied)

System

Signed absolute value command system, incremental value command system, signed absolute

value command/incremental value command specifying system

Point table

Point table number input, position data input system

Automatic

Positioning operation is performed once in accordance with the position and speed commands.

mode

operation

Automatic

Varied speed operation (2 to 255 speeds), automatic continuous positioning operation (2 to 255

mode

continuous

points)

Operation

operation

or through CC-Link communication function.

Manual

Jog

Jog operation is performed in accordance with the parameter-set speed command by contact input

operation

Manual pulse

Manual feed is made by manual pulse generator.

mode

generator

Command pulse multiplication:

1, 10 or 100 is selected using parameter.

1 — 7

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

Servo amplifier

MR-J3-

10T

20T

40T

60T

70T

100T

200T

350T

500T

700T

11KT

15KT

22KT

10T1

20T1

40T1

Item

Home position return is made starting with Z-phase pulse after passage of proximity dog.

Dog type

Home position address may be set. Home position shift distance may be set. Home position return

direction may be selected.

Automatic at-dog home position return return/automatic stroke return function.

Home position return is made by counting encoder pulses after contact with proximity dog.

Count type

Home position address may be set. Home position shift value may be set. Home position return

direction may be set.

Automatic at-dog home position return return/automatic stroke return function.

Home position return is made without dog.

Data setting type

Home position may be set at any position by manual operation, etc. Home position address may be

set.

Stopper type

Home position return is made by pressing machine part against stroke end.

Home position address may be set. Home position return direction may be set.

Home position

Position where servo-on (RYn0) is switched on is defined as home position.

ignorance

Home position address may be set.

(Servo-on position

as home position)

Home position return is made with respect to the rear end of a proximity dog.

Dog type rear end

Home position address may be set. Home position shift value may be set. Home position return

mode

Home

reference

direction may be set.

position

Automatic at-dog home position return return/automatic stroke return function.

Operation

return

Home position return is made with respect to the front end of a proximity dog.

mode

Count type front

Home position address may be set. Home position shift value may be set. Home position return

end reference

direction may be set.

Automatic at-dog home position return return/automatic stroke return function.

Home position return is made with respect to the front end of a proximity dog by the first Z-phase

pulse.

Dog cradle type

Home position address may be set. Home position shift value may be set. Home position return

direction may be set.

Automatic at-dog home position return return/automatic stroke return function.

Home position return is made with respect to the front end of a proximity dog by the last Z-phase

Dog type last

pulse.

Home position address may be set. Home position shift value may be set. Home position return

Z-phase reference

direction may be set.

Automatic at-dog home position return return/automatic stroke return function.

Home position return is made to the dog front end with respect to the front end of a proximity dog.

Dog type front end

Home position address may be set. Home position shift value may be set. Home position return

reference

direction may be set.

Automatic at-dog home position return return/automatic stroke return function.

Dogless

Home position return is made with respect to the first Z-phase to the Z-phase.

Home position address may be set. Home position shift value may be set. Home position return

Z-phase reference

direction may be set.

Automatic positioning to home

High-speed automatic return to a defined home position.

position

Absolute position detection, backlash function

Other functions

Overtravel prevention using external limit switch

Software stroke limit

Structure

Self-cooled, open

Force-cooling, open (IP00)

Self-cooled, open

(IP00)

(IP00)

1 — 8

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

Servo amplifier

MR-J3-

10T

20T

40T

60T

70T

100T

200T

350T

500T

700T

11KT

15KT

22KT

10T1

20T1

40T1

Item

In operation

[

]

(Note 2) 0 to

55 (non-freezing)

Ambient

[

]

(Note 2) 32 to

131 (non-freezing)

Environment

temperature

In storage

[

]

20 to 65 (non-freezing)

[

]

4 to

149 (non-freezing)

Ambient

In operation

90%RH or less (non-condensing)

humidity

In storage

Ambient

Indoors (no direct sunlight)

Free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt

Altitude

Max. 1000m above sea level

Vibration

5.9 [m/s2] or less

Mass

[kg]

0.8

0.8

1.0

1.0

1.4

1.4

2.1

2.3

4.6

6.2

18

18

19

0.8

0.8

1.0

[lb]

1.76

1.76

2.21

2.21

3.09

3.09

4.63

5.07

10.1

13.7

39.7

39.7

41.9

1.76

1.76

2.21

Note 1. 150mA is the value applicable when all I/O signals are used. The current capacity can be decreased by reducing the number of I/O points.

2. When closely mounting the servo amplifier of 3.5kW or less, operate them at the ambient temperatures of 0 to 45 (32 to 113) or at 75% or smaller effective load ratio.

1 — 9

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

(2) 400V class

Servo amplifier

MR-J3-

Item

supply

Voltage/frequency

Permissible voltage fluctuation

Permissible frequency

Power

fluctuation

Power supply capacity

Inrush current

Voltage,

frequency

Permissible

Control circuit

voltage fluctuation

Permissible

power supply

frequency

fluctuation

Input

Inrush current

Interface power

Voltage

supply

Power supply

capacity

Control System

Dynamic brake

Protective functions

Operational

specifications

Point table

Position command

input

number

Speed command

input

input

system

System

Command

Operational

Position

specifications

Position command

command

input

data input

(when 2

Speed command

stations are

input

occupied)

System

Automatic

Point table

mode

operation

Automatic

mode

continuous

Operation

operation

Manual

Jog

operation

Manual pulse

mode

generator

60T4

100T4

200T4

350T4

500T4

700T4

11KT4

15KT4

22KT4

3-phase 380 to 480VAC, 50/60Hz

3-phase 323 to 528VAC

Within 5%

Refer to section 13.2

Refer to section 13.5

1-phase 380 to 480VAC, 50/60Hz

1-phase 323 to 528VAC

Within

5%

30W

45W

Refer to section 13.5

24VDC

10%

(Note) 150mA

Sine-wave PWM control, current control system

Built-in External option

Overcurrent shut-off, regenerative overvoltage shut-off, overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay), servo motor overheat protection, encoder error protection, regenerative brake error protection, undervoltage, instantaneous power failure protection, overspeed protection, excessive error protection

Positioning by specifying the point table No. (255 points)

Set in point table. 1-point feed length setting range: 1[m] to 999.999[mm]

Set in point table. Acceleration/deceleration time is set in point table. S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant is set in parameter No.PC13.

Signed absolute value command system, incremental value command system, signed absolute value command/incremental value command specifying system

Remote register setting is used for positioning.

Remote register is used to set position command data.

Feed length input setting range: 1m to 999.999m

Remote register is used to make selection from point table. Remote register is used to set speed command data (speed).

S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant is set in parameter No.PC13.

Signed absolute value command system, incremental value command system, signed absolute value command/incremental value command specifying system

Point table number input, position data input system

Positioning operation is performed once in accordance with the position and speed commands.

Varied speed operation (2 to 255 speeds), automatic continuous positioning operation (2 to 255 points)

Jog operation is performed in accordance with the parameter-set speed command by contact input or through CC-Link communication function.

Manual feed is made by manual pulse generator.

Command pulse multiplication: 1, 10 or 100 is selected using parameter.

1 — 10

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

Servo amplifier

MR-J3-

60T4

100T4

200T4

350T4

500T4

700T4

11KT4

15KT4

22KT4

Item

Home position return is made starting with Z-phase pulse after passage of proximity dog.

Dog type

Home position address may be set. Home position shift distance may be set. Home position return

direction may be selected.

Automatic at-dog home position return return/automatic stroke return function.

Home position return is made by counting encoder pulses after contact with proximity dog.

Count type

Home position address may be set. Home position shift value may be set. Home position return

direction may be set.

Automatic at-dog home position return return/automatic stroke return function.

Home position return is made without dog.

Data setting type

Home position may be set at any position by manual operation, etc. Home position address may be

set.

Stopper type

Home position return is made by pressing machine part against stroke end.

Home position address may be set. Home position return direction may be set.

Home position

Position where servo-on (RYn0) is switched on is defined as home position.

ignorance

Home position address may be set.

(Servo-on position

as home position)

Home position return is made with respect to the rear end of a proximity dog.

Home

Dog type rear end

Home position address may be set. Home position shift value may be set. Home position return

mode

reference

direction may be set.

position

Automatic at-dog home position return return/automatic stroke return function.

Operation

return

Home position return is made with respect to the front end of a proximity dog.

mode

Count type front

Home position address may be set. Home position shift value may be set. Home position return

end reference

direction may be set.

Automatic at-dog home position return return/automatic stroke return function.

Home position return is made with respect to the front end of a proximity dog by the first Z-phase

pulse.

Dog cradle type

Home position address may be set. Home position shift value may be set. Home position return

direction may be set.

Automatic at-dog home position return return/automatic stroke return function.

Home position return is made with respect to the front end of a proximity dog by the last Z-phase

Dog type last

pulse.

Home position address may be set. Home position shift value may be set. Home position return

Z-phase reference

direction may be set.

Automatic at-dog home position return return/automatic stroke return function.

Home position return is made to the dog front end with respect to the front end of a proximity dog.

Dog type front end

Home position address may be set. Home position shift value may be set. Home position return

reference

direction may be set.

Automatic at-dog home position return return/automatic stroke return function.

Dogless

Home position return is made with respect to the first Z-phase to the Z-phase.

Home position address may be set. Home position shift value may be set. Home position return

Z-phase reference

direction may be set.

Automatic positioning to home

High-speed automatic return to a defined home position.

position

Absolute position detection, backlash function

Other functions

Overtravel prevention using external limit switch

Software stroke limit

Structure

Self-cooled, open

Force-cooling, open (IP00)

(IP00)

1 — 11

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

Servo amplifier

MR-J3-

60T4

100T4

200T4

350T4

500T4

700T4

11KT4

15KT4

22KT4

Item

In operation

[

]

0 to

55 (non-freezing)

Ambient

[

]

32 to

131 (non-freezing)

Environment

temperature

In storage

[

]

20 to

65 (non-freezing)

[

]

Indoors (no direct sunlight)

4 to

149 (non-freezing)

Ambient

In operation

90%RH or less (non-condensing)

humidity

In storage

Ambient

Free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt

Altitude

Max. 1000m above sea level

Vibration

5.9 [m/s2] or less

Mass

[kg]

1.7

1.7

2.1

4.6

4.6

6.2

18

18

19

[lb]

3.75

3.75

4.63

10.1

10.1

13.7

39.7

39.7

41.9

Note. 150mA is the value applicable

when all I/O signals are used. The current capacity can be decreased by reducing the number of

I/O points.

1 — 12

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

1.3 Function list

The following table lists the functions of this servo. For details of the functions, refer to the reference field.

Function

Description

Reference

Select the required ones from among 31 preset point tables and perform

Positioning by automatic

operation in accordance with the set values.

Section 5.4

operation

Use the external input signal or communication function to choose the point

tables.

Varied speed operation

Servo motor speed can be varied continuously until the preset moving

Section 5.4.2

distance is reached. (Max. set speeds: 255 speeds)

(4)(b)

Automatic continuous positioning

By merely choosing one point table and starting operation, positioning can

Section 5.4.2 (4)

operation

be executed continuously in accordance with several point tables.

Dog type, count type, data setting type, stopper type, home position

Home position return

ignorance, dog type rear end reference, count type front end reference, dog

Section 5.6

cradle type

High-resolution encoder

High-resolution encoder of 262144 pulses/rev is used as a servo motor

encoder.

Absolute position detection

By merely setting the home position once, home position return need not be

Section 5.7

system

done at each power on.

Gain changing function

You can switch between gains during rotation and gains during stop or use

Section 10.6

an input device to change gains during operation.

Advanced vibration suppression

This function suppresses vibration at the arm end or residual vibration.

Section 10.4

control

Adaptive filter

Servo amplifier detects mechanical resonance and sets filter characteristics

Section 10.2

automatically to suppress mechanical vibration.

Low-pass filter

Suppresses high-frequency resonance which occurs as servo system

Section 10.5

response is increased.

Analyzes the frequency characteristic of the mechanical system by simply

Machine analyzer function

connecting a MR Configurator installed personal computer and servo

amplifier.

MR Configurator is necessary for this function.

Can simulate machine motions on a personal computer screen on the basis

Machine simulation

of the machine analyzer results.

MR Configurator is necessary for this function.

Personal computer changes gains automatically and searches for

Gain search function

overshoot-free gains in a short time.

MR Configurator is necessary for this function.

Slight vibration suppression

Suppresses vibration of 1 pulse produced at a servo motor stop.

Parameters No.

control

PB24

The electronic gear is used to make adjustment so that the servo amplifier

Electronic gear

setting matches the machine moving distance. Also, changing the electronic

Parameter No.

gear value allows the machine to be moved at any multiplication ratio to the

PA06, PA07

moving distance using the servo amplifier.

Auto tuning

Automatically adjusts the gain to optimum value if load applied to the servo

Section 9.2

motor shaft varies.

S-pattern

Acceleration/deceleration can be made smoothly.

Parameters No.

acceleration/deceleration time

PC13

constant

Regenerative option

Used when the built-in regenerative resistor of the servo amplifier does not

Section 14.2

have sufficient regenerative capability for the regenerative power generated.

Used when the regenerative option cannot provide enough regenerative

Brake unit

power.

Section 14.3

Can be used with the servo amplifier of 5kW or more.

Used when the regenerative option cannot provide enough regenerative

Regeneration converter

power.

Section 14.4

Can be used with the servo amplifier of 5kW or more.

Alarm history clear

Alarm history is cleared.

Parameter No.

PC18

1 — 13

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

Function

Description

Reference

I/O signal selection (Device

Any input device such as servo-on (SON) can be assigned to any pin of CN6

Parameter No.

connector.

PD06 to PD08

setting)

PD12

PD14

Torque limit

Servo motor-torque is limited.

Section 4.6.3

Section 6.1.11

Output signal (DO) forced output

Output signal can be forced on/off independently of the servo status.

Section 7.7.4

Use this function for output signal wiring check, etc.

Section 8.5.7(4)

JOG operation positioning operation DO forced output single — step

Section 7.7

Test operation mode

feed.

Section 8.5.7

MR Configurator is necessary for this function.

Limit switch

The servo motor travel region can be limited using the forward rotation

stroke end (LSP)/reverse rotation stroke end (LSN).

Software limit

The travel region is limited using parameters in terms of address.

Section 6.3.6

The function similar to that of a limit switch is limited by parameter.

1 — 14

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

1.4 Model code definition

(1) Rating plate

MITSUBISHI

AC SERVO

Model

MODEL

MR-J3-10T

Capacity

POWER : 100W

Applicable power supply

INPUT

: 0.9A 3PH+1PH200-230V 50Hz

3PH+1PH200-230V 60Hz

1.3A 1PH 200-230V 50/60Hz

Rated output current

OUTPUT : 170V 0-360Hz 1.1A

SERIAL

: A34230001

Serial number

PASSED

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

MADE IN JAPAN

MR-J3-100T(4) or less

With no regenerative resistor Symbol Description

Indicates a servo amplifier of 11k to 22kW

-PX that does not use a regenerative resistor as standard accessory.

Power supply

Symbol

Description

(Note 1)

3-phase or 1-phase 200

Rating plate

None

to 230VAC

(Note 2)

1-phase 100 to 120VAC

1

MR-J3-350T

4

3-phase 380 to 480VAC

Note 1. 1-phase 200V to 230V is

supported by 750W or less.

2. 1-phase 100V to 120V is

supported by 400W or less.

Built-in positioning function

Rated output

Symbol

Rated

output [kW]

10

0.1

20

0.2

Rating plate

40

0.4

60

0.6

70

0.75

MR-J3-700T(4)

100

1

200 2

350 3.5

500 5

700 7

11K 11

15K 15

22K 22

MR-J3-200T(4)

Rating plate

MR-J3-350T4 500T(4)

Rating plate

MR-J3-11KT(4) to 22KT(4)

Rating plate

Rating plate

1 — 15

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

1.5 Combination with servo motor

The following table lists combinations of servo amplifiers and servo motors. The same combinations apply to the servo motors with an electromagnetic brakes and the servo motors with a reduction gear.

Servo motors

Servo amplifier

HF-MP

HF-KP

HF-SP

HC-RP

HC-UP

HC-LP

2000r/min

1000r/min

MR-J3-10T (1)

053

13

053

13

MR-J3-20T (1)

23

23

MR-J3-40T (1)

43

43

MR-J3-60T

51

52

52

MR-J3-70T

73

73

72

MR-J3-100T

81

102

102

MR-J3-200T

121

201

152 202

103 153

152

152

MR-J3-350T

301

352

203

202

202

MR-J3-500T

421

502

353 503

352 502

302

MR-J3-700T

702

MR-J3-11KT

MR-J3-15KT

MR-J3-22KT

Servo motors

Servo amplifier

HA-LP

1000r/min

1500r/min

2000r/min

MR-J3-500T

502

MR-J3-700T

601

701M

702

MR-J3-11KT

801

12K1

11K1M

11K2

MR-J3-15KT

15K1

15K1M

15K2

MR-J3-22KT

20K1

25K1

22K1M

22K2

Servo motors

Servo amplifier

HF-SP

HA-LP

1000r/min

1500r/min

2000r/min

MR-J3-60T4

524

MR-J3-100T4

1024

MR-J3-200T4

1524

2024

MR-J3-350T4

3524

MR-J3-500T4

5024

MR-J3-700T4

7024

6014

701M4

MR-J3-11KT4

8014

12K14

11K1M4

11K24

MR-J3-15KT4

15K14

15K1M4

15K24

MR-J3-22KT4

20K14

22K1M4

22K24

1 — 16

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

1.6 Structure

1.6.1 Parts identification

(1) MR-J3-100T or less

4

5

6

3

7

2

8

1

0

9

4

5

6

4

5

6

3

7

3

7

2

8

2

8

1

0

9

1

0

9

Fixed part (2 places)

Name/Application

Display

The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo status and alarm number.

Baud rate switch (MODE)

MODE

4

5

6

Select the CC-Link communication baud rate.

2

3

7

8

1

0

9

Station number switches (STATION NO.) Set the station number of the servo amplifier.

X10 STATION NO. X1

4

5

6

4

5

6

3

7

3

7

2

8

2

8

1

0

9

1

0

9

Set the one place.

Set the ten place.

Occupied station count switch (SW1)

SW1

Set the number of occupied stations.

Main circuit power supply connector (CNP1) Used to connect the input power supply.

Communication alarm display section Indicates alarms in CC-Link communication.

USB communication connector (CN5)

Used to connect the personal computer.

CC-Link connector (CN1)

Wire the CC-Link cable.

Control circuit connector (CNP2)

Used to connect the control circuit power supply/ regenerative option.

I/O signal connector (CN6)

Used to connect digital I/O signals.

Servo motor power connector (CNP3)

Used to connect the servo motor.

Encoder connector (CN2)

Used to connect the servo motor encoder.

Battery connector (CN4)

Used to connect the battery for absolute position data backup.

Charge lamp

Lit to indicate that the main circuit is charged. While this lamp is lit, do not reconnect the cables.

Battery holder

Contains the battery for absolute position data backup.

Rating plate

Protective earth (PE) terminal ()

Ground terminal.

1 — 17

Detailed explanation

Section 5.3

Chapter 11

Section 3.2.4

Section 3.2.3

Section 3.2.5

Section 11.3

Chapter 7

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Chapter 15

Section 3.2.2

Section 4.1

Section 4.3

Section 12.1

Section 14.2

Section 4.2

Section 4.4

Section 4.1

Section 4.3

Section 12.1

Section 4.10

Section 14.1

Section 5.8

Section 14.7

Section 5.8

Section 1.4

Section 4.1

Section 4.3

Section 12.1

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

(2) MR-J3-200T(4) or less

7 8

Name/Application

Display

The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo status and alarm number.

Baud rate switch (MODE)

MODE

4

5

6

Select the CC-Link communication baud rate.

2

3

7

8

1

0

9

Station number switches (STATION NO.) Set the station number of the servo amplifier.

X10 STATION NO. X1

4

5

6

4

5

6

3

7

3

7

2

8

2

8

1

0

9

1

0

9

Set the one place.

Set the ten place.

Occupied station count switch (SW1)

SW1

Set the number of occupied stations.

Cooling fan

Fixed part (3 places)

Main circuit power supply connector (CNP1)

Used to connect the input power supply.

Communication alarm display section

Indicates alarms in CC-Link communication.

USB communication connector (CN5)

(Note)

Used to connect the personal computer.

CC-Link connector (CN1)

Wire the CC-Link cable.

I/O signal connector (CN6)

Used to connect digital I/O signals.

Encoder connector (CN2)

Used to connect the servo motor encoder.

Battery connector (CN4)

Used to connect the battery for absolute position data backup.

Control circuit connector (CNP2)

Used to connect the control circuit power supply/ regenerative option.

Servo motor power connector (CNP3)

Used to connect the servo motor.

Battery holder

Contains the battery for absolute position data backup.

Charge lamp

Lit to indicate that the main circuit is charged. While this lamp is lit, do not reconnect the cables.

Protective earth (PE) terminal ()

Ground terminal.

Rating plate

Detailed explanation

Section 5.3

Chapter 11

Section 3.2.4

Section 3.2.3

Section 3.2.5

Section 11.3

Chapter 7

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Chapter 15

Section 3.2.2

Section 4.2

Section 4.4

Section 4.10

Section 14.1

Section 5.8

Section 14.7

Section 4.1

Section 4.3

Section 12.1

Section 14.2

Section 4.1

Section 4.3

Section 12.1

Section 5.8

Section 4.1

Section 4.3

Section 12.1

Section 1.4

Note. Connectors (CNP1, CNP2, and CNP3) and appearance of MR-J3-200T servo amplifier have been changed from January 2008 production. Model name of the existing servo amplifier is changed to MR-J3-200T-RT. For MR-J3-200T-RT, refer to appendix 5.

1 — 18

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

(3) MR-J3-350T

4

5

6

3

7

2

8

1

0

9

4

5

6

4

5

6

3

7

3

7

2

8

2

8

1

0

9

1

0

9

Cooling fan

Fixed part (3 places)

Name/Application

Detailed

explanation

Display

Section 5.3

The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo

Chapter 11

status and alarm number.

Baud rate switch (MODE)

3

MODE

Section 3.2.4

5

7

4

6

Select the CC-Link communication baud rate.

2

8

1

0

9

Station number switches (STATION NO.)

Set the station number of the servo amplifier.

X10 STATION NO. X1

4

5

6

4

5

6

Section 3.2.3

2

2

3

7

3

7

8

8

1

0

9

1

0

9

Set the one place.

Set the ten place.

Occupied station count switch (SW1)

SW1

Section 3.2.5

Set the number of occupied stations.

Main circuit power supply connector (CNP1)

Used to connect the input power supply.

Communication alarm display section

Indicates alarms in CC-Link communication.

Section 11.3

USB communication connector (CN5)

Chapter 7

Used to connect the personal computer.

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Chapter 15

CC-Link connector (CN1)

Section 3.2.2

Wire the CC-Link cable.

Servo motor power connector (CNP3)

Section 4.1

Used to connect the servo motor.

Section 4.3

Section 12.1

I/O signal connector (CN6)

Section 4.2

Used to connect digital I/O signals.

Section 4.4

Encoder connector (CN2)

Section 4.10

Used to connect the servo motor encoder.

Section 14.1

Battery connector (CN4)

Section 5.8

Used to connect the battery for absolute position data

Section 14.7

backup.

Control circuit connector (CNP2)

Section 4.1

Used to connect the control circuit power supply/

Section 4.3

regenerative option.

Section 12.1

Section 14.2

Battery holder

Section 5.8

Contains the battery for absolute position data backup.

Charge lamp

Lit to indicate that the main circuit is charged. While

this lamp is lit, do not reconnect the cables.

Protective earth (PE) terminal (

)

Section 4.1

Ground terminal.

Section 4.3

Section 12.1

Rating plate

Section 1.4

1 — 19

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

(4) MR-J3-350T4 MR-J3-500T(4)

POINT

The servo amplifier is shown without the front cover. For removal of the front cover, refer to section 1.6.2.

4

5

6

3

7

2

8

1

0

9

4

5

6

4

5

6

3

7

3

7

2

8

2

8

1

0

9

1

0

9

Cooling fan

Fixed part (4 places)

Name/Application

Display

The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo status and alarm number.

Baud rate switch (MODE)

MODE

4

5

6

Select the CC-Link communication baud rate.

3

7

2

8

1

0

9

Station number switches (STATION NO.) Set the station number of the servo amplifier.

X10 STATION NO. X1

4

5

6

4

5

6

3

7

3

7

2

8

2

8

1

0

9

1

0

9

Set the one place.

Set the ten place.

Occupied station count switch (SW1)

SW1

Set the number of occupied stations.

Communication alarm display section Indicates alarms in CC-Link communication.

USB communication connector (CN5)

Used to connect the personal computer.

CC-Link connector (CN1)

Wire the CC-Link cable.

I/O signal connector (CN6)

Used to connect digital I/O signals.

Battery holder

Contains the battery for absolute position data backup.

Encoder connector (CN2)

Used to connect the servo motor encoder.

Battery connector (CN4)

Used to connect the battery for absolute position data backup.

DC reactor terminal block (TE3)

Used to connect the DC reactor.

Charge lamp

Lit to indicate that the main circuit is charged. While this lamp is lit, do not reconnect the cables.

Main circuit terminal block (TE1)

Used to connect the input power supply and servo motor.

Control circuit terminal block (TE2)

Used to connect the control circuit power supply.

Protective earth (PE) terminal ()

Ground terminal.

Rating plate

Detailed explanation

Section 5.3

Chapter 11

Section 3.2.4

Section 3.2.3

Section 3.2.5

Section 11.3

Chapter 7

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Chapter 15

Section 3.2.2

Section 4.2

Section 4.4

Section 5.8

Section 4.10

Section 14.1

Section 5.8

Section 14.7

Section 4.1

Section 4.3

Section 12.1

Section 14.11

Section 4.1

Section 4.3

Section 12.1

Section 1.4

1 — 20

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

(5) MR-J3-700T(4)

POINT

The servo amplifier is shown without the front cover. For removal of the front cover, refer to section 1.6.2.

4

5

6

3

7

2

8

1

0

9

4

5

6

4

5

6

3

7

3

7

2

8

2

8

1

0

9

1

0

9

Cooling fan

Name/Application

Detailed

explanation

Display

Section 5.3

The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo

Chapter 11

status and alarm number.

Baud rate switch (MODE)

3

MODE

Section 3.2.4

5

7

4

6

Select the CC-Link communication baud rate.

2

8

1

0

9

Station number switches (STATION NO.)

Set the station number of the servo amplifier.

X10 STATION NO. X1

4

5

6

4

5

6

Section 3.2.3

2

2

3

7

3

7

8

8

1

0

9

1

0

9

Set the one place.

Set the ten place.

Occupied station count switch (SW1)

SW1

Section 3.2.5

Set the number of occupied stations.

Communication alarm display section

Indicates alarms in CC-Link communication.

Section 11.3

USB communication connector (CN5)

Chapter 7

Used to connect the personal computer.

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Chapter 15

CC-Link connector (CN1)

Section 3.2.2

Wire the CC-Link cable.

I/O signal connector (CN6)

Section 4.2

Used to connect digital I/O signals.

Section 4.4

Battery holder

Section 5.8

Contains the battery for absolute position data backup.

Encoder connector (CN2)

Section 4.10

Used to connect the servo motor encoder.

Section 14.1

Battery connector (CN4)

Section 5.8

Used to connect the battery for absolute position data

Section 14.7

backup.

DC reactor terminal block (TE3)

Section 4.1

Used to connect the DC reactor.

Section 4.3

Section 12.1

Section 14.11

Charge lamp

Lit to indicate that the main circuit is charged. While

this lamp is lit, do not reconnect the cables.

Fixed part

Control circuit terminal block (TE2)

Used to connect the control circuit power supply.

(4 places)

Section 4.1

Main circuit terminal block (TE1)

Section 4.3

Used to connect the input power supply and servo motor.

Section 12.1

Protective earth (PE) terminal (

)

Ground terminal.

Rating plate

Section 1.4

1 — 21

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

(6) MR-J3-11KT(4) to MR-J3-22KT(4)

POINT

The servo amplifier is shown without the front cover. For removal of the front cover, refer to section 1.6.2.

4

5

6

3

7

2

8

1

0

9

4

5

6

4

5

6

3

7

3

7

2

8

2

8

1

0

9

1

0

9

Fixed part

Cooling fan

(4 places)

Name/Application

Display

The 3-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo status and alarm number.

Baud rate switch (MODE)

MODE

4

5

6

Select the CC-Link communication baud rate.

3

7

2

8

1

0

9

Station number switches (STATION NO.) Set the station number of the servo amplifier.

X10 STATION NO. X1

4

5

6

4

5

6

3

7

3

7

2

8

2

8

1

0

9

1

0

9

Set the one place.

Set the ten place.

Occupied station count switch (SW1)

SW1

Set the number of occupied stations.

Communication alarm display section Indicates alarms in CC-Link communication.

USB communication connector (CN5)

Used to connect the personal computer.

CC-Link connector (CN1)

Wire the CC-Link cable.

I/O signal connector (CN6)

Used to connect digital I/O signals.

Encoder connector (CN2)

Used to connect the servo motor encoder.

Battery connector (CN4)

Used to connect the battery for absolute position data backup.

Battery holder

Contains the battery for absolute position data backup.

Rating plate

Protective earth (PE) terminal ()

Ground terminal.

Detailed explanation

Section 5.3

Chapter 11

Section 3.2.4

Section 3.2.3

Section 3.2.5

Section 11.3

Chapter 7

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Chapter 15

Section 3.2.2

Section 4.2

Section 4.4

Section 4.10

Section 14.1

Section 5.8

Section 14.7

Section 5.8

Section 1.4

Section 4.1

Section 4.3

Section 12.1

Section 14.11

1 — 22

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

1.6.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover

Before removing or installing the front cover, turn off the power and wait for 15 minutes or more until the charge lamp turns off. Then, confirm that the voltage

WARNING between P() and N( ) is safe with a voltage tester and others. Otherwise, an electric shock may occur. In addition, always confirm from the front of the servo

amplifier whether the charge lamp is off or not.

(1) For MR-J3-350T4 MR-J3-500T(4) MR-J3-700T(4)

Removal of the front cover

a)

a)

Hold the ends of lower side of the front cover with

Pull up the cover, supporting at point a).

both hands.

Pull out the front cover to remove.

1 — 23

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

Reinstallation of the front cover

Front cover setting tab

a)

a)

Insert the front cover setting tabs into the sockets of

Pull up the cover, supporting at point a).

servo amplifier (2 places).

Setting tab

Push the setting tabs until they click.

1 — 24

Mitsubishi Electronics MR-J3, MR-J3- T User Manual

1)Fit the front cover installation hooks on the sockets of body cover ( a) to d) ) to reinstall it.

2)Push the front cover until you hear the clicking noise of the installation hook.

Note 1. The cooling fan cover can be locked with enclosed screws (M4 40).

2.By drilling approximately 4 of a hole on the front cover, the front cover can be locked on the body with an enclosed screw (M4

14).

1 — 25

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

1.7 Configuration including auxiliary equipment

POINT

Equipment other than the servo amplifier and servo motor are optional or recommended products.

(1)MR-J3-100T or less

(a) For 3-phase or 1-phase 200V to 230VAC

R S T

(Note 3) Power supply

No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse

Magnetic contactor (MC)

(Note 2)

Line noise

filter

(FR-BSF01)

L1

L2

L3

(Note 2)

Power factor

improving DC

P1

reactor

(FR-BEL)

P2

P C

Regenerative option

MR Configurator

Personal

computer

Servo amplifier

CN5

CC-Link

CN3

CN1

U

CN6

I/O signal

V

W

CN2

CN4

(Note 1) Battery MR-J3BAT

Servo motor

Note 1. The battery (option) is used for the absolute position detection system in the position control mode.

2.The AC reactor can also be used. In this case, the DC reactor cannot be used. When not using DC reactor, short P1 and P2.

3.A 1-phase 200V to 230VAC power supply may be used with the servo amplifier of MR-J3-70T or less.

For 1-phase 200V to 230VAC, connect the power supply to L1 L2 and leave L3 open. Refer to section 1.2 for the power supply specification.

1 — 26

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

(b) For 1-phase 100V to 120VAC

R S

(Note 3) Power supply

No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse

Magnetic contactor (MC)

Power factor improving DC reactor (FR-BEL)

Line noise filter (FR-BSF01)

L1

L2

P C

Regenerative option

MR Configurator

Personal

computer

Servo amplifier

(Note 2)

CN5

CN3

CN1

U

CN6

V

W

CN2

CN4

(Note 1)

Battery

MR-J3BAT

CC-Link

I/O signal

Servo motor

Note 1. The battery (option) is used for the absolute position detection system in the position control mode.

2.The power factor improving DC reactor cannot be used.

3.Refer to section 1.2 for the power supply specification.

1 — 27

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

(2) MR-J3-60T4 MR-J3-100T4

R S T

(Note 3) Power supply

No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse

Magnetic contactor (MC)

(Note 2)

Line noise filter

(FR-BSF01)

Power factor

L3

improving DC

reactor

(FR-BEL-H)

P1

P2

P C

Regenerative option

L11

L21

MR Configurator

Personal

computer

Servo amplifier

CN1

CN6

I/O signal

CN2

CN4

(Note 1) Battery MR-J3BAT

Servo motor

U V W

Note 1. The battery (option) is used for the absolute position detection system in the position control mode.

2.The AC reactor can also be used. In this case, the DC reactor cannot be used. When not using DC reactor, short P1 and P2.

3.Refer to section 1.2 for the power supply specification.

1 — 28

1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION

(3) MR-J3-200T(4)

R S T

(Note 3) Power supply

No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse

MR Configurator

Personal

computer

Magnetic

contactor

(MC)

Line noise filter

(Note 2)

(FR-BSF01)

Servo amplifier

(Note 2)

Power factor

improving

L1

DC reactor

L2

(FR-BEL/

L3

FR-BEL-H)

CN5

CC-Link

P1

CN3

P2

Regenerative P

(Note 4)

L11

option

C

CN1

L22

CN6

I/O signal

CN2

CN4

(Note 1)

Battery

U V W

MR-J3BAT

Servo motor

Note 1. The battery (option) is used for the absolute position detection system in the position control mode.

2.The AC reactor can also be used. In this case, the DC reactor cannot be used. When not using DC reactor, short P1 and P2.

3.Refer to section 1.2 for the power supply specification.

4.Connectors (CNP1, CNP2, and CNP3) and appearance of MR-J3-200T servo amplifier have been changed from January 2008 production. Model name of the existing servo amplifier is changed to MR-J3-200T-RT. For MR-J3-200T-RT, refer to appendix 5.

1 — 29

Все ошибки Mitsubishi AIRTREK, ASX, CARISMA,COLT, DELICA, DIAMANTE, DION, ECLIPSE, ENDEAVOR, GALANT, GRANDIS, GTO, i-MiEV, IO, L200, LANCER, LANCER CLASSIC, LANCER EVO, MINICA, MIRAGE, MONTERO, OUTLANDER, PAJERO, PAJERO SPORT, SPACE STAR, SPACE WAGON, TOWN BOX

FUSO, FUSO Canter, FUSO Fighter, FUSO Super Great

Ошибки Mitsubishi по протоколу OBDI. Самодиагностика.

11 – Датчик кислорода – неисправность

12 – Датчик массового расхода воздуха – неисправность

13 – Датчик температуры впускного воздуха – неисправность

14 – Датчик положения дроссельной заслонки (TPS) – неисправность

15 – Датчик положения двигателя на холостом ходу – неисправность

21 – Датчик температуры охлаждающей жидкости – неисправность

22 – Датчик положения коленчатого вала – неисправность

23 – Датчик положения распределительного вала – неисправность

24 – Датчик скорости автомобиля – неисправность

25 – Датчик барометрического давления – неисправность

31 – Датчик детонации – неисправность

32 – Датчик абсолютного давления – неисправность

36 – Неисправность сигнала регулировки времени зажигания

39 – Датчик кислорода – неисправность

41 – Неисправность форсунки / форсунок

42 – Топливный насос – неисправность

43 – Система отработавших газов (EGR) – неисправность

44 – Катушка зажигания (цилиндры № 1 и № 4) – неисправность

52 – Катушка зажигания (цилиндры № 2 и № 5) – неисправность

53 – Катушка зажигания (цилиндры № 3 и № 6) – неисправность

55 – Управление холостым ходом (IAC) – неисправность датчика положения клапана

59 – Кислородный датчик (задний) – неисправность

61 – Модуль управления трансмиссией – снижение мощности – некорректный сигнал

62 – Система VIC – неисправность датчика положения клапана

71 – Неисправность электромагнитного вакуумного клапана управления тягой (Traction Control)

72 – Неисправность соленоида вентиляционного клапана системы управления тягой (Traction Control)

Ошибки Mitsubishi по протоколу OBDII

Топливная система и воздухоподача

P0000-P0099, P0100-P0199, P0200-P0299

P0001 – Управление регулятором подачи топлива — обрыв цепи

P0002 – Управление регулятором подачи топлива — параметры цепи 

P0003 – Управление регулятором подачи топлива — низкое напряжение

P0004 – Управление регулятором подачи топлива — высокое напряжение

P0005 – Клапан отсечки подачи топлива — обрыв цепи

P0006 – Клапан отсечки подачи топлива — низкий уровень сигнала

P0007 – Клапан отсечки подачи топлива — высокий уровень сигнала

P0008 – Система синхронизации фаз, банк 1 — характеристика двигателя

P0009 – Система синхронизации фаз, банк 2 — характеристика двигателя

P0010 – Привод системы изменения фаз газораспределения, впуск/левый/передний, банк 1 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0011 – Положение распределительного вала, впуск/левый/передний, банк 1 — слишком ранний угол открывания клапанов / нарушение функционирования системы

P0012 – Положение распределительного вала, впуск/левый/передний, банк 1 — слишком поздний угол открывания клапанов

P0013 – Привод системы изменения фаз газораспределения, впуск/левый/передний, банк 1 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0014 – Привод системы изменения фаз газораспределения, выпуск/правый/задний, банк 1 — слишком ранний угол открывания / функционирование системы

P0015 – Привод системы изменения фаз газораспределения, выпуск/правый/задний, банк 1 — слишком поздний угол открывания

P0016 – Положение коленчатого и распределительного валов, банк 1, датчик А — нет соответствия

P0017 – Положение коленчатого и распределительного валов, банк 1, датчик В — корреляция

P0018 – Положение коленчатого и распределительного валов, банк 2, датчик А — корреляция

P0019 – Положение коленчатого и распределительного валов, банк 2, датчик B — корреляция

P0020 – Привод системы изменения фаз газораспределения, впуск/левый/передний, банк 2 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0021 – Положение распределительного вала, впуск/левый/передний, банк 2 — слишком ранний угол открывания клапанов / нарушение функционирования системы

P0022 – Положение распределительного вала, впуск/левый/передний, банк 2 — слишком поздний угол открывания клапанов

P0023 – Привод системы изменения фаз газораспределения, выпуск/правый/задний, банк 2 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0024 – Положение распределительного вала, выпуск/правый/задний, банк 2 — слишком ранний угол открывания / функционирование системы

P0025 – Положение распределительного вала, выпуск/правый/задний, банк 2 — слишком поздний угол открывания

P0030 – Подогреваемый кислородный датчик 1, банк 1, управление нагревателем — неисправность электрической цепи

P0031 – Подогреваемый кислородный датчик 1, банк 1, управление нагревателем — низкое напряжение цепи

P0032 – Подогреваемый кислородный датчик 1, банк 1, управление нагревателем — высокое напряжение цепи

P0033 – Перепускной клапан турбокомпрессора — неисправность электрической цепи

P0034 – Перепускной клапан турбокомпрессора — низкий уровень сигнала

P0035 – Перепускной клапан турбокомпрессора — высокий уровень сигнала

P0036 – Подогреваемый кислородный датчик 2, банк 1, управление нагревателем — неисправность электрической цепи

P0037 – Подогреваемый кислородный датчик 2, банк 1, управление нагревателем — низкое напряжение цепи

P0038 – Подогреваемый кислородный датчик 2, банк 1, управление нагревателем — высокое напряжение цепи

P0039 – Перепускной клапан турбокомпрессора/перепускной клапан приводного нагнетателя, управление — диапазон/функционирование

P0040 – Перепутано подключение кислородных датчиков 1, банка 1 и банка 2

P0041 – Перепутано подключение кислородных датчиков 2, банка 1 и банка 2

P0045 – Э/м клапан управления давлением турбонаддува/ клапан управления давлением наддува приводного нагнетателя — обрыв цепи

P0046 – Э/м клапан управления давлением турбонаддува / давлением наддува приводного нагнетателя — диапазон/функционирование

P0047 – Э/м клапан управления давлением турбонаддува / давлением наддува приводного нагнетателя — низкий уровень сигнала

P0048 – Э/м клапан управления давлением турбонаддува / давлением наддува приводного нагнетателя — высокий уровень сигнала

P0049 – Турбина турбокомпрессора / нагнетателя — превышение скорости

P0050 – Подогреваемый кислородный датчик 1, банк 2, управление нагревателем — неисправность электрической цепи

P0051 – Подогреваемый кислородный датчик 1, банк 2, управление нагревателем — низкий уровень сигнала

P0052 – Подогреваемый кислородный датчик 1, банк 2, управление нагревателем — высокий уровень сигнала

P0053 – Подогреваемый кислородный датчик 1, банк 1 — сопротивление нагревателя

P0054 – Подогреваемый кислородный датчик 1, банк 2 — сопротивление нагревателя

P0055 – Подогреваемый кислородный, банк 1, датчик 3 — сопротивление нагревателя

P0056 – Подогреваемый кислородный датчик 2, банк 2, управление нагревателем — неисправность электрической цепи

P0057 – Подогреваемый кислородный датчик 2, банк 2, управление нагревателем — низкое напряжение цепи нагревателя

P0058 – Подогреваемый кислородный датчик 2, банк 2, управление нагревателем — высокий уровень сигнала

P0059 – Подогреваемый кислородный датчик 1, банк 2 — сопротивление нагревателя

P0060 – Подогреваемый кислородный датчик, банк 2, датчик 2 — сопротивление нагревателя

P0061 – Подогреваемый кислородный датчик, банк 2, датчик 3 — сопротивление нагревателя

P0065 – Форсунка с дополнительным воздушным каналом — диапазон/функционирование

P0066 – Форсунка с дополнительным воздушным каналом — неисправность электрической цепи / низкое напряжение

P0067 – Форсунка с дополнительным воздушным каналом — высоко напряжение цепи

P0068 – Датчик абсолютного давления во впускном коллекторе/датчик расхода воздуха (MAF) — несоответствие положению дроссельной заслонки

P0069 – Датчик абсолютного давления во впускном коллекторе / датчик атмосферного давления — корреляция

P0070 – Датчик температуры окружающего воздуха — неисправность электрической цепи 

P0071 – Датчик температуры окружающего воздуха — диапазон/функционирование

P0072 – Датчик температуры окружающего воздуха — низкий уровень сигнала

P0073 – Датчик температуры окружающего воздуха — высокий уровень выходного сигнала

P0074 – Датчик температуры окружающего воздуха — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0087 – Давление в системе / в топливном коллекторе — слишком низкое

P0088 – Давление в системе / в топливном коллекторе — слишком высокое

P0089 – Регулятор давления топлива 1 — функционирование

P0090 – Регулятор давления топлива 1 — обрыв цепи

P0091 – Регулятор давления топлива 1 — короткое замыкание на массу

P0092 – Регулятор давления топлива 1 — короткое замыкание на «+»

P0093 – Значительная утечка в топливной системе

P0094 – Незначительная утечка в топливной системе

P0100 – Датчик расхода воздуха (массового — MAF) / (объемного — VAF) — неисправность электрической цепи

P0101 – Датчик расхода воздуха (MAF) / (VAF) — диапазон/функционирование

P0102 – Датчик расхода воздуха (MAF) / (VAF) — низкий уровень входного сигнала

P0103 – Датчик расхода воздуха (MAF) / (VAF) — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0104 – Датчик расхода воздуха (MAF) / (VAF) — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0105 – Датчик абсолютного давления во впускном коллекторе (МАР) / датчик атмосферного давления — неисправность электрической цепи

P0106 – Датчик абсолютного давления во впускном коллекторе/датчик атмосферного давления — диапазон/функционирование

P0107 – Датчик абсолютного давления во впускном коллекторе/датчик атмосферного давления — низкий уровень сигнала

P0108 – Датчик абсолютного давления во впускном коллекторе/датчик атмосферного давления — высокий уровень сигнала

P0109 – Датчик абсолютного давления во впускном коллекторе (МАР) / датчик атмосферного давления — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0110 – Датчик температуры воздуха на впуске — неисправность электрической цепи

P0111 – Датчик температуры воздуха на впуске — диапазон/функционирование

P0112 – Датчик температуры воздуха на впуске — низкий уровень сигнала

P0113 – Датчик температуры воздуха на впуске — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0114 – Датчик температуры воздуха на впуске — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0115 – Датчик температуры охлаждающей жидкости — неисправность электрической цепи

P0116 – Датчик температуры охлаждающей жидкости — диапазон/функционирование

P0117 – Датчик температуры охлаждающей жидкости — низкий уровень сигнала

P0118 – Датчик температуры охлаждающей жидкости — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0119 – Датчик температуры охлаждающей жидкости — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0120 – Датчик А положения дроссельной заслонки / датчик А положения педали акселератора — неисправность электрической цепи

P0121 – Датчик А положения дроссельной заслонки / датчик А положения педали акселератора — диапазон/функционирование

P0122 – Датчик «А» положения дроссельной заслонки / датчик «А» положения педали акселератора — низкий уровень сигнала

P0123 – Датчик А положения дроссельной заслонки / датчик А положения педали акселератора — высокий уровень сигнала

P0124 – Датчик А положения дроссельной заслонки / датчик А положения педали акселератора — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0125 – Температура охлаждающей жидкости недостаточна для управления топливоподачей с обратной связью

P0126 – Температура охлаждающей жидкости недостаточна для стабильной работы

P0127 – Слишком высокая температура воздуха на впуске

P0128 – Термостат системы охлаждения — температура охлаждающей жидкости ниже температуры открывания термостата

P0129 – Слишком низкое атмосферное давление

P0130 – Кислородный датчик 1, банк 1 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0131 – Кислородный датчик 1, банк 1 — низкое напряжение

P0132 – Кислородный датчик 1, банк 1 — высокое напряжение

P0133 – Кислородный датчик 1, банк 1 — малое быстродействие

P0134 – Кислородный датчик 1, банк 1 — нет отклика

P0135 – Подогреваемый кислородный датчик 1, банк 1, управление нагревателем — неисправность электрической цепи

P0136 – Кислородный датчик 2, банк 1 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0137 – Кислородный датчик 2, банк 1 — низкое напряжение

P0138 – Кислородный датчик 2, банк 1 — высокое напряжение

P0139 – Кислородный датчик 2, банк 1 — малое быстродействие

P0140 – Кислородный датчик 2, банк 1 — нет отклика

P0141 – Подогреваемый кислородный датчик 2, банк 1, управление нагревателем — неисправность электрической цепи

P0148 – Неправильная подача топлива

P0149 – Неправильный угол опережения впрыска

P0150 – Кислородный датчик 1, банк 2 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0151 – Кислородный датчик 1, банк 2 — низкое напряжение

P0152 – Кислородный датчик 1, банк 2 — высокое напряжение

P0153 – Кислородный датчик 1, банк 2 — малое быстродействие

P0154 – Кислородный датчик 1, банк 2 — нет отклика

P0155 – Кислородный датчик 1, банк 2, управление нагревателем — неисправность электрической цепи

P0156 – Кислородный датчик 2, банк 2 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0157 – Кислородный датчик 2, банк 2 — низкое напряжение

P0158 – Кислородный датчик 2, банк 2 — высокое напряжение

P0159 – Кислородный датчик 2, банк 2 — малое быстродействие

P0160 – Кислородный датчик 2, банк 2 — нет отклика

P0161 – Подогреваемый кислородный датчик 2, банк 2, управление нагревателем — неисправность электрической цепи

P0168 – Слишком высокая температура топлива

P0169 – Несоответствующий состав топлива

P0170 – Топливный баланс, банк 1 — неисправность

P0171 – Слишком бедная топливовоздушная смесь, банк 1

P0172 – Слишком богатая топливовоздушная смесь, банк 1

P0173 – Топливный баланс, банк 2 — неисправность

P0174 – Слишком бедная топливовоздушная смесь, банк 2

P0175 – Слишком богатая топливовоздушная смесь, банк 2

P0176 – Датчик состава смеси — неисправность электрической цепи

P0177 – Датчик состава смеси — диапазон/функционирование

P0178 – Датчик состава смеси — низкий уровень сигнала

P0179 – Датчик состава смеси — высокий уровень сигнала

P0180 – Датчик температуры топлива A — неисправность электрической цепи

P0181 – Датчик температуры топлива A — диапазон/функционирование

P0182 – Датчик температуры топлива A — низкий уровень сигнала

P0183 – Датчик температуры топлива A — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0184 – Датчик температуры топлива A — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0185 – Датчик температуры топлива B — неисправность электрической цепи

P0186 – Датчик температуры топлива B — диапазон/функционирование

P0187 – Датчик температуры топлива B — низкий уровень входного сигнала

P0188 – Датчик температуры топлива B — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0189 – Датчик температуры топлива B — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0190 – Датчик давления в топливном коллекторе — неисправность электрической цепи

P0191 – Датчик давления в топливном коллекторе — диапазон/функционирование

P0192 – Датчик давления в топливном коллекторе — низкий уровень сигнала

P0193 – Датчик давления в топливном коллекторе — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0194 – Датчик давления в топливном коллекторе — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0195 – Датчик температуры моторного масла — неисправность электрической цепи

P0196 – Датчик температуры моторного масла — диапазон/функционирование

P0197 – Датчик температуры моторного масла — низкий уровень сигнала

P0198 – Датчик температуры моторного масла — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0199 – Датчик температуры моторного масла — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0200 – Форсунка — неисправность электрической цепи

P0201 – Форсунка 1 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0202 – Форсунка 2 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0203 – Форсунка 3 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0204 – Форсунка 4 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0205 – Форсунка 5 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0206 – Форсунка 6 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0207 – Форсунка 7 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0208 – Форсунка 8 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0213 – Форсунка холодного пуска 1 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0214 – Форсунка холодного пуска 2 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0215 – Э/м клапан отсечки подачи топлива — неисправность электрической цепи

P0216 – Управление углом опережения впрыска топлива — неисправность электрической цепи

P0217 – Перегрев двигателя

P0218 – Перегрев коробки передач

P0219 – Превышение допустимой частоты вращения коленчатого вала

P0220 – Датчик В положения дроссельной заслонки / датчик В положения педали акселератора — неисправность электрической цепи

P0221 – Датчик В положения дроссельной заслонки / датчик В положения педали акселератора — диапазон/функционирование

P0222 – Датчик В положения дроссельной заслонки / датчик В положения педали акселератора — низкий уровень входного сигнала

P0223 – Датчик В положения дроссельной заслонки / датчик В положения педали акселератора — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0224 – Датчик В положения дроссельной заслонки / датчик В положения педали акселератора — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0230 – Реле топливного насоса — неисправность электрической цепи

P0231 – Реле топливного насоса — низкое напряжение цепи

P0232 – Реле топливного насоса — высокое напряжение цепи

P0233 – Реле топливного насоса — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0234 – Давление турбонаддува — превышен верхний предел

P0235 – Датчик давления наддува A турбокомпрессора/приводного нагнетателя — неисправность электрической цепи

P0236 – Датчик давления наддува A турбокомпрессора/приводного нагнетателя — диапазон/функционирование

P0237 – Датчик давления наддува A турбокомпрессора/приводного нагнетателя — низкий уровень входного сигнала

P0238 – Датчик давления наддува A турбокомпрессора/приводного нагнетателя — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0239 – Датчик давления наддува B турбокомпрессора/приводного нагнетателя — неисправность электрической цепи

P0240 – Датчик давления наддува B турбокомпрессора/приводного нагнетателя — диапазон/функционирование

P0241 – Датчик давления наддува B турбокомпрессора/приводного нагнетателя — низкий уровень входного сигнала

P0242 – Датчик давления наддува B турбокомпрессора/приводного нагнетателя — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0243 – Клапан А управления перепуском газов мимо турбины — неисправность цепи

P0244 – Клапан А управления перепуском газов мимо турбины — диапазон/функционирование

P0245 – Клапан А управления перепуском газов мимо турбины — низкое напряжение цепи

P0246 – Клапан А управления перепуском газов мимо турбины — высокое напряжение цепи

P0247 – Клапан управления перепуском газов мимо турбины B — неисправность цепи

P0248 – Клапан В управления перепуском газов мимо турбины — диапазон/функционирование

P0249 – Клапан управления перепуском газов мимо турбины B — низкий уровень сигнала

P0250 – Клапан управления перепуском газов мимо турбины B — высокий уровень сигнала

P0251 – Дозатор топлива А, ротор/кулачок/форсунка — неисправность электрической цепи

P0252 – Дозатор топлива А, ротор/кулачок/форсунка — диапазон/функционирование

P0253 – Дозатор топлива А, ротор/кулачок/форсунка — низкий уровень сигнала

P0254 – Дозатор топлива А, ротор/кулачок/форсунка — высокий уровень сигнала

P0255 – Дозатор топлива А, ротор/кулачок/форсунка — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0256 – Дозатор топлива B, ротор/кулачок/форсунка — неисправность электрической цепи

P0257 – Дозатор топлива B, ротор/кулачок/форсунка — диапазон/функционирование

P0258 – Дозатор топлива B, ротор/кулачок/форсунка — низкий уровень сигнала

P0259 – Дозатор топлива B, ротор/кулачок/форсунка — высокий уровень сигнала

P0260 – Дозатор топлива B, ротор/кулачок/форсунка — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0261 – Форсунка 1 — низкий уровень сигнала

P0262 – Форсунка 1 — высокий уровень сигнала

P0263 – Цилиндр 1 — неправильный баланс мощности

P0264 – Форсунка 2 — низкий уровень сигнала

P0265 – Форсунка 2 — высокий уровень сигнала

P0266 – Цилиндр 2 — неправильный баланс мощности

P0267 – Форсунка 3 — низкий уровень сигнала

P0268 – Форсунка 3 — высокий уровень сигнала

P0269 – Цилиндр 3 — неправильный баланс мощности

P0270 – Форсунка 4 — низкий уровень сигнала

P0271 – Форсунка 4 — высокий уровень сигнала

P0272 – Цилиндр 4 — неправильный баланс мощности

P0273 – Форсунка 5 — низкий уровень сигнала

P0274 – Форсунка 5 — высокий уровень сигнала

P0275 – Цилиндр 5 — неправильный баланс мощности

P0276 – Форсунка 6 — низкий уровень сигнала

P0277 – Форсунка 6 — высокий уровень сигнала

P0278 – Цилиндр 6 — неправильный баланс мощности

P0279 – Форсунка 7 — низкий уровень сигнала

P0280 – Форсунка 7 — высокий уровень сигнала

P0281 – Цилиндр 7 — неправильный баланс мощности

P0282 – Форсунка 8 — низкий уровень сигнала

P0283 – Форсунка 8 — высокий уровень сигнала

P0284 – Цилиндр 8 — неправильный баланс мощности

P0297 – Превышение допустимой скорости автомобиля

P0298 – Слишком высокая температура моторного масла

P0299 – Турбокомпрессор / приводной нагнетатель — низкое давление наддува

Система зажигания

P0300-P0399


P0300
– Случайные / множественные пропуски зажигания (воспламенения)

P0301 – Цилиндр 1 — пропуски зажигания (воспламенения)

P0302 – Цилиндр 2 — пропуски зажигания (воспламенения)

P0303 – Цилиндр 3 — пропуски зажигания (воспламенения)

P0304 – Цилиндр 4 — пропуски зажигания (воспламенения)

P0305 – Цилиндр 5 — пропуски зажигания (воспламенения)

P0306 – Цилиндр 6 — пропуски зажигания (воспламенения)

P0307 – Цилиндр 7 — пропуски зажигания (воспламенения)

P0308 – Цилиндр 8 — пропуски зажигания (воспламенения)

P0313 – Пропуски зажигания (воспламенения) — низкий уровень топлива

P0314 – Пропуск зажигания (воспламенения) в одном цилиндре — номер цилиндра не распознается

P0315 – Коленчатый вал — отсутствие изменения положения

P0316 – Пропуски зажигания (воспламенения) при запуске — первые 1000 оборотов

P0317 – Нет данных по характеристикам неровностей дорожного покрытия

P0318 – Датчик состояния дорожного покрытия A — неисправность электрической цепи

P0319 – Датчик состояния дорожного покрытия B — неисправность электрической цепи

P0320 – Датчик положения коленчатого вала / датчик частоты вращения коленчатого вала — неисправность электрической цепи

P0321 – Датчик положения коленчатого вала / датчик частоты вращения коленчатого вала — диапазон/функционирование

P0322 – Датчик положения коленчатого вала/датчик частоты вращения коленчатого вала — нет сигнала

P0323 – Датчик положения коленчатого вала / датчик частоты вращения коленчатого вала — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0324 – Ошибка в системе управления по детонации

P0325 – Датчик детонации 1, банк 1 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0326 – Датчик детонации 1, банк 1 — диапазон/функционирование

P0327 – Датчик детонации 1, банк 1 — низкий уровень сигнала

P0328 – Датчик детонации 1, банк 1 — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0329 – Датчик детонации 1, банк 1 — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0330 – Датчик детонации 2, банк 2 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0331 – Датчик детонации 2, банк 2 — диапазон/функционирование

P0332 – Датчик детонации 2, банк 2 — низкий уровень сигнала

P0333 – Датчик детонации 2, банк 2 — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0334 – Датчик детонации 2, банк 2 — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0335 – Датчик положения коленчатого вала — неисправность электрической цепи

P0336 – Датчик положения коленчатого вала — диапазон/функционирование

P0337 – Датчик положения коленчатого вала — низкий уровень сигнала

P0338 – Датчик положения коленчатого вала — высокий уровень сигнала

P0339 – Датчик положения коленчатого вала — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0340 – Датчик положения распределительного вала A, банк 1 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0341 – Датчик положения распределительного вала A, банк 1 — диапазон/функционирование

P0342 – Датчик положения распределительного вала A, банк 1 — низкий уровень сигнала

P0343 – Датчик положения распределительного вала A, банк 1 — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0344 – Датчик положения распределительного вала A, банк 1 — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0345 – Датчик положения распределительного вала A, банк 2 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0346 – Датчик положения распределительного вала A, банк 2 — диапазон/функционирование

P0347 – Датчик положения распределительного вала A, банк 2 — низкий уровень сигнала

P0348 – Датчик положения распределительного вала A, банк 2 — высокий уровень сигнала

P0349 – Датчик положения распределительного вала A, банк 2 — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0350 – Катушка зажигания, первичная/вторичная обмотки — неисправность электрической цепи

P0351 – Катушка зажигания A, первичная/вторичная обмотки — неисправность электрической цепи

P0352 – Катушка зажигания В, первичная/вторичная обмотки — неисправность электрической цепи

P0353 – Катушка зажигания С, первичная/вторичная обмотки — неисправность электрической цепи

P0354 – Катушка зажигания D, первичная/вторичная обмотки — неисправность электрической цепи

P0355 – Катушка зажигания Е, первичная/вторичная обмотки — неисправность электрической цепи

P0356 – Катушка зажигания F, первичная/вторичная обмотки — неисправность электрической цепи

P0357 – Катушка зажигания G, первичная/вторичная обмотки — неисправность электрической цепи

P0358 – Катушка зажигания H, первичная/вторичная обмотки — неисправность электрической цепи

P0363 – Пропуск зажигания (воспламенения) — отсутствие подачи топлива

P0364 – Зарезервировано (ISO/SAE)

P0365 – Датчик В положения распределительного вала, банк 1 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0366 – Датчик В положения распределительного вала, банк 1 — диапазон/функционирование

P0367 – Датчик В положения распределительного вала, банк 1 — низкий уровень сигнала

P0368 – Датчик В положения распределительного вала, банк 1 — высокий уровень сигнала

P0369 – Датчик В положения распределительного вала, банк 1 — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0370 – Опорная точка синхронизации фаз, сигнал А высокого разрешения — неисправность

P0371 – Опорная точка синхронизации фаз, сигнал А высокого разрешения — слишком много импульсов

P0372 – Опорная точка синхронизации фаз, сигнал А высокого разрешения — слишком мало импульсов

P0373 – Опорная точка синхронизации фаз, сигнал А высокого разрешения — хаотичные/пропадающие импульсы

P0374 – Опорная точка синхронизации фаз, сигнал А высокого разрешения — нет импульсов

P0375 – Опорная точка синхронизации фаз, сигнал В высокого разрешения — неисправность

P0376 – Опорная точка синхронизации фаз, сигнал В высокого разрешения — слишком много импульсов

P0377 – Опорная точка синхронизации фаз, сигнал В высокого разрешения — слишком мало импульсов

P0378 – Опорная точка синхронизации фаз, сигнал B высокого разрешения — хаотичные/пропадающие импульсы

P0379 – Опорная точка синхронизации фаз, сигнал В высокого разрешения — нет импульсов

P0380 – Свечи накаливания, цепь А — неисправность

P0381 – Индикатор свечей накаливания — неисправность электрической цепи

P0382 – Свечи накаливания, цепь В — неисправность

P0383 – Блок управления свечами накаливания — низкий уровень сигнала

P0384 – Блок управления свечами накаливания — высокий уровень сигнала

P0385 – Датчик положения коленчатого вала B — неисправность электрической цепи

P0386 – Датчик положения коленчатого вала B — диапазон/функционирование

P0387 – Датчик положения коленчатого вала B — низкий уровень входного сигнала

P0388 – Датчик положения коленчатого вала B — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0389 – Датчик положения коленчатого вала B — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0390 – Датчик «А» положения распределительного вала B, банк 2 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0391 – Датчик В положения распределительного вала, банк 2 — диапазон/функционирование

P0392 – Датчик В положения распределительного вала, банк 2 — низкий уровень входного сигнала

P0393 – Датчик В положения распределительного вала, банк 2 — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0394 – Датчик B положения распределительного вала, банк 2 — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0395 – Датчик давления в цилиндре, цилиндр 1 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0396 – Датчик давления в цилиндре, цилиндр 1 — диапазон/функционирование

P0397 – Датчик давления в цилиндре, цилиндр 1 — низкий уровень сигнала

P0398 – Датчик давления в цилиндре, цилиндр 1 — высокий уровень сигнала

P0399 – Датчик давления в цилиндре, цилиндр 1 — ненадежный/пропадающий контакт электрической цепи

Контроль выбросов

P0400-P0499


P0400
– Система рециркуляции отработавших газов (EGR) — неисправность каналов системы

P0401 – Система рециркуляции отработавших газов (EGR) — недостаточный уровень рециркуляции

P0402 – Система рециркуляции отработавших газов (EGR) — чрезмерный уровень рециркуляции

P0403 – Система рециркуляции отработавших газов (EGR) — неисправность электрической цепи

P0404 – Система рециркуляции отработавших газов (EGR) — диапазон/функционирование

P0405 – Датчик положения клапана А системы рециркуляции ОГ (EGR) — низкий уровень сигнала

P0406 – Датчик положения клапана А системы рециркуляции ОГ (EGR) — высокий уровень сигнала

P0407 – Датчик положения клапана B системы рециркуляции ОГ (EGR) — низкий уровень входного сигнала

P0408 – Датчик положения клапана B системы рециркуляции ОГ (EGR) — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0409 – Датчик А системы рециркуляции отработавших газов (EGR) — неисправность электрической цепи

P0410 – Система подачи воздуха на выпуск — неисправность

P0411 – Система подачи воздуха на выпуск — некорректный расход

P0412 – Э/м клапан А подачи воздуха на выпуск — неисправность электрической цепи

P0413 – Э/м клапан А подачи воздуха на выпуск — обрыв цепи

P0414 – Э/м клапан А подачи воздуха на выпуск — короткое замыкание

P0415 – Э/м клапан B подачи воздуха на выпуск — неисправность электрической цепи

P0416 – Э/м клапан B подачи воздуха на выпуск — обрыв цепи

P0417 – Э/м клапан B подачи воздуха на выпуск — короткое замыкание в цепи 

P0418 – Реле насоса А подачи воздуха на выпуск — неисправность электрической цепи

P0419 – Реле B насоса системы подачи воздуха на выпуск — неисправность электрической цепи

P0420 – Каталитический нейтрализатор, банк 1 — эффективность ниже требуемой

P0421 – Прогрев каталитического нейтрализатора, банк 1 — эффективность ниже требуемой

P0422 – Основной каталитический нейтрализатор, банк 1 — эффективность ниже требуемой

P0423 – Подогреваемый каталитический нейтрализатор, банк 1 — эффективность ниже требуемой

P0424 – Подогреваемый каталитический нейтрализатор, банк 1 — эффективность ниже требуемой

P0425 – Датчик температуры каталитического нейтрализатора, банк 1

P0426 – Датчик температуры каталитического нейтрализатора, банк 1 — диапазон/функционирование

P0427 – Датчик температуры каталитического нейтрализатора, банк 1 — низкий уровень сигнала

P0428 – Датчик температуры каталитического нейтрализатора, банк 1 — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0429 – Нагреватель каталитического нейтрализатора, банк 1 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0430 – Каталитический нейтрализатор, банк 2 — эффективность ниже требуемой

P0431 – Прогрев каталитического нейтрализатора, банк 2 — эффективность ниже требуемой

P0432 – Основной каталитический нейтрализатор, банк 2 — эффективность ниже требуемой

P0433 – Подогреваемый каталитический нейтрализатор, банк 2 — эффективность ниже требуемой

P0434 – Подогреваемый каталитический нейтрализатор, банк 2 — температура ниже требуемой

P0435 – Датчик температуры каталитического нейтрализатора, банк 2

P0436 – Датчик температуры каталитического нейтрализатора, банк 2 — диапазон/функционирование

P0437 – Датчик температуры каталитического нейтрализатора, банк 2 — низкий уровень входного сигнала

P0438 – Датчик температуры каталитического нейтрализатора, банк 2 — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0439 – Нагреватель каталитического нейтрализатора, банк 2 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0440 – Система улавливания паров топлива — неисправность

P0441 – Система улавливания паров топлива — некорректный расход

P0442 – Система улавливания паров топлива — незначительная утечка

P0443 – Э/м клапан аккумулятора паров топлива — неисправность электрической цепи

P0444 – Э/м клапан аккумулятора паров топлива — обрыв цепи

P0445 – Э/м клапан аккумулятора паров топлива — короткое замыкание

P0446 – Система улавливания паров топлива, управление продувкой — неисправность электрической цепи

P0447 – Система улавливания паров топлива, управление продувкой — обрыв цепи

P0448 – Система улавливания паров топлива, управление продувкой — короткое замыкание

P0449 – Система улавливания паров топлива, клапан управления продувкой — неисправность электрической цепи

P0450 – Датчик давления системы улавливания паров топлива — неисправность электрической цепи

P0451 – Датчик давления системы улавливания паров топлива — диапазон/функционирование

P0452 – Датчик давления системы улавливания паров топлива — низкий уровень сигнала

P0453 – Датчик давления системы улавливания паров топлива — высокий уровень сигнала

P0454 – Датчик давления системы улавливания паров топлива — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0455 – Система улавливания паров топлива — значительная утечка

P0456 – Система улавливания паров топлива — крайне незначительная утечка

P0457 – Система улавливания паров топлива — утечка (ослабла или открыта крышка топливозаливной горловины)

P0458 – Система улавливания паров топлива, клапан аккумулятора паров топлива — низкий уровень сигнала

P0459 – Система улавливания паров топлива, клапан аккумулятора паров топлива — высокий уровень сигнала

P0460 – Датчик уровня топлива — неисправность электрической цепи

P0461 – Датчик уровня топлива — диапазон/функционирование

P0462 – Датчик уровня топлива — низкий уровень сигнала

P0463 – Датчик уровня топлива — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0464 – Датчик уровня топлива — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0465 – Датчик расхода через аккумулятор паров топлива — неисправность электрической цепи

P0466 – Датчик расхода через аккумулятор паров топлива — диапазон/функционирование

P0467 – Датчик расхода через аккумулятор паров топлива — низкий уровень сигнала

P0468 – Датчик расхода через аккумулятор паров топлива — высокий уровень сигнала

P0469 – Датчик расхода через аккумулятор паров топлива — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0470 – Датчик давления отработавших газов — неисправность электрической цепи

P0471 – Датчик давления отработавших газов — диапазон/функционирование

P0472 – Датчик давления отработавших газов — низкий уровень сигнала

P0473 – Датчик давления отработавших газов — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0474 – Датчик давления отработавших газов — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0475 – Клапан управления давлением отработавших газов — неисправность электрической цепи

P0476 – Клапан управления давлением отработавших газов — диапазон/функционирование

P0477 – Клапан управления давлением отработавших газов — низкий уровень сигнала

P0478 – Клапан управления давлением отработавших газов — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0479 – Клапан управления давлением отработавших газов — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0480 – Электродвигатель вентилятора 1 системы охлаждения — неисправность электрической цепи

P0481 – Электродвигатель вентилятора 2 системы охлаждения — неисправность электрической цепи

P0482 – Электродвигатель вентилятора системы охлаждения 3 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0483 – Электродвигатель вентилятора системы охлаждения, нормальная проверка — неисправность

P0484 – Электродвигатель вентилятора системы охлаждения — превышение допустимой силы тока в цепи

P0485 – Электродвигатель вентилятора системы охлаждения, питание / масса — неисправность электрической цепи

P0486 – Датчик положения клапана В системы рециркуляции ОГ (EGR) — неисправность электрической цепи

P0487 – Система рециркуляции отработавших газов (EGR), управление положением дроссельной заслонки — неисправность электрической цепи

P0488 – Система рециркуляции отработавших газов (EGR), управление положением заслонки — проблемы диапазона / функционирования

P0489 – Система рециркуляции отработавших газов (EGR) — низкое напряжение цепи

P0490 – Система рециркуляции отработавших газов (EGR) — высокое напряжение цепи

P0491 – Система подачи воздуха на выпуск, банк 1 — неисправность

P0492 – Система подачи воздуха на выпуск, банк 2 — неисправность

P0493 – Превышение частоты вращения электродвигателя вентилятора системы охлаждения (блокировка муфты)

P0494 – Электродвигатель вентилятора системы охлаждения — низкая скорость

P0495 – Электродвигатель вентилятора системы охлаждения — высокая скорость

P0496 – Система улавливания паров топлива — высокий расход при продувке

P0497 – Система улавливания паров топлива — низкий расход при продувке

P0498 – Система улавливания паров топлива, управление продувкой — низкий уровень сигнала

P0499 – Система улавливания паров топлива, управление продувкой — высокий уровень сигнала

Контроль скорости и холостого хода

P0500-P0599

P0500 – Датчик скорости автомобиля — неисправность электрической цепи

P0501 – Датчик скорости автомобиля — диапазон/функционирование

P0502 – Датчик скорости автомобиля — низкий уровень сигнала

P0503 – Датчик скорости автомобиля — сигналы хаотичные / пропадающие / высокого уровня

P0504 – Выключатель А/В стоп-сигналов (датчик положения педали тормоза) — корреляция

P0505 – Система управления частотой вращения холостого хода — неисправность

P0506 – Система управления частотой вращения холостого хода — частота вращения ниже допустимой

P0507 – Система управления частотой вращения холостого хода — частота вращения выше допустимой

P0508 – Управление перепуском воздуха на холостом ходу — низкий уровень сигнала

P0509 – Управление перепуском воздуха на холостом ходу — высокий уровень сигнала

P0510 – Датчик полностью закрытого положения дроссельной заслонки — неисправность электрической цепи

P0511 – Управление перепуском воздуха на холостом ходу — неисправность электрической цепи

P0512 – Цепь управления стартером — неисправность

P0513 – Некорректный ключ иммобилайзера (неправильный код)

P0514 – Датчик температуры аккумуляторной батареи — диапазон/функционирование

P0515 – Датчик температуры аккумуляторной батареи — диапазон/функционирование

P0516 – Датчик температуры аккумуляторной батареи — низкое напряжение цепи

P0517 – Датчик температуры аккумуляторной батареи — высокое напряжение цепи

P0518 – Управление перепуском воздуха на холостом ходу — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0519 – Управление перепуском воздуха на холостом ходу — функционирование

P0520 – Датчик давления моторного масла — неисправность электрической цепи

P0521 – Датчик давления моторного масла — диапазон/функционирование

P0522 – Датчик давления моторного масла — низкое напряжение

P0523 – Датчик давления моторного масла — высокое напряжение

P0524 – Давление моторного масла слишком низкое

P0525 – Система поддержания скорости (круиз-контроль), управление приводом — диапазон/функционирование

P0526 – Электродвигатель вентилятора системы охлаждения, датчик скорости — неисправность электрической цепи

P0527 – Электродвигатель вентилятора системы охлаждения, датчик скорости — диапазон/функционирование

P0528 – Электродвигатель вентилятора системы охлаждения, датчик скорости — нет сигнала

P0529 – Электродвигатель вентилятора системы охлаждения, датчик скорости — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0530 – Датчик давления хладагента системы кондиционирования — неисправность электрической цепи

P0531 – Датчик давления хладагента системы кондиционирования — диапазон/функционирование

P0532 – Датчик давления хладагента системы кондиционирования — низкий уровень сигнала

P0533 – Датчик давления хладагента системы кондиционирования — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0534 – Недостаток хладагента в системе кондиционирования

P0535 – Датчик температуры за испарителем (кондиционер) — неисправность электрической цепи

P0536 – Датчик температуры за испарителем (кондиционер) — диапазон/функционирование

P0537 – Датчик температуры за испарителем системы кондиционирования — низкий уровень сигнала

P0538 – Датчик температуры за испарителем системы кондиционирования — высокий уровень сигнала

P0539 – Датчик температуры за испарителем системы кондиционирования — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0550 – Датчик/выключатель по давлению усилителя рулевого управления — неисправность электрической цепи

P0551 – Датчик-выключатель по давлению усилителя рулевого управления — диапазон/функционирование

P0552 – Датчик/выключатель по давлению усилителя рулевого управления — низкий уровень сигнала

P0553 – Датчик/выключатель по давлению усилителя рулевого управления — высокий уровень сигнала

P0554 – Датчик/выключатель по давлению усилителя рулевого управления — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0555 – Датчик давления в системе усилителя тормозной системы — неисправность электрической цепи

P0556 – Датчик давления в системе усилителя тормозной системы — диапазон/функционирование

P0557 – Датчик давления в системе усилителя тормозной системы — низкий уровень сигнала

P0558 – Датчик давления в системе усилителя тормозной системы — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0559 – Датчик давления в системе усилителя тормозной системы — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0564 – Система поддержания скорости (круиз-контроль), многофункциональный переключатель (входной сигнал А) — неисправность электрической цепи

P0565 – Главный выключатель системы поддержания скорости (круиз-контроля), сигнал «ON» — неисправность

P0566 – Главный выключатель системы поддержания скорости (круиз-контроля), сигнал «OFF» — неисправность

P0567 – Переключатель выбора режима работы системы поддержания скорости (круиз-контроля), сигнал «RESUME» — неисправность

P0568 – Главный выключатель системы поддержания скорости (круиз-контроля), сигнал «SET» — неисправность

P0569 – Переключатель выбора режима работы системы поддержания скорости (круиз-контроля), сигнал «COAST» — неисправность

P0570 – Система поддержания скорости (круиз-контроль), сигнал датчика положения педали акселератора — неисправность

P0571 – Выключатель педали тормоза A (система поддержания скорости) — неисправность электрической цепи

P0572 – Концевой выключатель А педали тормоза (система поддержания скорости) — низкий уровень сигнала

P0573 – Концевой выключатель А педали тормоза (система поддержания скорости) — высокий уровень сигнала

P0574 – Система поддержания скорости (круиз-контроль) — слишком высокая скорость автомобиля

P0575 – Система поддержания скорости (круиз-контроль) — неисправность цепи входного сигнала

P0576 – Система поддержания скорости (круиз-контроль) — низкий уровень входного сигнала

P0577 – Система поддержания скорости (круиз-контроль) — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0578 – Система поддержания скорости (круиз-контроль), многофункциональный переключатель (входной сигнал А) — цепь блокирована

P0579 – Система поддержания скорости (круиз-контроль), многофункциональный переключатель (входной сигнал А) — диапазон/функционирование

P0580 – Система поддержания скорости (круиз-контроль), многофункциональный переключатель (входной сигнал А) — низкий уровень сигнала

P0581 – Система поддержания скорости (круиз-контроль), многофункциональный переключатель (входной сигнал А) — высокий уровень сигнала

P0582 – Система поддержания скорости (круиз-контроль), управление разрежением — обрыв цепи

P0583 – Система поддержания скорости (круиз-контроль), управление разрежением — низкое напряжение цепи

P0584 – Система поддержания скорости (круиз-контроль), управление разрежением — высокое напряжение цепи

P0585 – Система поддержания скорости (круиз-контроль), многофункциональный переключатель (входной сигнал А/В) — корреляция

P0597 – Система управления нагревателем термостата — обрыв цепи

P0598 – Система управления нагревателем термостата — низкое напряжение цепи

P0599 – Система управления нагревателем термостата — высокое напряжение цепи

Электронный блок управления (ЭБУ) и его подсистемы

P0600-P0699


P0600
– Шина данных CAN — неисправность

P0601 – Электронный блок управления двигателем — ошибка контрольной суммы памяти

P0602 – Электронный блок управления двигателем — ошибка программирования

P0603 – Электронный блок управления двигателем — ошибка памяти КАМ

P0604 – Электронный блок управления двигателем — ошибка памяти RAM

P0605 – Электронный блок управления двигателем — ошибка памяти ROM

P0606 – Электронный блок управления двигателем (ECM) / блок управления силовым агрегатом (PCM) — неисправность процессора

P0607 – Электронный блок управления двигателем — функционирование

P0608 – Электронный блок управления двигателем, датчик скорости автомобиля (выходной сигнал А) — неисправность

P0609 – Электронный блок управления двигателем, датчик скорости автомобиля (выходной сигнал В) — неисправность

P0610 – Электронный блок управления двигателем — ошибка опции автомобиля

P0611 – Блок управления топливными форсунками — функционирование

P0612 – Блок управления топливными форсунками — цепь управления реле

P0613 – Электронный блок управления КПП (TCM) — ошибка процессора

P0614 – Электронный блок управления двигателем (ECM) / электронный блок управления КПП (TCM) — несоответствие

P0615 – Реле стартера — неисправность электрической цепи

P0616 – Реле стартера — низкий уровень сигнала

P0617 – Реле стартера — высокий уровень сигнала

P0618 – Блок управления подачей альтернативного топлива — ошибка памяти KAM

P0619 – Блок управления подачей альтернативного топлива — ошибка памяти RAM/ROM

P0620 – Управление генератором — неисправность электрической цепи

P0621 – Индикатор зарядки — неисправность электрической цепи

P0622 – Генератор, управление обмоткой возбуждения — неисправность электрической цепи

P0623 – Индикатор зарядки, управление — неисправность электрической цепи

P0624 – Индикатор незакрытой крышки заливной горловины, управление — неисправность электрической цепи

P0625 – Вывод обмотки возбуждения генератора — низкий уровень сигнала

P0626 – Вывод обмотки возбуждения генератора — высокий уровень сигнала

P0627 – Управление топливным насосом — обрыв цепи

P0628 – Управление топливным насосом — низкий уровень сигнала

P0629 – Управление топливным насосом — высокий уровень сигнала

P0630 – VIN не запрограммирован или не подходит — ECM/PCM

P0631 – Не запрограммирован электронный блок управления АКПП или не соответствует идентификационному номеру автомобиля

P0632 – Не запрограммирован одометр — ECM/PCM

P0633 – Не запрограммирован ключ иммобилайзера — ECM/PCM

P0634 – Электронный блок управления силовым агрегатом/двигателем/КПП (PCM/ECM/TCM) — высокая внутренняя температура

P0635 – Управление усилителем рулевого управления — неисправность электрической цепи

P0636 – Управление усилителем рулевого управления — низкий уровень сигнала

P0637 – Управление усилителем рулевого управления — высокий уровень сигнала

P0638 – Управление приводом дроссельной заслонки, банк 1 — диапазон/функционирование

P0639 – Управление приводом дроссельной заслонки, банк 2 — диапазон/функционирование

P0640 – Управление подогревом воздуха на впуске — неисправность электрической цепи

P0641 – Опорное напряжение датчика A — обрыв цепи

P0642 – Опорное напряжение датчика A — низкий уровень сигнала

P0643 – Опорное напряжение датчика A — высокий уровень сигнала

P0644 – Дисплей водителя, обмен данными (последовательный) — неисправность электрической цепи

P0645 – Реле электромагнитной муфты компрессора кондиционера — неисправность электрической цепи

P0646 – Реле электромагнитной муфты компрессора кондиционера — низкий уровень сигнала 

P0647 – Реле электромагнитной муфты компрессора кондиционера — высокий уровень сигнала

P0648 – Индикатор иммобилайзера, управление — неисправность электрической цепи

P0649 – Индикатор системы поддержания скорости (круиз-контроля), управление — неисправность цепи

P0650 – Индикатор неисправности (MIL), управление — неисправность электрической цепи

P0651 – Опорное напряжение датчика B — обрыв цепи

P0652 – Опорное напряжение датчика B — низкий уровень

P0653 – Опорное напряжение датчика B — высокое напряжение цепи

P0654 – Частота вращения коленчатого вала, выходной сигнал — неисправность электрической цепи

P0655 – Индикатор перегрева двигателя — неисправность электрической цепи

P0656 – Индикация уровня топлива — неисправность электрической цепи

P0666 – Датчик внутренней температуры электронного блока управления двигателем/КПП/силового агрегата (ECM/PCM/TCM) — неисправность электрической цепи

P0667 – Датчик внутренней температуры электронного блока управления двигателем/КПП/силового агрегата (ECM/PCM/TCM) — диапазон/функционирование

P0668 – Датчик внутренней температуры электронного блока управления двигателем/КПП/силового агрегата (ECM/PCM/TCM) — низкий уровень сигнала

P0669 – Датчик внутренней температуры электронного блока управления двигателем/КПП/силового агрегата (ECM/PCM/TCM) — высокий уровень сигнала

P0670 – Блок управления свечами накаливания — неисправность электрической цепи

P0671 – Свеча накаливания, цилиндр 1 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0672 – Свеча накаливания, цилиндр 2 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0673 – Свеча накаливания, цилиндр 3 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0674 – Свеча накаливания, цилиндр 4 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0675 – Свеча накаливания, цилиндр 5 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0676 – Свеча накаливания, цилиндр 6 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0677 – Свеча накаливания, цилиндр 7 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0678 – Свеча накаливания, цилиндр 8 — неисправность электрической цепи

P0683 – Связь блока управления свечами накаливания с ECM/PCM

P0684 – Связь блока управления свечами накаливания с ECM/PCM, ошибка связи — диапазон/функционирование

P0685 – Реле системы управления двигателем — обрыв цепи

P0686 – Реле системы управления двигателем — низкий уровень сигнала

P0687 – Реле системы управления двигателем — короткое замыкание на массу

P0688 – Реле системы управления двигателем — короткое замыкание на «+»

P0689 – Реле системы управления двигателем — низкий уровень сигнала в контрольной цепи

P0690 – Реле системы управления двигателем — высокий уровень сигнала в контрольной цепи

P0691 – Электродвигатель вентилятора 1 системы охлаждения — низкий уровень сигнала

P0692 – Электродвигатель вентилятора 1 системы охлаждения — высокий уровень сигнала

P0693 – Электродвигатель вентилятора 2 системы охлаждения — низкий уровень сигнала

P0694 – Электродвигатель вентилятора 2 системы охлаждения — высокий уровень сигнала

P0695 – Электродвигатель вентилятора 3 системы охлаждения — низкий уровень сигнала

P0696 – Электродвигатель вентилятора 3 системы охлаждения — высокий уровень сигнала

Трансмиссия

P0700-P0799, P0800-P0899, P0900-P0999


P0700
– Управление АКПП, запрос неисправностей (MIL) — неисправность электрической цепи

P0701 – Система управления АКПП — диапазон/функционирование

P0702 – Система управления АКПП — электрическая неисправность

P0703 – Выключатель стоп-сигналов B — неисправность электрической цепи

P0704 – Концевой выключатель (датчик положения) педали сцепления — неисправность электрической цепи

P0705 – Датчик положения селектора АКПП, входной сигнал PRNDL — неисправность электрической цепи

P0706 – Датчик положения селектора КПП — диапазон/функционирование

P0707 – Датчик положения селектора АКПП — низкий уровень сигнала

P0708 – Датчик положения селектора АКПП — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0709 – Датчик положения селектора АКПП — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0710 – Датчик температуры рабочей жидкости АКПП — неисправность электрической цепи

P0711 – Датчик температуры рабочей жидкости КПП — диапазон/функционирование

P0712 – Датчик температуры рабочей жидкости КПП — низкий уровень сигнала

P0713 – Датчик температуры рабочей жидкости КПП — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0714 – Датчик температуры рабочей жидкости КПП — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0715 – Датчик частоты вращения входного вала АКПП (турбины гидротрансформатора) — неисправность электрической цепи

P0716 – Датчик частоты вращения входного вала АКПП (турбины гидротрансформатора) — диапазон/функционирование

P0717 – Датчик частоты вращения входного вала АКПП (турбины гидротрансформатора) — нет сигнала

P0718 – Датчик частоты вращения входного вала АКПП (турбины гидротрансформатора) — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0719 – Выключатель стоп-сигналов B — низкий уровень сигнала

P0720 – Датчик частоты вращения выходного вала — неисправность электрической цепи

P0721 – Датчик частоты вращения выходного вала — диапазон/функционирование

P0722 – Датчик частоты вращения выходного вала — нет сигнала

P0723 – Датчик частоты вращения выходного вала — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0724 – Выключатель стоп-сигналов B — высокий уровень сигнала

P0725 – Частота вращения коленчатого вала, входной сигнал — неисправность электрической цепи

P0726 – Частота вращения коленчатого вала, входной сигнал — диапазон/функционирование

P0727 – Частота вращения коленчатого вала, входной сигнал — нет сигнала

P0728 – Частота вращения коленчатого вала, входной сигнал — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0729 – 6-я передача — некорректное передаточное отношение

P0730 – Некорректное передаточное отношение

P0731 – 1-я передача — некорректное передаточное отношение

P0732 – 2-я передача — некорректное передаточное отношение

P0733 – 3-я передача — некорректное передаточное отношение

P0734 – 4-я передача — некорректное передаточное отношение

P0735 – 5-я передача — некорректное передаточное отношение

P0736 – Передача заднего хода — некорректное передаточное отношение

P0737 – Электронный блок управления АКПП, частота вращения — выходная цепь

P0738 – Электронный блок управления АКПП, частота вращения — низкий уровень выходного сигнала

P0739 – Электронный блок управления АКПП, частота вращения — высокий уровень выходного сигнала

P0740 – Электромагнитный клапан муфты блокировки гидротрансформатора — неисправность электрической цепи

P0741 – Электромагнитный клапан муфты блокировки гидротрансформатора — функционирование или «залипание» в закрытом состоянии

P0742 – Электромагнитный клапан муфты блокировки гидротрансформатора — «залипание» в открытом состоянии

P0743 – Электромагнитный клапан муфты блокировки гидротрансформатора — электрическая неисправность

P0744 – Электромагнитный клапан муфты блокировки гидротрансформатора — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0745 – Электромагнитный клапан управления давлением рабочей жидкости КПП — неисправность электрической цепи

P0746 – Электромагнитный клапан управления давлением рабочей жидкости КПП — функционирование или «залипание» в закрытом состоянии

P0747 – Электромагнитный клапан управления давлением рабочей жидкости КПП — «залипание» в открытом состоянии

P0748 – Электромагнитный клапан управления давлением рабочей жидкости КПП — электрическая неисправность

P0749 – Электромагнитный клапан управления давлением рабочей жидкости КПП — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0750 – Э/м клапан А переключения передач — неисправность электрической цепи

P0751 – Э/м клапан А переключения передач — функционирование или «залипание» в закрытом состоянии

P0752 – Э/м клапан А переключения передач — «залипание» в открытом состоянии

P0753 – Э/м клапан А переключения передач — электрическая неисправность

P0754 – Э/м клапан А переключения передач — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0755 – Э/м клапан В переключения передач — неисправность электрической цепи

P0756 – Э/м клапан В переключения передач — функционирование или «залипание» в закрытом состоянии

P0757 – Э/м клапан В переключения передач — «залипание» в открытом состоянии

P0758 – Э/м клапан В переключения передач — электрическая неисправность

P0759 – Э/м клапан B переключения передач — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0760 – Э/м клапан С переключения передач — неисправность электрической цепи

P0761 – Э/м клапан С переключения передач — функционирование или «залипание» в закрытом состоянии

P0762 – Э/м клапан С переключения передач — «залипание» в открытом состоянии

P0763 – Э/м клапан С переключения передач — электрическая неисправность

P0764 – Э/м клапан C переключения передач — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0765 – Э/м клапан D переключения передач — неисправность электрической цепи

P0766 – Э/м клапан D переключения передач — функционирование или «залипание» в закрытом состоянии

P0767 – Э/м клапан D переключения передач — «залипание» в открытом состоянии

P0768 – Э/м клапан D переключения передач — электрическая неисправность

P0769 – Э/м клапан D переключения передач — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0770 – Э/м клапан E переключения передач — неисправность электрической цепи

P0771 – Э/м клапан E переключения передач — функционирование или «залипание» в закрытом состоянии

P0772 – Э/м клапан E переключения передач — «залипание» в открытом состоянии

P0773 – Э/м клапан E переключения передач — электрическая неисправность

P0774 – Э/м клапан E переключения передач — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0775 – Э/м клапан В управления давлением — неисправность

P0776 – Э/м клапан B управления давлением — функционирование или «залипание» в закрытом состоянии

P0777 – Э/м клапан В управления давлением — «залипание» в открытом состоянии

P0778 – Э/м клапан В управления давлением — электрическая неисправность

P0779 – Э/м клапан В управления давлением — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0780 – Выбор передачи — неисправность переключения

P0781 – Выбор передачи, 1-2 — неисправность переключения

P0782 – Выбор передачи, 2-3 — неисправность переключения

P0783 – Выбор передачи, 3-4 — неисправность переключения

P0784 – Выбор передачи, 4-5 — неисправность переключения

P0785 – Электромагнитный клапан переключения / синхронизации передач — неисправность электрической цепи

P0786 – Электромагнитный клапан переключения / синхронизации передач — диапазон/функционирование

P0787 – Электромагнитный клапан синхронизации переключения передач — низкий уровень

P0788 – Электромагнитный клапан синхронизации переключения передач — высокий уровень

P0789 – Электромагнитный клапан синхронизации переключения передач — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0790 – Переключатель выбора режима работы АКПП — неисправность электрической цепи

P0791 – Датчик частоты вращения промежуточного вала КПП — неисправность электрической цепи

P0792 – Датчик частоты вращения промежуточного вала КПП — диапазон/функционирование

P0793 – Датчик частоты вращения промежуточного вала КПП — нет сигнала

P0794 – Датчик частоты вращения промежуточного вала КПП — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0795 – Э/м клапан С управления давлением рабочей жидкости КПП — неисправность электрической цепи

P0796 – Э/м клапан C управления давлением рабочей жидкости КПП — функционирование или «залипание» в закрытом состоянии

P0797 – Э/м клапан C управления давлением рабочей жидкости КПП — «залипание» в открытом состоянии

P0798 – Э/м клапан С управления давлением рабочей жидкости КПП — электрическая неисправность

P0799 – Э/м клапан C управления давлением рабочей жидкости КПП — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0800 – Управление раздаточной коробкой, запрос неисправностей (MIL) — неисправность электрической цепи

P0801 – Цепь блокировки включения передачи заднего хода — неисправность электрической цепи

P0802 – Управление АКПП, запрос неисправностей (MIL) — обрыв цепи

P0803 – Электромагнитный клапан цепи повышения передачи (1-4 передача), пропуски при переключении — неисправность электрической цепи

P0804 – Индикатор пропуска переключения в цепи повышения передачи (1-4 передача) — неисправность электрической цепи

P0805 – Датчик положения сцепления (муфты) — неисправность электрической цепи

P0806 – Датчик положения сцепления (муфты) — диапазон/функционирование

P0807 – Датчик положения сцепления (муфты) — низкий уровень сигнала

P0808 – Датчик положения сцепления (муфты) — высокий уровень сигнала

P0809 – Датчик положения сцепления (муфты) — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0810 – Ошибка в управлении сцеплением (муфтой)

P0811 – Повышенное проскальзывание сцепления (муфты)

P0812 – Передача заднего хода — неисправность входной цепи

P0813 – Передача заднего хода — неисправность выходной цепи

P0814 – Индикатор положения селектора — неисправность электрической цепи

P0815 – Переключатель выбора передач КПП, повышение передачи — неисправность электрической цепи

P0816 – Переключатель выбора передач КПП, понижение передачи — неисправность электрической цепи

P0817 – Цепь блокировки стартера — неисправность

P0818 – Датчик-выключатель разъединения потока мощности — неисправность электрической цепи

P0819 – Переключатель выбора передач КПП, повышение/понижение передачи — корреляция с диапазоном

P0820 – Датчик положения X-Y рычага переключения — неисправность электрической цепи

P0821 – Датчик положения X рычага переключения — неисправность электрической цепи

P0822 – Датчик положения Y рычага переключения — неисправность электрической цепи

P0823 – Датчик положения X рычага переключения — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0824 – Датчик положения Y рычага переключения — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0825 – Переключатель положения (рычаг переключения качающегося типа) — неисправность электрической цепи

P0826 – Переключатель выбора передач КПП, повышение/понижение передачи — неисправность электрической цепи

P0827 – Переключатель выбора передач КПП, повышение/понижение передачи — низкий уровень сигнала

P0828 – Переключатель выбора передач КПП, повышение/понижение передачи — высокий уровень сигнала

P0829 – Переключение с 5-й на 6-ю передачу

P0830 – Концевой выключатель (датчик положения) А педали сцепления — неисправность электрической цепи

P0831 – Концевой выключатель (датчик положения) А педали сцепления — низкий уровень сигнала

P0832 – Концевой выключатель (датчик положения) А педали сцепления — высокий уровень сигнала

P0833 – Концевой выключатель (датчик положения) B педали сцепления — неисправность электрической цепи

P0834 – Концевой выключатель (датчик положения) B педали сцепления — низкий уровень входного сигнала

P0835 – Концевой выключатель (датчик положения) В педали сцепления — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0836 – Выключатель режима 4WD — неисправность электрической цепи

P0837 – Выключатель режима 4WD — диапазон/функционирование

P0838 – Выключатель режима 4WD — низкий уровень сигнала

P0839 – Выключатель режима 4WD — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0840 – Датчик А давления рабочей жидкости КПП — неисправность электрической цепи

P0841 – Датчик А давления рабочей жидкости КПП — диапазон/функционирование

P0842 – Датчик А давления рабочей жидкости КПП — низкий уровень сигнала

P0843 – Датчик А давления рабочей жидкости КПП — высокий уровень сигнала

P0844 – Датчик А давления рабочей жидкости АКПП — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0845 – Датчик B давления рабочей жидкости КПП — неисправность электрической цепи

P0846 – Датчик В давления рабочей жидкости КПП — диапазон/функционирование

P0847 – Датчик B давления рабочей жидкости КПП — низкий уровень входного сигнала

P0848 – Датчик В давления рабочей жидкости КПП — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0849 – Датчик B давления рабочей жидкости КПП — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0850 – Выключатель запрещения запуска («P»/»N») — неисправность цепи входного сигнала

P0851 – Выключатель запрещения запуска («P»/»N») — низкий уровень входного сигнала

P0852 – Выключатель запрещения запуска («P»/»N») — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0853 – Выключатель режима движения — неисправность цепи входного сигнала

P0854 – Выключатель режима движения — низкий уровень входного сигнала

P0855 – Выключатель режима движения — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0856 – Входной сигнал противобуксовочной системы — неисправность

P0857 – Входной сигнал противобуксовочной системы — диапазон/функционирование

P0858 – Входной сигнал противобуксовочной системы — низкий уровень

P0859 – Входной сигнал противобуксовочной системы — высокий уровень

P0860 – Линия связи блока управления переключением — неисправность

P0861 – Линия связи блока управления переключением — низкий уровень сигнала

P0862 – Линия связи блока управления переключением — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0863 – Электронный блок управления КПП (TCM), связь — неисправность электрической цепи

P0864 – Электронный блок управления КПП (TCM), связь — диапазон/функционирование

P0865 – Электронный блок управления КПП (TCM), связь — низкий уровень входного сигнала

P0866 – Электронный блок управления КПП (TCM), связь — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0867 – Датчик давления рабочей жидкости АКПП

P0868 – Датчик давления рабочей жидкости АКПП — низкое

P0869 – Датчик давления рабочей жидкости АКПП — высокое

P0870 – Датчик C давления рабочей жидкости КПП — неисправность электрической цепи

P0871 – Датчик С давления рабочей жидкости КПП — диапазон/функционирование

P0872 – Датчик C давления рабочей жидкости КПП — низкий уровень сигнала

P0873 – Датчик C давления рабочей жидкости КПП — высокий уровень сигнала

P0874 – Датчик C давления рабочей жидкости КПП — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0875 – Датчик D давления рабочей жидкости АКПП — неисправность электрической цепи

P0876 – Датчик D давления рабочей жидкости КПП — диапазон/функционирование

P0877 – Датчик D давления рабочей жидкости АКПП — низкое напряжение цепи

P0878 – Датчик D давления рабочей жидкости АКПП — высокое напряжение цепи

P0879 – Датчик D давления рабочей жидкости КПП — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0880 – Электронный блок управления АКПП — неисправность цепи питания

P0881 – Электронный блок управления АКПП — неисправность цепи питания (диапазон / функционирование)

P0882 – Электронный блок управления АКПП — низкое напряжение цепи питания

P0883 – Электронный блок управления АКПП — высокое напряжение цепи питания

P0884 – Электронный блок управления КПП (TCM), входной сигнал питания — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0885 – Реле питания электронного блока управления КПП (TCM), управление — обрыв цепи

P0886 – Реле питания электронного блока управления КПП (TCM), управление — низкий уровень сигнала

P0887 – Реле питания электронного блока управления КПП (TCM), управление — высокий уровень сигнала

P0888 – Реле питания электронного блока управления КПП (TCM) — неисправность контрольной цепи

P0889 – Реле питания электронного блока управления КПП (TCM) — диапазон/функционирование контрольной цепи

P0890 – Реле питания электронного блока управления КПП (TCM) — низкий уровень сигнала в контрольной цепи

P0891 – Реле питания электронного блока управления КПП (TCM) — высокий уровень сигнала в контрольной цепи

P0892 – Реле питания электронного блока управления КПП (TCM) — ненадежный контакт контрольной цепи

P0893 – Одновременное включение нескольких передач

P0894 – Проскальзывание компонентов АКПП

P0895 – Слишком малое время переключения

P0896 – Слишком большое время переключения

P0897 – Ухудшение качества рабочей жидкости

P0898 – Управление АКПП, запрос неисправностей (MIL) — низкое напряжение цепи

P0899 – Управление АКПП, запрос неисправностей (MIL) — высокое напряжение цепи

P0900 – Привод сцепления — обрыв цепи

P0901 – Привод сцепления — диапазон/функционирование

P0902 – Привод сцепления — низкое напряжение цепи

P0903 – Привод сцепления — высокое напряжение цепи

P0904 – Цепь выбора диапазона коробки передач — неисправность

P0905 – Цепь выбора диапазона коробки передач — диапазон/функционирование

P0906 – Цепь выбора диапазона коробки передач — низкое напряжение

P0907 – Цепь выбора диапазона коробки передач — высокое напряжение

P0908 – Цепь выбора диапазона коробки передач — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0909 – Ошибка выбора диапазона коробки передач

P0910 – Привод выбора диапазона коробки передач — обрыв цепи

P0911 – Привод выбора диапазона коробки передач — диапазон/функционирование

P0912 – Привод выбора диапазона коробки передач — низкое напряжение цепи

P0913 – Привод выбора диапазона коробки передач — высокое напряжение цепи

P0914 – Цепь определения включенной передачи — неисправность

P0915 – Цепь определения включенной передачи — диапазон/функционирование

P0916 – Цепь определения включенной передачи — низкое напряжение цепи

P0917 – Цепь определения включенной передачи — высокое напряжение цепи

P0918 – Цепь определения включенной передачи — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0919 – Контроль включенной передачи — ошибка

P0920 – Привод включения передач переднего хода — обрыв цепи

P0921 – Привод включения передач переднего хода — диапазон/функционирование

P0922 – Привод включения передач переднего хода — низкое напряжение цепи

P0923 – Привод включения передач переднего хода — высокое напряжение цепи

P0924 – Привод включения передачи заднего хода — обрыв цепи

P0925 – Привод включения передачи заднего хода — диапазон/функционирование

P0926 – Привод включения передачи заднего хода — низкое напряжение цепи

P0927 – Привод включения передачи заднего хода — высокое напряжение цепи

P0928 – Электромагнитный клапан блокировки переключения передач — обрыв цепи

P0929 – Электромагнитный клапан блокировки переключения передач — диапазон/функционирование

P0930 – Электромагнитный клапан блокировки переключения передач — низкое напряжение цепи

P0931 – Электромагнитный клапан блокировки переключения передач — высокое напряжение цепи

P0932 – Датчик давления в гидросистеме — неисправность электрической цепи

P0933 – Датчик давления в гидросистеме — диапазон/функционирование

P0934 – Датчик давления в гидросистеме — низкий уровень сигнала

P0935 – Датчик давления в гидросистеме — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0936 – Датчик давления в гидросистеме — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0937 – Датчик температуры рабочей жидкости в гидросистеме — неисправность электрической цепи

P0938 – Датчик температуры рабочей жидкости в гидросистеме — диапазон/функционирование

P0939 – Датчик температуры рабочей жидкости в гидросистеме — низкий уровень сигнала

P0940 – Датчик температуры рабочей жидкости в гидросистеме — высокий уровень входного сигнала

P0941 – Датчик температуры рабочей жидкости в гидросистеме — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0942 – Блок создания давления в гидросистеме

P0943 – Блок создания давления в гидросистеме — цикл работы слишком короткий

P0944 – Блок создания давления в гидросистеме — потеря давления

P0945 – Реле насоса гидросистемы — обрыв цепи

P0946 – Реле насоса гидросистемы — диапазон/функционирование

P0947 – Реле насоса гидросистемы — низкое напряжение цепи

P0948 – Реле насоса гидросистемы — высокое напряжение цепи

P0949 – Коробка передач с автоматизированным переключением (ASM) — не проведено адаптивное обучение

P0950 – Коробка передач с автоматизированным переключением (ASM), управление — неисправность электрической цепи

P0951 – Коробка передач с автоматизированным переключением (ASM), управление — диапазон/функционирование

P0952 – Коробка передач с автоматизированным переключением (ASM), управление — низкий уровень сигнала

P0953 – Коробка передач с автоматизированным переключением (ASM), управление — высокий уровень сигнала

P0954 – Коробка передач с автоматизированным переключением (ASM), управление — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0955 – Коробка передач с автоматизированным переключением (ASM), режим — неисправность электрической цепи

P0956 – Коробка передач с автоматизированным переключением (ASM), режим — диапазон/функционирование

P0957 – Коробка передач с автоматизированным переключением (ASM), режим — низкий уровень сигнала

P0958 – Коробка передач с автоматизированным переключением (ASM), режим — высокий уровень сигнала

P0959 – Коробка передач с автоматизированным переключением (ASM), режим — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0960 – Э/м клапан А управления давлением — обрыв цепи

P0961 – Э/м клапан А управления давлением — диапазон/функционирование

P0962 – Э/м клапан А управления давлением — низкий уровень сигнала

P0963 – Э/м клапан А управления давлением — высокий уровень сигнала

P0964 – Э/м клапан B управления давлением — обрыв цепи

P0965 – Э/м клапан B управления давлением — диапазон/функционирование

P0966 – Э/м клапан B управления давлением — низкий уровень сигнала

P0967 – Э/м клапан B управления давлением — высокий уровень сигнала

P0968 – Э/м клапан C управления давлением — обрыв цепи

P0969 – Э/м клапан C управления давлением — диапазон/функционирование

P0970 – Э/м клапан C управления давлением — низкий уровень сигнала

P0971 – Э/м клапан C управления давлением — высокий уровень сигнала

P0972 – Э/м клапан A переключения передач — диапазон/функционирование

P0973 – Э/м клапан А переключения передач — низкий уровень сигнала

P0974 – Э/м клапан А переключения передач — высокий уровень сигнала

P0975 – Э/м клапан В переключения передач — диапазон/функционирование

P0976 – Э/м клапан B переключения передач — низкий уровень сигнала

P0977 – Э/м клапан B переключения передач — высокий уровень сигнала

P0978 – Э/м клапан C переключения передач — диапазон/функционирование

P0979 – Э/м клапан С переключения передач — низкий уровень сигнала

P0980 – Э/м клапан C переключения передач — высокий уровень сигнала

P0981 – Э/м клапан D переключения передач — диапазон/функционирование

P0982 – Э/м клапан D переключения передач — низкий уровень сигнала

P0983 – Э/м клапан D переключения передач — высокий уровень сигнала

P0984 – Э/м клапан E переключения передач — диапазон/функционирование

P0985 – Э/м клапан E переключения передач — низкий уровень сигнала

P0986 – Э/м клапан E переключения передач — высокий уровень сигнала

P0987 – Датчик Е давления рабочей жидкости АКПП — неисправность электрической цепи

P0988 – Датчик E давления рабочей жидкости КПП — диапазон/функционирование

P0989 – Датчик Е давления рабочей жидкости АКПП — низкое напряжение цепи

P0990 – Датчик Е давления рабочей жидкости АКПП — высокое напряжение цепи

P0991 – Датчик Е давления рабочей жидкости АКПП — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0992 – Датчик F давления рабочей жидкости АКПП — неисправность электрической цепи

P0993 – Датчик E давления рабочей жидкости КПП — диапазон/функционирование

P0994 – Датчик F давления рабочей жидкости АКПП — низкое напряжение цепи

P0995 – Датчик F давления рабочей жидкости АКПП — высокое напряжение цепи

P0996 – Датчик F давления рабочей жидкости АКПП — ненадежный контакт электрической цепи

P0997 – Э/м клапан F переключения передач — диапазон/функционирование

P0998 – Э/м клапан F переключения передач — низкий уровень сигнала

P0999 – Э/м клапан F переключения передач — высокий уровень сигнала

0 0 голоса
Рейтинг статьи
Подписаться
Уведомить о
guest

0 комментариев
Старые
Новые Популярные
Межтекстовые Отзывы
Посмотреть все комментарии

А вот еще интересные материалы:

  • Яшка сломя голову остановился исправьте ошибки
  • Ясность цели позволяет целеустремленно добиваться намеченного исправьте ошибки
  • Ясность цели позволяет целеустремленно добиваться намеченного где ошибка
  • Mitsubishi melservo je ошибки
  • Mitsubishi lancer 10 ошибка p0110